University of Nebraska Medical Center - BidNet

University of Nebraska Medical Center

Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property

Construction Documents

Project Manual

IFC Package

September 17, 2021

HDR Project No. 3827-10307944

This page intentionally left blank.

HDR Project No. 3827-10307944 University of Nebraska Medical Center September 17, 2021

Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package Table of Contents

00 01 02 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 — PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 01 07 - SEALS PAGE

00 11 16 - INVITATION TO BIDDERS

00 21 13 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00 31 32 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA

00 40 00 - SAMPLE FORMS

00 72 00 - GENERAL CONDITIONS

00 90 00 - GROUP PURCHASING AGREEMENT – VIZIENT

DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 - SUMMARY OF WORK

01 14 00 - WORK RESTRICTIONS

01 23 00 - ALTERNATES

01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01 31 00 - COORDINATION

01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01 42 00 - REFERENCES

01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

01 66 00 - OFF-SITE STORED MATERIALS

01 70 00 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

01 74 19 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01 78 23 - OPERATON AND MAINTENANCE DATA

01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

DIVISION 02 — EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 00 - DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE

03 20 00 - CONCRETE REINFORCING

DIVISION 04 — MASONRY

04 05 05 - COLD AND HOT WEATHER MASONRY PROCEDURES

04 05 10 - MASONRY CLEANING

04 05 16 - MASONRY GROUTING

04 05 23 - MASONRY ACCESSORIES

04 22 00 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY (CMU)

DIVISION 07 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 13 26 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING

DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL

26 00 10 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

26 05 43 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

DIVISION 27 — COMMUNICATIONS

27 05 00 - BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

27 10 00 - COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - STRUCTURED CABLING

DIVISION 31 — EARTHWORK

31 20 00 - EARTH MOVING


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package Table of Contents

00 01 02 - 2

D I V I S I O N 0 0

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING

REQUIREMENTS


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package SEALS PAGE

00 01 07 - 1

SECTION 00 01 07

SEALS PAGE

I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below

was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly

registered architect under the laws of the State of Nebraska.

Bryan Nielsen September 17, 2021

(INSERT NAME) Date

My license renewal date is December 31, 2022.

Pages or sheets covered by this seal: General and Architecture



registered engineer under the laws of the State of Nebraska.

Brian Emmerich September 17, 2021

(INSERT NAME) Date


Pages or sheets covered by this seal: Civil




James Wingert September 17, 2021

(INSERT NAME) Date


Pages or sheets covered by this seal: Structural




Jeff Denevan September 17, 2021

(INSERT NAME) Date


Pages or sheets covered by this seal: Mechanical


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package SEALS PAGE

00 01 07 - 2




Andrew Wilson September 17, 2021

(INSERT NAME) Date


Pages or sheets covered by this seal: Electrical




Kelly Carman September 17, 2021

(INSERT NAME) Date


Pages or sheets covered by this seal: Telecom


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package INVITATION TO BIDDERS

00 11 16 - 1

SECTION 00 11 16

INVITATION TO BIDDERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 INVITATION

A. The Board of Regents of the University of Nebraska invites Bids for Demolition & Site Prep of

Former JPL/MMI Property at The University of Nebraska Medical Center, Omaha, Nebraska

(UNMC).

1.2 RFP NUMBER: RFP-9735

1.3 PROJECT NUMBER: P-21236

1.4 IDENTIFICATION OF CONTRACT(S) TO BE AWARDED: LUMP-SUM

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

1.5 COMPLETION

A. Substantial Completion shall be 270 calendar days after the date indicated in Notice to

Proceed/Mobilization to site.

B. Completion of this Work in a timely manner is of the essence.

C. There is a Liquidated Damages clause.

1.6 QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Bidder shall include a current Contractor’s Qualification Statement with their Bid for this

Project. See Section 00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders for requirements.

1.7 MANDATORY PRE-BID MEETING

A. All Bidders are required to attend and other interested parties are invited to attend a Pre-Bid meeting for distribution of information.

1. TIME: 9/30/2021 10:00 am, Local Time.

2. PLACE: Due to current COVID restrictions the pre-bid meeting will be held virtually via Zoom. URL, meeting ID & passcode are as follows:

a. URL:

https://unmc.zoom.us/j/96413805810?pwd=Q09KQy9iUXdrMGNzWmdCMzl6c1dmd z09

b. Meeting ID: 964 1380 5810

c. Passcode: 161914

3. Walkthrough: Optional tours of the inside of the complex will be available by appointment

only on the morning of 10/1/2021. Contractors wishing to tour the inside of the buildings

may do so by making an appointment with the UNMC Project Manager [email protected]. A maximum of two representatives from each bidding

company will be allowed.

1.8 TIME AND PLACE FOR RECEIPT OF BIDS

A. TIME: 10/12/2021 2:00 pm, Local Time

B. Bid responses must be submitted via eBid: https://unlebid.ionwave.net. No paper or emailed

bids will be accepted. Bidder registration in eBid is required and can be completed here:

https://unlebid.ionwave.net.

1.9 BID DOCUMENTS: BIDDING DOCUMENTS MAY BE EXAMINED AND

DOWNLOADED FROM HTTPS://UNLEBID.IONWAVE.NET.

https://unmc.zoom.us/j/96413805810?pwd=Q09KQy9iUXdrMGNzWmdCMzl6c1dmdz09

https://unmc.zoom.us/j/96413805810?pwd=Q09KQy9iUXdrMGNzWmdCMzl6c1dmdz09

mailto:[email protected]

https://urldefense.com/v3/__https:/unlebid.ionwave.net__;!!JkUDQA!bO2rinz9IGu2gShqobcWGERPHZSO2r6SI-GQKovz9w74WItMtpVjNjF3u8lf94Tk5L0$




Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package INVITATION TO BIDDERS

00 11 16 - 2

1.10 BID SECURITY

A. Bid Security in amount of 5% of Bid is required.

1.11 BOND

A. Successful Bidder shall furnish University of Nebraska Owner’s Protective Bond (Section 00 40

00), in amount of 100% of Contract amount.

B. An electronic copy of the bond must be submitted as a response attachment in eBid and the

original hard copy must be received by UNMC’s Procurement Services within three (3) business

days of bid closing date.

1.12 REJECTION OF BIDS

A. Owner reserves right to waive any informality or irregularity, in any Bid. Owner further

reserves right to reject any or all Bids and to re-advertise for Bids.

B. Owner shall reject Bid of any Bidder who fails to attend Pre-Bid Meeting.

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Bid of any Bidder who fails to submit qualification

documentation for approval or fails to qualify.

1.13 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY IN PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTS

A. University of Nebraska recognizes the importance of a strong culturally diverse business

community and the positive impact that successful businesses have upon the people of the State

of Nebraska. The University of Nebraska assumes a leadership role in actions that will provide

business opportunities for all businesses in the State of Nebraska.

B. Accordingly, The University of Nebraska reaffirms its policy of providing equal opportunity to

small business enterprises and to minority, disadvantaged and women owned business

enterprises in all aspects of the University’s procurement and contracting activities. This

includes procurement of or contracts for operational supplies and equipment, construction

projects and materials, service contracts and lease agreements. It is also the University’s policy

that any person or business seeking the opportunity to do business with the University shall not

be discriminated against on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, national or ethnic origin, age,

disability, marital status, or veteran status. The University of Nebraska conducts its procurement

and contracting activities in a manner designed to prevent unlawful discrimination. University

policies are consistent with applicable state and federal laws and regulations prohibiting

unlawful discrimination.

1.14 BIDDER QUESTIONS

A. TIME: 10/06/2021 2:00 pm, Local Time

B. Questions shall be submitted electronically via eBid at https://unlebid.ionwave.net. prior to the

last day for questions specified in eBid.

END OF SECTION

https://unlebid.ionwave.net/


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00 21 13 - 1

SECTION 00 21 13


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. All definitions set forth in Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions of the Contract for

Construction, are applicable to these Instructions to Bidders.

B. Bidding Documents: Includes the following;

1. Invitation to Bidders.

2. Instructions to Bidders.

3. Proposal Form (when applicable).

4. Proposed Contract Documents (Project Manual and Project Drawings).

5. Addenda (issued prior to receipt of Bids).

C. Bidder: Is a person or entity who submits a Bid.

1.2 QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Bidder shall include a current Contractor’s Qualification Statement (AIA Document A305) with

their Bid.

1. Contractor Qualification Statements shall not be more than one year old, if already on file

with the University.

1.3 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS

A. Bidder, by making a Bid, represents that:

1. Bidder has read and understands Bidding Documents and Bid is made in accordance

therewith.

2. Bidder has attended Pre-Bid meeting.

3. Bidder has been given the opportunity to visit the site, and has become familiar with local

conditions under which the Work is to be performed within the requirements of Bidding

Documents.

4. Bid is based upon labor, materials, products, systems and equipment required by Bidding

Documents without exception.

1.4 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

A. Each Bidder shall examine and study Bidding Documents carefully, examine site and local

conditions and shall make written request to Architect for interpretation or correction of any

ambiguity, error or inconsistency discovered. Request must be submitted via eBid at least 7

calendar days before Bid date.

B. Any instruction, change, interpretation or correction shall be set forth by Addenda. No Bidder

shall rely upon response made in any other manner.

1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Where Bidding Documents refer to any items, materials, products and equipment by means of

one or more manufacturer's trade name, catalog reference or similar means of identification of

manufacturer, such reference establishes standard of required quality, appearance, dimension or

function.




00 21 13 - 2

B. Requests for proposed substitution shall be made in writing to Architect.

1. Request shall be received by Architect no later than 7 calendar days prior to date of receipt

of Bids.

2. Request shall include name of material, product or equipment to be substituted and a

complete description of proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data

and other information required or necessary for a complete evaluation.

3. Bidder shall assume and bear all responsibility for coordinating and performing related

changes in the Work necessitated by such substitution and has included such costs in the

Bid.

4. Burden of proof of merit of proposed substitution is upon Bidder.

C. All approved substitutions shall be set forth by Addenda. No Bidder shall rely upon approvals

made in any other manner.

D. No substitutions will be considered after award of Contract, unless otherwise approved by

Owner.

1.6 ADDENDA

A. Addenda: Written or graphic instruments issued by Owner prior to execution of Contract, which

modify or interpret Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections.

Addenda shall be binding and become part of Contract Documents.

B. Prior to receipt of Bids, Addenda may be issued to all recorded by eBid.

C. Bidder is responsible for incorporating all published Addenda in their final bid submission.

Failure to include such addenda shall not relieve Bidder from any obligation under his Bid as

submitted.

D. Addenda issued after receipt of Bids will be delivered to selected Bidder.

1.7 PREPARATION OF BIDS

A. Bids must be submitted electronically via the University of Nebraska eBid system at

https://unlebid.ionwave.net. When Bid Form 00 41 13 is required with bid submission the

contractor must complete and attach as a Response Attachment in eBid. All Bids must be

accompanied by Bid Security and any other required documents.

B. Complete all blanks and provide all information requested on eBid Line Items Tab. Failure to

complete Line Items or include required attachments may be the basis for the rejection of bid.

C. Interlineations, alterations, and erasures of any attached documents must be initialed by the

signer of the bid.

D. All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "$0.00" or

“No Bid” if not interested in bidding such.

1.8 BID SECURITY

A. Bid Security is required. Make payable to: Board of Regents of The University of Nebraska, in

amount of 5% of Bidder’s Lump Sum Bid amount. Attach a photo copy to the eBid submission.

The original must be received by UNMC Procurement within 3 business days of the bid close

date/time: Procurement University of Nebraska-UNMC 985050 Nebraska Medical Center Omaha, NE 68198-5050





00 21 13 - 3

B. Bid Security shall be one of following: Cashiers check, Certified check or a Bid Bond issued by

a Surety licensed to conduct business in the State of Nebraska. Form of Bid Bond is AIA

Document A310. Agent signing Bid Bond on behalf of Surety must attach a Power of Attorney

effectively evidencing agent's authority to bind the Surety to performance of Bid Bond.

C. Bid Security shall be submitted with bid.

D. Owner reserves right to retain Bid Security of 3 lowest Bidders until 60 days after receipt of

Bids or until selected Bidder enters into Contract.

E. Bid Security of selected Bidder shall be retained until Owner receives executed,

Owner-Contractor Agreement, Owner's Protective Bond and Certificates of Insurance.

F. All other Bid Security will be returned as soon as practical. If Bidder refuses to enter into a

Contract or fails to furnish required Bonds and Insurance, within 14 days of date established by

Notice of Award, Bid Security shall be forfeited to Owner as liquidated damages, but not as a

penalty.

1.9 SUBMISSION OF BIDS

A. All Bids must be submitted electronically via the University of Nebraska eBid System located at

https://unlebid.ionwave.net. All Bids must be accompanied by Bid Security and any other

required documents.

B. Bids sent by mail or email will not be accepted.

C. Bidder is responsible for submitting bid electronically via UNMC eBid system prior to closing

time and date.

D. Unless otherwise provided, no Bidder shall modify, withdraw or cancel the Bid or any part

thereof for 60 days after the time designated for receipt of Bids.

1.10 RECEIPT OF BIDS

A. Only bids submitted electronically via the eBid System will be accepted. If required, Bid

Proposal Form 00 41 13 must be completed and uploaded as Response Attachments with your

final bid submission. The eBid system will not allow Bidders to submit a response after the bid

closing time.

1.11 OPENING OF BIDS

A. Bids are opened automatically by the eBid system. There is no in-person public bid opening.

Once the bid opportunity officially closes, all bid information will be gathered and the

evaluation process will begin. Bid tabulations will be emailed to all bidders.

1.12 BID PROTEST

A. Bid/RFP protests must be received no later than 7 calendar days after contract intent to award

notification is issued.





00 21 13 - 4

B. Protests must be written and include as a minimum the following: (i) the name and address of

the protestor, (ii) solicitation number, (iii) a statement of the reasons for the protest, (iv) any

available exhibits, evidence, or documents supporting the protest, and (v) the remedy requested.

Protests that do not strictly address the solicitation process, specifications, evaluation or award

will not be considered. Pursuant to the University of Nebraska Board of Regents Policy

6.2.1.11, the UNMC Vice Chancellor for Business & Finance reviews all bid protests. The

decision of the Vice Chancellor will be communicated in writing to the protestor and is final.

Procurement

University of Nebraska-UNMC

985050 Nebraska Medical Center

Omaha, NE 68198-5050

1.13 REJECTION OF BIDS

A. Bidder acknowledges right of Owner to reject any or all Bids, to waive any informalities or

irregularities in Bids received and to re-advertise for Bid.

B. Bidder recognizes right of Owner to reject a Bid if Bidder failed to:

1. Furnish any required Bid Security.

2. Submit data required by Bidding Documents.

3. Complete in any way the Proposal Form.

4. Attend the Pre-Bid meeting.

1.14 AWARD OF CONTRACT

A. Intent of Owner is to award a Contract to low responsible Bidder. In determining low

responsible Bidder, consideration will be given to following factors associated with the Bidder:

1. Ability, capacity and skill to comply with Specifications and perform the Work required by

the Contract.

2. Character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience and efficiency.

3. Ability to perform the Contract within time specified.

4. Quality of performance of previous Contracts.

5. Previous and existing compliance with laws relating to the Contract.

6. Price bid for the Work.

7. Such other information as may be secured having a bearing on the decision to award the

contract.

B. Owner reserves right to reject Bid of apparent low Bidder, if in the good faith exercise of

reasonable discretion, Owner determines that any sub-contractor designated by such Bidder is

not qualified for this Project. Bidder shall submit sub-contractor qualifications to Owner within

5 days of bid opening.

C. Owner reserves the right to:

1. Waive informalities or irregularities, in all circumstances to analyze Bids in detail, and to

award contract, which in the good faith exercise of reasonable discretion of the Owner

believes to be in its best interest.

2. Accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specified.

3. Determine low responsible Bidder on basis of Lump Sum Bid and Alternates accepted.

D. If a Bidder offers or submits a “voluntary alternate”, it shall be received as information only and

not as a basis for determination of low Bidder.

1.15 SUBMISSION OF POST-BID INFORMATION

A. Upon notification by Owner, apparent low responsible Bidder shall submit within 5 days:

1. Statement of costs for each major item or work included in Bid.

2. Designation of the Work to be performed by Bidder with his own forces.




00 21 13 - 5

3. List of names of subcontractors, other persons, organizations, or entities (include those who

furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for such portions of

the Work designated in Bidding Documents or names of subcontractors proposed for

principal portions of the Work.

B. Bidder shall establish to the satisfaction of Architect and Owner, reliability and responsibility of

persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in Bidding Documents.

C. Prior to final determination of low responsible Bidder, Owner will notify apparent low Bidder in

writing if, Owner has reasonable or substantial objection to and refuses to accept any person or

firm on list. If Owner has objection, Bidder may withdraw Bid or submit a substitute with

adjustment in cost to cover any difference. Owner shall accept adjusted Bid price or disqualify

Bidder. In either condition, Bid Security shall not be forfeited.

D. Subcontractors, other persons, organizations, or entities proposed by Bidder and accepted by

Owner must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and accepted, and shall not be

changed except with written approval of Owner.

1.16 OWNER'S PROTECTIVE BOND

A. An Owner's Protective Bond shall be required. Selected Bidder shall furnish three copies in the

amount of 100% of Contract Sum to cover contractual performance, for all payments for

laborers and mechanics for labor and all payment for materials and equipment used in the

completion of this project.

B. Bond shall be written on University of Nebraska Owner's Protective Bond, standard form, by a

Surety licensed to conduct business in the State of Nebraska. Bond shall be dated to coincide

with date of the Contract.

C. Attorney who executes required Bond on behalf of Surety shall affix thereto three copies of a

certified and current copy of his power of attorney, indicating monetary limit of such power. An

original signature shall be on all documents, no rubber stamped signature will be accepted.

D. Required Bond shall be delivered to Owner. Work shall not proceed until Owner’s Protective

Bond has been submitted by Contractor, approved by Owner, and “Notice to Proceed” issued.

1.17 INSURANCE

A. Selected Bidder is required to secure and maintain during life of the Contract insurance of the

types and with the required limits of liability set forth in sample Certificate of Insurance Form

identified in Section 00 40 00 - Sample Forms. Selected Bidder shall furnish to Owner, three

properly executed copies of Certificate of Insurance Form, evidencing required coverage before

“Notice to Proceed” will be issued.

B. Certificate of Insurance must be signed by an agent registered in Nebraska with original

signature, title, and social security number on all copies. “Acord” form 25-S is acceptable.

Three copies of insurance carrier’s license shall be submitted to Owner with Certificate of

Insurance.

C. Contractor shall be solely responsible for any and all costs, losses, or damages due to failure to

maintain required insurance during the life of the Contract.

1.18 SALES AND USE TAX

A. Owner shall furnish Contractor with a Purchasing Agent Appointment and Exempt Sale

Certificate Form for items incorporated into the Work and considered by State of Nebraska to be

exempt from Sales Tax. Contractor is responsible to monitor valid dates and notify Owner if an

extension is necessary.




00 21 13 - 6

B. This Appointment and Exempt Sale Certificate does not apply to:

1. Purchase of materials to be used but not incorporated into the Contract work, including but

not limited to form lumber, scaffolding, etc.

2. Purchase or rental of machinery, equipment or tools owned or leased by Contractor and used

in performing the Work.

1.19 PERMITS, FEES AND LICENSING

A. As an agency of the State of Nebraska, University of Nebraska Medical Center is exempt from

requirement to secure and pay for local city and county governmental permits and payment of

fees. However, building permits are issued by the Building Code Official at UNMC for all state

owned property at no cost. Contractor shall apply and pay for all other necessary state permits.

B. UNMC publishes Project Design Criteria that list current building codes. That document shall

be part of the contract documents. All projects shall comply with current Codes adopted by the

State of Nebraska including

1. International Code Council (ICC)

a. International Building Code (IBC) and it’s referenced codes

1) International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC)

2) International Mechanical Code (IMC)

3) International Plumbing Code (IPC)

4) International Property Maintenance Code (IPMC)

5) International Fire Code (IFC)

b. International Existing Building Code (IEBC)

c. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)

2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

a. NFPA 101 (Life Safety Code) by State Fire Marshal

b. And all NFPA codes and standards listed in Nebraska Administrative Code, Title 153,

Chapter 1.

3. ADA Standards for Accessible Design

C. Other state permits required include but are not limited to, electrical, and elevator. Copies of

applications for Permits shall be submitted with first Application For Payment.

D. The Building Permit, issued by the Building Official, shall be displayed at the entrance of the

job site.

E. The Work shall meet requirements of State Electrical Act. Contractor shall apply for and secure

permits, give notice for inspection and pay inspection fees stipulated in this Act. Bids shall

include all costs arising from this requirement.

F. Contractor shall be reimbursed for cost of utility connections or tap fees to "MUD" and "OPPD"

required with this Project. Reimbursement shall be for fee cost only, without mark-up and be in

addition to Contract Sum.

G. If federal or state law, ordinances, or professional organizations require for licensing or

certifying of contractors, then the Work shall be performed according to such requirements.

1.20 MODIFICATIONS OR WITHDRAWAL

A. Bidder may modify or withdraw his Bid at any time prior to bid receiving deadline by notice to

Owner at place designated for receipt of Bids.

1. Notice shall be in writing and signed by authorized agent as indicated in original Proposal

Form.

2. Notice of modification or withdrawal of Bid is invalid if transmitted by automated

electronic methods.




00 21 13 - 7

1.21 IMMIGRATION VERIFICATION

A. The successful bidder, on behalf of itself and any subcontractor to the Contract, agrees that it

shall use a federal immigration verification system to determine the work eligibility status of

new employees physically performing services within the State of Nebraska pursuant to Neb.

Rev. Stat. §4-108 to §4-114 as amended.

1.22 OWNER’S DESIRED SCHEDULE AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

A. Time is of the essence and may be a factor in the award of this Contract. The Owner intends to

substantially complete and occupy the entire project not later than June 9, 2023. Punch list work

shall be completed not more than (Thirty) calendar days from the date established for substantial

completion.

B. Liquidated damages in the amount of $1,000.00 per calendar day will be assessed for failure to

achieve substantial completion within the contract specified time for substantial completion.

Liquidated damages in the amount of $1,000.00 per calendar day will be assessed for failure to

achieve final completion within the contract specified time for final completion. See the

construction agreement for details.

1.23 START OF CONSTRUCTION

A. Work shall not begin until contractor has received written Notice to Proceed.

B. Anticipated Contract Award: 12/8/2021

C. Notice to Proceed with delegated design work: 1/5/2022

D. Mobilization & Notice to Proceed with demolition scope: 4/4/2022

END OF SECTION


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package GEOTECHNICAL DATA

00 31 32 - 1

SECTION 00 31 32 GEOTECHNICAL DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT

A. “Geotechnical Engineering Report #05215039R01, prepared by Terracon Consultants, Inc.,

dated September 2, 2021, in its entirety, is hereby specifically made a part of this Contract.

B. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting

Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are

intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own investigations. They are made

available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions.

This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Document 00 21 13 "Instructions to Bidders" for the Bidder's responsibilities for

examination of Project site and existing conditions.

END OF SECTION



SAMPLE FORMS

00 40 00 - 1

SECTION 00 40 00

SAMPLE FORMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PURPOSE

A. Sample forms and documents are listed below and shall be used for their indicated purpose. All

forms shall be furnished and prepared by Contractor, except as otherwise noted.

B. Copies of forms and documents, excluding those published by American Institute of Architects

(AIA), can be downloaded from UNMC, Facilities Management and Planning website. Hard

copies may be requested from the office of UNMC, Facilities Management and Planning.

1.2 EXAMINATION AND PURCHASE OF FORMS

A. Copyright law prohibits reproduction of AIA Forms. Bidder or Contractors desiring forms for

their own use must purchase them.

B. AIA Forms are available for purchase from:

AIA Nebraska 102 Architecture Hall University of Nebraska-Lincoln P.O. Box 80045 Lincoln, Nebraska 68501-0045 (402) 472-1456 FAX (402) 472-1654 Email: [email protected] [email protected] Web Site: http://www.aiane.org/

1.3 SAMPLE FORMS: PLEASE REFER TO WEBSITE WWW.UNMC.EDU/FACILITIES

UNDER HEADING “CONSTRUCTION FORMS” FOR SAMPLE FORMS.

A. BID BOND

AIA Document A310

B. CONTRACTORS QUALIFICATION STATEMENT

AIA Document A305

C. UNIVERSITY OF NEBRASKA STANDARD FORM OF CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT

Located on Website

E. UNIVERSITY OF NEBRASKA OWNER’S PROTECTIVE BOND

Located on Website

F. UNIVERSITY OF NEBRASKA PREPARATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATE(S) OF INSURANCE

Located on Website

G. UNIVERSITY OF NEBRASKA CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE FORM

Located on Website


http://www.aiane.org/

http://www.unmc.edu/facilities



SAMPLE FORMS

00 40 00 - 2

H. APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

AIA Documents G702

& G703

I. STATE OF NEBRASKA AUTOMATED CLEARING HOUSE ENROLLMENT

Located on Website

J. CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

AIA Document G704

K. CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS & CLAIMS

AIA Document G706

L. CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS

AIA Document G706A

M. NEBRASKA EXEMPT SALE & RESALE CERTIFICATE

Located on Website

N. PURCHASING AGENT APPOINTMENT

Located on Website

O. CERTIFICATION AS TO CONTRIBUTION STATUS, STATE OF NEBRASKA DEPARTMENT OF LABOR

Located on Website

P. CONSENT OF SURETY COMPANY TO FINAL PAYMENT

AIA Document G707

Q. ARCHITECT’S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS

AIA Document G710

R. CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

AIA Document G714

S. ON-SITE TABULATION OF STORED MATERIALS

Located on Website

T. SUPPLEMENTAL AGREEMENT OFF-SITE STORED MATERIALS

Located on Website

U. OFF-SITE TABULATION OF STORED MATERIALS

Located on Website

V. UNIVERSITY OFNEBRASKA EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE AND CERTIFICATION OF NON-SEGREGATED FACILITIES

Located on Website

W. SHOP DRAWING TRANSMITTAL FORM Located on Website



SAMPLE FORMS

00 40 00 - 3

X. HOT WORK PERMIT AND POLICY Located on Website

Y. PURCHASING INFORMATION Located on Website

END OF SECTION 00 40 00


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package GENERAL CONDITIONS

00 72 00 - 1

SECTION 00 72 00

GENERAL CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. General Conditions 00 72 00 is continually being updated. Please refer to the website below to

access the most current Section:

https://nebraska.edu/offices-policies/business-finance/facilities-management/standard-university-contracts





Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package GROUP PURCHASING AGREEMENT – VIZIENT

00 90 00 - 1

SECTION 00 90 00 GROUP PURCHASING AGREEMENT – VIZIENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-

tions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: Vizient Purchasing Utilization.

B. University of Nebraska Medical Center / Nebraska Medicine (UNMC/NMed) Requirements:

1. UNMC/NMed is a member of the Vizient Group Purchasing Organization (GPO).

UNMC/NMed gains discount pricing, quality, and service on equipment and materials

through Vizient product and supplier agreements. Vizient negotiates with manufacturers and

suppliers on behalf of their 3,400-member hospitals, aggregating volume across multiple

projects.

2. Vizient product and supplier agreements do NOT affect subcontractor mark-up or subcon-

tractor labor except where the subcontractor is under an applicable Vizient agreement. Vi-

zient is focused on gaining the best product pricing for UNMC/NMed. By combining the

Vizient buying power with the Contractor’s, Contractor will jointly deliver the most cost-

effective solution for UNMC/NMed.

3. It is the intent of UNMC/NMed that the project plans and specifications include Vizient

contracted products and suppliers. Vizient will provide a listing of all Vizient contracted

products and suppliers which can be included in the project. All competitive bidding for

products and services should include applicable Vizient contracted products and suppliers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. UNMC/NMed has identified products and suppliers that are normally utilized on their project.

Products and suppliers that fall under the GPO will be identified as “Group Purchasing Organi-

zation” in each section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROCEDURES: CONTRACTOR WILL EXECUTE UNMC/NMED GPO INTEGRATION

PROCEDURES INCLUDING ENFORCEMENT OF SUBCONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE

AS FOLLOWS:

A. Pre-Bidding Phase: See Section 00 40 00 Forms for Vizient listing of contracted products and

suppliers.

B. Post Bid: Contractor shall conduct post-bid interviews with Subcontractor finalists so as to com-

plete the form in Section 00 40 00 Forms. Form shall be submitted as closeout documentation in

accordance with Division 01 Section “Closeout Procedures.”


D I V I S I O N 0 1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS



SUMMARY OF WORK

01 11 00 - 1

SECTION 01 11 00

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work consists of but is not limited to: The demolition of buildings and site improvements

on the project site, bounded by Saddle Creek Road, Farnam, Street, South 44th Street, and

Dewey Avenue, including hazardous materials remediation, removal and rerouting of site

utilities, and rough grading.

B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated September 17, 2021 were prepared for

the Project by; HDR, 1917 South 67th Street, Omaha NE 68106.

C. Owner's Project Coordinator: An employee appointed from Facilities Management and Planning

will be designated to serve as Owner's Project Coordinator for purpose of this Contract.

1. Contractor shall cooperate with, continual advise, coordinate and communicate with

Owner's Project Coordinator regarding progress of the Work, scheduling, prior notices of

special arrangements necessary to move materials and equipment over Owner's site or

through buildings, to cause mechanical and electrical outages and to perform any other

operations which will affect normal use of any of Owner's facilities.

2. Owner's Project Coordinator will cooperate with Contractor and convey Contractor's

reports, notices and other information to those having Owner’s interest or responsibility for

this Contract.

1.3 CONTRACT

A. Project will be constructed under a single general construction contract.

1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. NOT APPLICABLE.

1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS AND MEASUREMENTS

A. General: Information pertaining to existing building has been obtained through original

drawings, documents, investigations and photographs; this is indicated on the Drawings and in

Project Manual.

1. Information has been gathered with reasonable care but is of a schematic quality and is not

warranted.

2. Verify all dimensions and existing conditions in the field prior to ordering materials or

construction.

B. Discrepancies: Be alert to any evidence or indication of existing conditions not indicated on the

Drawings. Measurements shall be verified from actual observation at site.



SUMMARY OF WORK

01 11 00 - 2

C. Responsibility: Contractor is responsible for all Work fitting in place in an approved, satisfactory

and workman like manner in every condition and case. If unexpected conditions are

encountered, cease operations immediately to minimize damage and notify Owner.

1. Contractor shall bear costs of damage resulting from failure to exercise reasonable care or

continuing operations without notifying Owner.

1.6 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50-

division format and CSI/CSC’s “MasterFormat 2004” numbering system.

1. Section Identification: Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross-

referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric

sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the

beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the

Contract Documents.

B. Specification Content: Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the

intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These

conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents

is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but

not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as

plural and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of

the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.

Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.

Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarify

to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when

so noted.

a. The words “shall,” “shall be,” or “shall comply with,” depending on the context, are

implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE).

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE).

END OF SECTION



WORK RESTRICTIONS

01 14 00 - 1

SECTION 01 14 00

WORK RESTRICTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 USE OF PREMISES

A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site

beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas indicated. Owner reserves the right to

perform work or to retain other contractors or trades on portions of the Project.

B. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, sidewalks and entrances serving premises clear and

available for use by Owner, Owner's employees, public, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do

not use these areas for parking or storage of materials and equipment.

1. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.

2. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and

equipment on-site.

3. Schedule loading or unloading of materials and equipment to minimize vehicle time and

space requirements at site.

a. Vehicles used for loading or unloading shall be attended at all times by personnel

authorized to move or operate the vehicle as may be directed by Owner.

C. Waste Materials: Do not dispose of organic and hazardous material on site, either by burial or by

burning.

D. Fastening Devices: Use of explosive or ballistic fastening devices is not allowed. If requested,

Owner may waive this requirement and approve use of these fastening devices for a specific use

and temporary conditions.

E. Owner's Docks: Unless otherwise approved in writing by Owner, use of Owner’s docks is not

allowed. If approved by Owner, use any available stall but be prepared to share it with others on

a first come/first served basis. Stall can only be occupied for the time reasonably necessary to

accomplish loading or unloading operations.

1. Supplies, materials and equipment ordered by Contractor or his sub-contractors’ shall not be

delivered, received, accepted or inspected by the Owner.

F. Existing Utility and Operational Systems: Submit to Owner a written proposal, not less than 14

days in advance, before proceeding with any shut-down, shut-off or interruption of Owner's

normal operations.

1. Obtain Owner's approval of proposal before proceeding with scheduled shut-down, shut-off

or interruption.

2. Be advised that scheduled shut-down, shut-off or interruption may have to be done between

5 P.M. and 6 A.M., for Owner's convenience.

3. Contractor and Owner's representative must be present at both time of scheduled shut-down,

shut-off or interruption; and start-up, turn-on or energizing of existing systems.

G. Parking: All on-campus parking lots and spaces are designated for General public or assigned to

Student’s or Owner's employees only.

1. Contractor and his employees shall not obstruct access to any of Owner's on-campus

parking lots or spaces.



WORK RESTRICTIONS

01 14 00 - 2

2. Contractor and his employees shall be legally parked off-campus.

3. Contractor may park in designated areas. A limited number of parking stalls are available in

other lots for a monthly fee. Contact Parking Services (559-8580) for information.

4. Appropriate action shall be taken if Contractor employees are found parking in Owner's

parking lots or inappropriate locations.

H. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weather-tight condition throughout

construction period. Immediately repair damage caused by construction operations. Take all

precautions necessary to protect building, building contents, building systems and occupants of

building during construction period.

1. Emergency Exits: Keep all exits accessible during construction operations.

2. Existing building spaces outside limits of construction may not be used for storage unless

pre-approved by Owner’s Representative.

3. Use of Existing Elevator: Use of Owner’s existing elevators may not be used unless pre-

approved by Owner’s Representative. If approved, use on a limited basis designated

Elevator No. < E-___ > for freight service and transportation of construction personnel from

level < __ to level __> and along a designated route during construction period. This

elevator must also be available for Owner use at all times; coordinate and schedule elevator

usage with Owner. Provide protective pads for cab and other appropriate protective

measures for car, floor, entrance doors and frames. At end of scheduled use or construction,

clean and restore elevator and designated route, to its original condition. Use of any other

elevators will not be permitted.

4. Use of Existing HVAC System: Request permission and receive written approval from

Owner’s Representative to use, on a limited basis, existing HVAC system, which services

Project construction area. If approved, provide an air filter, which is then sealed over every

return air opening. Air filter shall be changed as necessary or replaced not more than every

14 days. At the end of approved use, restore system to original condition before

construction operations.

I. Existing Fire Suppression/Detection Systems: The < Name of Building > is equipped with

fire detection and alarm systems <along with a wet-pipe sprinkler system>. <Extensions of

these systems exist in Project area and are to be revised under this Contract.> Request

permission and receive written approval from Owner, not less than 14 days before proceeding

with any shut-down, shut-off or interruption of Owner's normal operations. Comply with

requirements of Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching.

1. When a fire alarm initiating device is activated, various alarm sequences follow which

affects other parts of UNMC Campus, as well as Project area. If a sprinkler head is

activated, the area immediately under that head is deluged with a continuous flow of water

and other alarm sequences follow.

2. City of Omaha Fire Department responds automatically to all Owners’ Fire Alarms.

Contractor will be held financially responsible to the Owner for costs of repair and/or

replacement of property damaged as a result of inadvertent activation of fire protection

systems by Contractor or sub-contractor. Contractor will also be held financially

responsible for any associated fines and fees assessed to the Owner.

3. Request permission and receive written approval from Owner before the use of tools,

equipment, procedures or methods that may cause or could initiate an alarm. See Hot Work

Requirements Section 01140 Para. M.

4. All work which affects in any way, existing systems, including temporary outages and

alterations, shall be performed by tradesmen specifically licensed by State of Nebraska to

perform such work.

5. Existing systems shall be operational at all times unless otherwise scheduled with Owner.

During scheduled outages the Owner will provide "Fire Watch".



WORK RESTRICTIONS

01 14 00 - 3

***************************************************************************************************

Edit the following paragraph and sub-paragraphs per specific project requirements ***************************************************************************************************

J. Temporary Negative Air Environment and Exhaust Air Filtration System: Erect and maintain a

continuous negative air environment within the Work area bounded by a temporary partition

until removal is approved by Owner no later than Substantial Completion. Temporary ventilation

system shall create negative pressure in the Work area bounded by temporary partition. System

shall consist of a portable filter and ventilation unit connected to flexible tubing, this system

shall filter and exhaust air from inside to outside of Work area bounded by temporary partition.

1. Portable filter and ventilation units: Use only manufactured units, units range in capacity

from 600 to 2000 CFM, suggested manufacturers are: Sentry, Red Baron, Casper or Reis.

Each unit shall have a HEPA filter and an outlet to connect to flexible tubing.

2. Amount of air exhausted shall create a minimum negative pressure of 0.02 inches of water

within Work area bounded by temporary partition with respect to area outside of temporary

partition. Calculate and determine capacity and number of units necessary to provide

specified negative air environment.

3. Provide and maintain a manometer or pressure gauge for measuring negative pressure

within Work area bounded by temporary partition. Mount in a location accessible for

monitoring during construction operations. Measuring device built-in or mounted on filter

and ventilation unit is not acceptable.

4. Exhaust filtered air directly to outside the building. If access is not available, exhaust

filtered air to an area approved by Owner within the building but outside the Work area

bounded by temporary partition. Penetration of temporary partition shall require one-hour

fire rated damper and sleeve, with a fusible link connected to existing Fire Alarm system.

5. Failure to comply will result in a Work Stoppage, until problem is resolved.

K. Temporary Separation Control Measures: Construct and maintain continuous partition or

enclosure of construction area. Comply with requirements of Section 01500 - Temporary

Facilities and Controls.

1. Partition or enclosure must extend above any false ceiling, to underside of floor above or to

structure.

2. Any penetration of temporary partition or enclosure separating construction area from

Owner occupied areas shall be sealed, closed, or capped.

3. Request and receive written approval from Owner before scheduling any Work involving

access above existing ceilings which are outside the Project construction area. Work shall

be done in a movable access cart (Owner may allow use of Owner's existing access cart) or

in Owner approved temporary enclosure.

4. Failure to comply will result in a Work Stoppage, until problem is resolved.

L. Interim Life Safety Measures: Contractor shall provide and maintain measures to compensate

temporarily for hazards, deficiencies and construction activities posed by NFPA 101, "Life

Safety Code", 2000 edition. Intent is to provide a level of life safety comparable with that

described in NFPA 101; chapters 1 through 10, and applicable occupancy chapters.

1. Interim life safety measures include but are not limited to following:

a. Provide exits and means of egress that are free of obstructions. Train personnel when

alternative exits or means of egress are to be used. Designate exits and clearly identify

alternative exits. In construction areas provide escape facilities at all times. Means of

egress in construction areas must be inspected daily.

b. Provide free and unobstructed access for emergency services and for emergency fire

and rescue forces.

c. Provide temporary fire detection and alarm system along with temporary fire

extinguisher system as required. Temporary systems must be inspected and tested

monthly.



WORK RESTRICTIONS

01 14 00 - 4

d. Provide temporary partition to separate construction areas from Owner occupied areas

built of noncombustible, fire-retardant materials.

e. Provide fire-fighting equipment and train personnel in its use.

f. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.

g. Develop and enforce storage, housekeeping and debris removal practices that reduce

flammable and combustible materials to lowest level necessary for daily operations.

h. Provide a daily hazard surveillance of project site, with special attention to excavations,

construction area, construction storage and field offices.

2. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner's Project Coordinator Campus Safety Officer to

develop a schedule for implementation of those interim life safety measures that can be

conducted in conjunction with Owner's tests, inspections and drills.

3. Contractor shall provide these measures through to Substantial Completion.

4. Failure to comply with these measures will result in a Work Stoppage, until problem is

resolved.

M. Hot Work Permit: Prior to executing any Hot Work, Contractor shall obtain from Owner a

signed permit for each specific requirement of Hot Work, which is defined by UNMC Hot Work

Policy. Hot work shall include, but is not limited to heat treating, grinding, thawing frozen

pipes, cutting, welding, soldering, brazing, temporary heating and similar applications producing

a spark, flame or producing heat or producing dust sufficient to set off smoke detectors.

Contractor shall follow UNMC policy in regard to obtaining, scheduling and posting of Hot

Work Permit.

1. Failure to comply with these requirements will result in a Work Stoppage, until problem is

resolved.

N. Construction Risk Assessment (CRA) The Contractor shall attend a risk assessment conducted

for any construction, renovation, maintenance or condition where risk to patient or staff safety

could be impacted. The CRA includes a review of construction or maintenance/operations

activity for infection control risks, general safety risks and life safety (fire safety) risks. The

Contractor shall coordinate with Owner’s representatives that include a minimum of safety,

infection control, facilities, the person managing the project/effort, and managers or designated

leadership of areas significantly affected by the activity.

1. The CRA includes review of general safety, fire safety (life safety) and infection control

safety concerns.

2. The Owner’s Representative is responsible for inviting representatives from all areas that

will be impacted by the project to the CRA and inviting any supporting groups required

such as respiratory, impairment and barrier management coordinators, as applicable.

3. Safety Operations is responsible for documenting the CRA and distributing to anyone

requiring a copy.

4. The CRA documentation identifies the primary responsible persons for the scope of work,

the start and stop dates, and outlines the associated risks, safety precautions and any Interim

Life Safety Measures (ILSM) necessary.

5. The CRA documentation will be filed and maintained by Safety Operations. Safety

Operations and Facilities Management designees will monitor progress and compliance for

projects and conditions identified by means of routine visual tours.

O. Cleaning in Owner’s Existing Buildings:

1. For any vacuuming, contractor shall provide and use only HEPA filtered vacuum

equipment.

2. For any sweeping, Contractor shall provide and use a sweeping compound.



WORK RESTRICTIONS

01 14 00 - 5

1.3 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Emergency Situation Policy: Anyone on Owner's property, in existing building or including this

Project site who discovers or is involved in an emergency situation, fire or other crisis must call

emergency dispatcher, 559-5555. Only the emergency dispatcher is allowed to call the 911

operator.

B. Smoking: As adopted by the University of Nebraska Medical Center all Owner's property,

buildings, structures, roof areas, and out-doors are all classified as: "No Smoking Areas".

Smoking of cigars, pipes, cigarettes and any other lighted tobacco material will not be permitted

on UNMC property.

1. Person violating "No Smoking" rules will be given a verbal warning for first offense.

Written warning shall be filed with person's employer for second offense. Third offense

shall be cause for removal from Owner's property and this Project for not less than 6

months.

C. Hazardous Materials: This Project includes Work upon or near areas, which have existing

exhaust outlets and connections to existing waste lines. Contractor is cautioned that discharges

in relation to these outlets and waste lines are hazardous. This includes, but is not limited to;

Radiological and Biological Safety Cabinets, chemical fume hoods; lab exhausts; lab equipment;

acid waste lines; etc. Contractor is responsible to request from Owner a listing of what possible

emissions and materials are coming from or used in any location. Contractor shall determine

what safety precautions are necessary and provide, manage, and enforce those safety

precautions, all at no additional cost to Owner.

D. Supervision: A full time, job superintendent provided by Contractor is required on this Project

whenever Contractor or subcontractor has any trades-person, mechanic, laborer or other

employee on Site. This person shall be in attendance at Pre-Construction Meeting. Any changes

to these requirements shall be authorized, in writing, by Owner.

E. Contractor's Employees: Contractor shall be responsible for the fit behavior, speech, conduct,

appearance and apparel of Contractor's employees while on Owner's property and in Owner's

facilities.

1. Person at fault may be removed from Owner's property and this Project for a period of not

less than 6 and up to 12 months time.

F. [FM&P shall update]Identification Badge: Upon successful completion of Owner’s Contractor

Orientation and Training, Contractor's employees and Sub-contractor’s employees shall each

receive and wear an identification badge when on Owner's property. Owner shall provide to

Contractor personalized laminated badges, each with a metal clip. Badge will identify

employee, building where project is taking place, and an expiration date.

1. Each employee shall have badge on front, visually displayed above the waist in a readable

manner at all times. Employee failing to comply shall for the first time be verbally warned,

second time shall be removed from Owner's property and this Project for a period of 21

calendar days.

2. Contractor’s and sub-contractor’s employees shall be issued on badge at no charge. If a

badge is lost or stolen, each additional badge will be provided at a cost of $5.00 per badge.

The Contractor will be responsible for paying for additional badges.

3. Contractor shall be responsible for making sure that each new employee has completed the

Owner’s Contractor Orientation and received a badge prior to their first day on the Project.

G. Radios: Use of personal radios, , musical instruments, or any other similar device on Owner's

property by Contractor or subcontractor employees is prohibited.



WORK RESTRICTIONS

01 14 00 - 6

H. Hot Work Permit: Prior to executing any Hot Work, Contractor shall obtain from Owner a

signed permit for all Hot Work. Contractor shall follow UNMC policy for obtaining, scheduling

and posting of Hot Work Permit. See Section 00 40 00 - Sample Forms.

1.4 OWNER OCCUPANCY

*****************************************************************

Delete Paragraph A if not applicable to project *****************************************************************

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and/or existing building during entire

construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts

and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work in accordance with NFPA 241 and so as not to

interfere with Owner's operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves right to occupy and to place and install equipment in

completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not

interfere with completion the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall

not constitute acceptance of total Work.

1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of

the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.

2. If required obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from Authorities Having Jurisdiction before

Owner occupancy.

3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully

operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. Upon

occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving

occupied portions of building.

4. Upon occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service

for occupied portions of building.

1.5 DIRECTED WORK STOPPAGES

A. For Owner's Convenience:

1. Due to proximity of sensitive adjacent areas, Contractor may be asked to cease work at any

given time for any of following causes resulting from construction operations:

a. Excessive or Loud Noise.

b. Unacceptable Vibration.

c. Migration of Dust, Fumes, Odors, etc.

2. Work stoppage direction will be given verbally by Owner's Authorized Representative.

Work may be rescheduled for Owner's convenience. Work shall restart upon direction of

Owner's Authorized Representative.

a. Work stoppage may be a basis for time extension, upon written request of Contractor,

and shall not be considered a basis for additional monies due to Contractor.

B. Breach of Contract Document Provisions:

1. Contractor may be verbally directed to immediately cease work for any of following causes:

a. Breach of Dust Control or Negative Air Environment or Fire Separation.

b. Failure to maintain Infection Control Measures.

c. Failure to comply with Interim Life Safety Measures.

d. Absence of Hot Work Permit.



WORK RESTRICTIONS

01 14 00 - 7

2. Work stoppage direction will be given verbally by Owner's Authorized Representative.

Written description of incident shall be given by Owner with-in 24 hours. Work shall be

stopped immediately until breach is corrected by Contractor and compliance is approved by

Owner. Work may restart upon written direction of Owner's Authorized Representative and

signed by Contractor.

a. Work stoppage will not be considered a basis for time extension or for additional

monies due to Contractor.



END OF SECTION



ALTERNATES

01 23 00 - 1

SECTION 01 23 00

ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by Bidder and stated on Bid Form for certain work defined in

Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from Base Bid amount. The Owner

may decide to accept a corresponding change in either amount of construction to be completed,

or in products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in Contract

Documents.

1. Cost for each alternate is net addition to or deduction from Contract Sum to incorporate

Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to Contract Sum.

2. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the

Agreement.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully

integrate Work of the alternate into the Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items

incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of

Alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of Contract, notify each party involved, in writing,

of status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for

later consideration.

C. Execute accepted alternates under same conditions as other Work of this Contract.

D. Schedule: "Schedule of Alternates" is included at end of this Section. Specification Sections

referenced in Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work

described under each alternate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)



ALTERNATES

01 23 00 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1: New communications fiber point to point.

1. In lieu of fiber splicing, new fiber shall be provided from source to source. After new fiber

has been installed, terminated, and tested; coordinate with UNMC IT department for final

fiber patching and connectivity. After confirmation with UNMC IT department that network

connectivity has been reestablished, remove the existing fibers and rack mounted

terminations.

2. The UNO fiber run is excluded from this alternate.

3. See 27 10 00 – Communications Systems – Structured Cabling.

END OF SECTION



CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

01 26 00 - 1

SECTION 01 26 00


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, with General Conditions and other Division 1

Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing

contract modifications.

B. Related Sections: Following contain requirements relating to this Section:

1. Section 01 29 00 – Payment Procedures: Procedures for payment.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not

involving adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time.

B. Form: AIA Form G710, Architect's Supplemental Instructions.

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect or Owner will issue detailed description of

proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time.

If necessary, description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests are for information only. Do not consider them as instructions either to

stop work in progress or to execute proposed change.

2. Within 10days after receipt of a proposal request, submit a quotation estimating cost

adjustments necessary to execute change. Submit to Owner for review. Include following:

a. Itemized breakdown for labor and material identifying both additions and deletions.

b. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Statement indicating effect proposed change in the Work will have on Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposal Requests: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications

to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Owner.

Include following:

1. Statement outlining reasons for change and effect of change on the Work. Provide a

complete description of proposed change. Indicate effect that proposed change will have on

Contract Sum and Contract Time.

2. Itemized breakdown for labor and material identifying both additions and deletions.

3. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Comply with requirements in Section 01600 – Product Requirements, if proposed change

requires substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified.

C. Form: Owner’s Proposal Request Form. See Section 00 40 00 - Forms




01 26 00 - 2

1.5 SCHEDULE OF CHARGEABLE LABOR RATES

A. Prepare a comprehensive schedule listing all trades or crafts employed directly in the Work of

this Project.

1. Identify a chargeable labor rate for each trade or craft. Such rate shall be fixed for a

minimum of 12 months from date submitted. If necessary, after 12 months, schedule shall

be reviewed and resubmitted to Owner.

2. Submit schedule at pre-construction conference.

B. Chargeable Labor Rate: Shall be determined as defined below and based on following:

1. Wage Rate (WR): Combination of Basic Rate plus Fringe Benefits for each trade or craft.

WR = BR + FB.

a. Basic Rate (BR): By trade or craft as an hourly wage.

b. Fringe Benefits (FB): Allowance for actual negotiated fringe benefits not to exceed 15

percent of Basic Rate. Provide documentation to Owner for approval if higher

percentage is necessary. Fringe benefits shall include: vacation, sick leave, health

insurance and legal holidays, but exclude premium pay paid to employees directly

engaged in the Work. FB = BR x .15.

2. Labor Burden (LB): Allowance not to exceed 40 percent of Wage Rate. Provide

documentation to Owner for approval if higher percentage is necessary. Labor Burden shall

include, but is not limited to following: Dues, Fees, License, Certification, Safety,

Insurance, Training, First Aid, Health and Welfare, Pension, Apprenticeship Programs and

other Programs as required for each craft or trade, Small tools, Drayage, Expendables,

Trucks and Equipment, Field Supervision, Field office, Testing, Inspections, Distributables,

As-Built drawings, Shop Drawings, Sanitary facilities, Clean-up, U.S. and State Social

Security Taxes and Unemployment Taxes, Liability Insurance and Workman's

compensation Insurance. LB = WR x .40.

3. Chargeable Rate (CR): An amount, which includes the sum of Wage Rate and Labor

Burden. CR = WR + LB

4. Premium Time Rate (PTR): An amount not to exceed 150 percent of Basic Rate; plus Fringe

Benefits, plus Labor Burden. PTR = (BR x 1.5) + FB + LB

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Contains a description of a change in the Work. It designates

method to be followed to determine change in Contract Sum or Contract Time and authorizes

Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. When Owner and Contractor disagree on terms of a Proposal Request, then Contractor may

be instructed to proceed with a change so that a delay does not occur.

B. Construction Change Directive Form:

1. Architect may use Construction Change Directive on AIA Form G714.

2. Owner may use Construction Change Directive on UNMC standard form.

C. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by

Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to

substantiate cost and time adjustments to Contract.




01 26 00 - 3

1.7 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS

A. Contractor shall support each proposal or directive submitted with an itemized quotation.

1. To facilitate checking, review and analysis of quotations by Owner and Architect for extras,

credits or changes, all proposals or claims shall be accompanied by a itemization of costs

including labor, materials and Sub-contracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized as

prescribed below and no other costs than those described will be paid by Owner. Where

major cost items are Sub-contracts, they shall be itemized also.

2. If proposal includes a time extension, furnish itemization.

3. Submit claims within21 days of receipt of Change Order Proposal or Construction Change

Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted no later than 21

days.

B. For proposals involving Work for which unit prices are identified in the Agreement, those prices

shall govern any equitable adjustment. For all other prices, Contractor's and subcontractor's

compensation for changes shall be governed and determined only by following:

1. Labor: Use Chargeable Labor Rate Schedule as submitted.

2. Premium Time Rate: Shall apply and be based as follows:

a. For Owner's convenience; the Work to be done when scheduled, directed and approved

by Owner. This rate shall be used, subtracting the Chargeable rate, for portion of the

Work done in excess of 8 hours on this Project, on any weekday, Saturday or Legal

Holiday.

b. Change or Addition of Work; when approved by Owner. This rate shall be used for

change or addition of Work required in excess of 8 hours on any workday, Saturday or

Legal Holiday.

3. Subsistence and Mileage: Not allowed.

4. Materials: All materials incorporated in the Work at Contractor's invoice cost. All

materials not incorporated in the Work and taxes at Contractor's invoice cost. Costs of

receiving, storage, Inspection and protection shall be included. Submit copy of all invoices.

5. Freight: Calculated by Weight and Rate. Submit copy of invoice.

6. Machinery and Equipment Rental: Rental costs, maintenance, insurance and taxes,

exclusive of hand tools, at Contractor's invoice cost. Submit copy of invoice.

7. Overhead and Profit: Allowance for overhead and profit combined, included in total cost to

Owner, all main office expense, engineer, estimator and secretarial time, of all Contractor,

Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractors involved with a change and s hall be based on

following schedule:

a. Contractor; for Work performed by Contractor's own forces: 15 percent of cost.

b. Contractor; for Work performed by Contractor's Subcontractor: 10 percent of first

$3,000 of amount due Subcontractor and 5 percent of any amount due Subcontractor

greater than $3,000.

c. Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor involved; for Work performed by that

Subcontractor's or Sub-subcontractor's own forces: 10 percent of cost.

d. Subcontractor; for Work performed by Subcontractor's Sub-subcontractors: 10 percent

of first $3,000 of amount due Subcontractor and 5 percent of any amount due

Sub-subcontractor greater than $3,000.

e. Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be in accordance with

subparagraph 7.3.6 of the General Conditions.

f. Allowance for overhead and profit combined shall not exceed accumulated effect of

Contractor, Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractor.

8. Bond: Actual cost paid to Surety, not to exceed 1.5 percent.

9. Insurance:




01 26 00 - 4

1.8 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. Upon Owner's receipt of documentation and approval of a Proposal Request, Owner will issue a

Change Order for signatures on University of Nebraska Contract Documents Change Order

Form. Contractor then Architect and then Owner will sign and date the form to indicate

agreement.

1.9 CORRELATION WITH SUBMITTALS

A. Revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each Change Order as a

separate item of Work and record adjusted Contract Sum.

B. Revise Construction Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time.

C. Upon completion of Change Order work, enter changes in Record Documents.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)

END OF SECTION



PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01 29 00 - 1

SECTION 01 29 00

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing Contractor's

Applications for Payment.

B. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing each prime

Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1. Coordinate Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with Contractor's

Construction Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and List of Subcontracts.

C. Related Sections: Following Sections contain requirements that relate:

1. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Documentation; For Contractor's Construction

Schedule and Submittal Schedule.

2. Section 01 60 00 – Product requirements; For Product List.

3. Section 01 66 00 - Off-Site Stored Materials; for requirements of off-site storage of

materials.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's

Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and

forms, including:

a. Application for Payment Forms and Continuation Sheets.

b. List of subcontractors.

c. Submittal schedule.

2. Submit Schedule of Values to Owner at earliest possible date but at least 14 days prior to

first Application for Payment.

3. Sub-schedules: When Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments,

provide sub-schedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents to establish format. Provide at least

one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include following Project identification:

a. Project name and location.

b. Name of Architect.

c. Owner's Project number.

d. Contractor's name and address.

e. Date of submittal.

2. Format: Arrange in tabular form with separate columns to indicate following for each item

listed:

a. Related Specification Section.

b. Description of Work.

c. Name of subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator or supplier

d. Change Orders.



PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01 29 00 - 2

e. Dollar value. (Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted

to total 100 percent.)

3. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal Contract Sum.

4. Provide a separate line item for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may

include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include forms and

requirements for off-site stored materials.

5. Provide separate line items for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of

completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

6. Allowances: Provide a separate line item for each allowance. Show line-item value of

unit-cost allowances, as a product of unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Estimate

quantities from best indication in Contract Documents.

7. Each item shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead

and profit margin for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place

may be shown either as separate line item or distributed as general overhead expense, at

Owner’s option.

8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit prior to the next Application for Payment when

Change Orders result in a change in Contract Sum.

1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Electronic Transfer of Funds.

1. Contractor must submit not less than 14 days prior to Initial Application for Payment, the

“State of Nebraska Automated Clearing House Enrollment” Form (ACH). Complete and

return original to UNMC as directed on cover sheet of sample form. See Section 00 40 00 –

Sample Forms.

B. Each Application shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified and

paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,

and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

C. Payment Application Time: Period of construction Work covered by each Application for

Payment is a calendar month.

D. Payment Application Form: AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheet G703. When

applicable, attach other completed forms.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Include original notarization and

original signature execution by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of

Contractor. Incomplete applications will be returned without action.

1. Entries shall match data on Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule.

Use updated and current schedules.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders issued prior to last day of period covered by application.

F. Transmittal: Unless a different method is agreed to by Owner and Contractor, submit 1 signed

and notarized original Application for Payment to Owner. Application for Payment shall be sent

to: University of Nebraska Medical Center, Facilities Management and Planning, Accounting

Section, 987100 Nebraska Medical Center, Omaha Nebraska 68198-7100. One copy of other

forms, including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required.

1. Transmit with a transmittal form, list attachments and record appropriate information related

to application.



PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01 29 00 - 3

G. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With Final Application for Payment, submit waivers of lien from

every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a lien arising out of performance of Contract.

1. Owner reserves right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

2. Form: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to Owner.

H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or

coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment, include following:

1. List of subcontractors.

2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.

3. Schedule of Values.

4. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).

5. Schedule of principal products.

6. Submittal Schedule.

7. List of Contractor's staff assignments.

8. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the ork.

9. Permits

10. Initial progress report.

11. List of Chargeable Labor rates.

12. Initial settlement survey and damage report, if required.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuance of Certificate of Substantial

Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of

the Work claimed as substantially complete. Administrative actions and submittals that shall

precede or coincide with this application include:

1. Occupancy permits and similar approvals.

2. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements.

3. Test/adjust/balance records.

4. Maintenance instructions.

5. Startup performance reports.

6. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

7. Final cleaning.

8. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety.

9. Advice on shifting insurance coverages.

10. Final progress photographs if required.

11. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial

Completion.

J. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that precede or coincide with

submittal of final Application for Payment:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion.

3. Evidence that claims have been settled.

4. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner.

5. Removal of temporary facilities and services.

6. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.

7. Submit completed and properly executed affidavit forms.

a. AIA Document G706 – “Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims”.

b. AIA Document G706A – “Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens”.

c. AIA Document G707 – “Consent of Surety to Final Payment”.




PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01 29 00 - 4


END OF SECTION



COORDINATION

01 31 00 - 1

SECTION 01 31 00

COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements for coordinating construction

operations including, but not limited to:

1. General project coordination procedures.

2. Coordination Drawings.

3. Administrative and supervisory personnel.

4. Project Meetings

B. Related Sections: Following contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section 01 14 00 – Work Restrictions

2. Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation: for preparing and submitting

various Contractors’ schedules and reports.

3. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: for coordinating installation.

4. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: procedures for field engineering services,

including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

5. Section 01 77 00 - Contract Closeout Procedures: for coordinating contract closeout.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these

Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate

construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper

installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or

after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to assure maximum

accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for future installation.

4. Contractor shall coordinate mechanical and electrical and other sub-contractors for all

connections to make functional, operational and complete all systems and components.

5. Contractor shall coordinate construction operation to comply with the requirements of

commissioning.

B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special

procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of

attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their

work is required.



COORDINATION

01 31 00 - 2

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts

and to assure orderly progress of the Work.

1. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to:

a. Preparation of Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

b. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.

c. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

d. Delivery and processing of submittals.

e. Progress meetings.

f. Project closeout activities.

D. Shift Work: Work performed "after-hours" or other than "normal work-hours" shall be

coordinated with and have prior approval from Owner's Project Coordinator. .

E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to assure that operations are carried out with

consideration given to conservation of utilities and materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings prior to installation where limited space

availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different

components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by

separate entities.

1. Produce coordination documents incorporating all mechanical and electrical systems and

routing in conjunction with the building structure and architectural features in BIM. For

projects not performed in BIM, documents shall be submitted electronically in DWG format

using Owner’s layering convention.

2. Show interrelationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.

3. Indicate required installation sequences and accommodations for noise and life/safety

concerns in adjacent occupied spaces.

4. Refer to other Specification Sections for specific coordination drawing requirements for

mechanical and electrical installations.

B. Staff Names: At pre-construction conference, submit list of Contractor's principal staff

assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project Site. Identify

individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including

home, office, and cellular telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers

of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is

required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled

meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.

3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting

minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days after the

meeting.



COORDINATION

01 31 00 - 3

B. Pre-Construction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference after Notice to

Proceed and before starting construction.. Meeting to review and discuss Contract

Administration procedures, requirements, responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other

concerned parties shall attend conference. Participants shall be familiar with Project and

authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including following:

a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Phasing

c. Critical work sequencing.

d. Designation of responsible personnel.

e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.

f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.

g. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.

h. Distribution of Contract Documents

i. Submittal procedures.

j. Preparation of Record Documents.

k. Use of the premises.

l. Parking availability.

m. Office, work, and storage areas.

n. Equipment deliveries and priorities.

o. Safety procedures and interim Life Safety measures.

p. First aid.

q. Security.

r. Progress cleaning and Housekeeping.

s. Working hours.

3. Submittals: At this conference Contractor shall provide for review and discussion the

following;

a. List of subcontractors.

b. List of principle suppliers and fabricators.

c. Schedule of values.

d. Contractor’s construction schedule.

e. Initial product list schedule.

f. Contractor's staff list.

g. Schedule of labor rates.

C. Pre-Installation Conferences: Conduct pre-installation conference at Project Site before starting

each major construction activity and as required by various Sections of this Specification to

ensure coordination with other construction and compliance with contract requirements.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and

installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend meeting. Advise Owner of

meeting date.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for particular

activity under consideration at each pre-installation conference, including requirements for

following:

a. Contract Documents.

b. Options.

c. Related RFI’s and Change Orders.

d. Purchases.

e. Deliveries.

f. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality-control samples.



COORDINATION

01 31 00 - 4

g. Review of mockups.

h. Possible conflicts.

i. Compatibility problems.

j. Time schedules.

k. Weather limitations.

l. Manufacturer's written recommendations.

m. Warranty requirements.

n. Compatibility of materials.

o. Acceptability of substrates.

p. Temporary facilities and controls.

q. Space and access limitations.

r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

s. Safety and interim Life Safety measures.

t. Inspecting and testing requirements.

u. Recording requirements.

v. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements. Distribute the

record of the meeting to everyone concerned, promptly, including the Owner and Architect.

4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate

whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and

reconvene conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at Project Site every week or at intervals

agreeable to Contractor, Owner and Architect. Coordinate meeting date and time with Owner.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; subcontractors; suppliers; or other entity concerned with

current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities

shall be represented at these meetings. Participants shall be familiar with Project and

authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as

appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress and status since last meeting.

1) Determine where each activity is on Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether

on time, ahead or behind schedule. Review and discuss any anticipated delays and

possible impact on the schedule.

2) Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited.

3) Secure commitments from parties involved to do so.

4) Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to insure current and subsequent

activities will be completed within Contract Time.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, include following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Time.

3) Sequences/Coordination.

4) Status of submittals/shop drawings, product data or samples.

5) Deliveries.

6) Off-site fabrication problems.

7) Access.

8) Site utilization.

9) Temporary facilities and controls.

10) Adjacent occupancies

11) Hours of work.

12) Hazards, risks Hot Works, and Construction Risk Assessments

13) Progress cleaning and housekeeping.



COORDINATION

01 31 00 - 5

14) Quality and work standards.

15) Change Orders status.

16) Documentation of information for payment requests.

17) Interim Life Safety Measures.

18) Contractor, Subcontractor concerns.

19) Architect/Engineer concerns.

20) Owner concerns.

21) Project budget

22) Questions, Conflicts, Request for Information.

3. Reporting: No later than 3 calendar days after each meeting, distribute minutes of the

meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief

summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress

meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised

schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION PROVISIONS

A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the

substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

B. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and

recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or

stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents.

C. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject

damaged and defective items.

D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure

Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement.

E. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work

to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision.

F. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation.

G. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the best

possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as

necessary to prevent deterioration.

H. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize the necessity

of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining

materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage

or deterioration at Substantial Completion.



COORDINATION

01 31 00 - 6

B. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of

the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without

damaging effects.

END OF SECTION



CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

01 32 00 - 1

SECTION 01 32 00


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 1


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress

of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Preliminary Construction Schedule.

2. Contractor's Construction Schedule.

3. Submittal Schedule.

4. Daily Quality Control/Construction Reports.

5. Special Reports.

B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division-1 Sections for requirements for

administrative submittals.

1. Such submittals include, but not limited to:

a. Permits.

b. Applications for payment.

c. Performance and payment bonds

d. Insurance certificates.

e. List of Subcontractors.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 01 14 00 - Work Restrictions; for submitting Interim Life safety Measures

Monitoring report.

2. Section 01 29 00 - Payment Procedures; for submitting Schedule of Values.

3. Section 01 31 00 - Coordination; for submitting and distributing meeting and conference

minutes.

4. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements; for submitting a schedule of Tests and

Inspections.

5. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements; for submitting Product List.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals Schedule: Submit electronic copy of schedule.

1. Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.

b. Specification Section number and title.

c. Submittal type (shop drawing, product data or sample).

d. Description of the Work covered.

e. Scheduled date for re-submittal

f. Scheduled date Architect's final release or approval.

B. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit electronic copy.

C. Contractor’s Construction Schedule: Submit electronic copy of initial schedule for entire

construction period.

D. Daily Quality Control/Construction Reports: Submit electronic copies at weekly intervals.




01 32 00 - 2

E. Field Condition Reports: Submit electronic copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.

F. Special Reports: Submit electronic copies at time of unusual event.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of

construction activities.

B. Coordinate Contractor’s Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts,

Submittal Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and

reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties

involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity with other activities and schedule them in proper

sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required

by construction schedule. Include time required for review, re-submittal, ordering,

manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction

Schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include

submittals required during first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain

orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for

manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor’s

Construction Schedule.

2.2 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC’s “Construction Planning &

Scheduling.”

B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to the date of

Final Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an

early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate construction activity for each principal

element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically

allowed by Owner.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and

major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule.

Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals,

purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and re-submittal times indicated in Section 01 33

00 – Submittal Procedures, in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor’s

Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 14 days for startup and testing.




01 32 00 - 3

5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial

Completion, and allow time for Architect’s and Owner’s administrative procedures

necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Commissioning Activities: Include commissioning process activities as

7. separate activities in the schedule. Commissioning activities include, but are not limited to,

submittals, approvals, purchasing, testing, and documentation

8. Owner Occupancy: Include Owner equipment and furniture installation, move-in and

occupancy

D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and

as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Phasing.

2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by

Owner.

3. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery

date indicated in Section 01 11 00 – Summary. Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest

possible delivery date.

4. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery

date indicated in Section 01 11 00 – Summary. Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest

possible delivery date.

5. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Requirements for phased completion.

b. Pre-purchased materials.

c. Coordination with existing construction.

d. Uninterruptible services.

e. Seasonal variations.

f. Environmental control.

6. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work,

including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Submittals and review.

b. Purchases.

c. Mockups.

d. Fabrication.

e. Sample testing.

f. Deliveries.

g. Installation.

h. Tests and inspections.

i. Adjusting.

j. Curing.

k. Start-up and placement into final use and operation.

7. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the

Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or

integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:

a. Structural completion.

b. Permanent space enclosure.

c. Completion of mechanical installation.

d. Completion of electrical installation.

e. Substantial Completion.

E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but

not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, completion of hazardous materials abatement activity,

completion of building demolition, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.




01 32 00 - 4

F. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its

submission, prepare a time-impact analysis to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on

the overall project schedule.

2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within

7 days of date established for the Notice of Award.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of

each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60

days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash

requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

2.4 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE )

A. CRITICAL PATH METHOD SCHEDULE: The Contractor must perform work in accordance

with the approved Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule to achieve timely completion of all

Contract milestones and to avoid acceleration, termination for default, and end of Contract

claims for liquidated damages. The Contractor must give the schedule provisions particular

consideration and resolve any areas of uncertainty by asking appropriate questions prior to bid

opening.

1. Purpose of the Project Schedule shall be to:

a. Assure adequate planning, scheduling and reporting during execution of the work by

the Contractor

b. Assure coordination of the work of the Contractor and the various subcontractors and

suppliers at all tiers

c. Assist the Contractor and Owner in monitoring the progress of the work and evaluating

proposed changes to the Contract and the Project Schedule

d. Assist the Owner in determining required dates for Owner supplied materials and

services

2. The Project Schedule shall employ CPM using retained logic for the planning, scheduling

and reporting of the work to be performed under the Contract. The schedule will be

produced utilizing the latest version of a recognized project scheduling software system.

a. The Contractor shall provide Time Scale Logic Diagrams and computer produced time

reports as stipulated herein, at no additional cost to the Owner.

b. The Project Schedule shall incorporate a project Work Breakdown Structure (WBS)

and otherwise conform to the coding, grouping and organization used by the Owner.

Additionally, the Contractor’s Project Schedule submissions shall be suitable for

incorporation into the Owner’s master schedule requirements.

3. The Contractor shall meet with the Owner’s Representative and designer within fifteen (15)

days following NTP to conduct a joint review of the Project Schedule requirements of the

Contract to assure both of the Contractor’s understanding of the requirements of this

Section.

a. The Contractor’s Project Manager or General Superintendent shall conduct the formal

presentation utilizing schedule graphics and charts of the approach the Contractor will

take to complete the project within the contractual milestones.




01 32 00 - 5

4. The Contractor shall designate in writing, and submit qualifications of, a Scheduling

Representative, who shall be responsible for preparation and maintenance of the Project

Schedule. Such qualifications shall include not less than two (2) previous projects of similar

type, complexity and value utilizing Critical Path Method (CPM) scheduling. The

Scheduling representative shall be available on an as-needed basis. The Scheduling

representative may be from within the Contractor’s organization or an outside consultant.

The Owner shall have the right to disapprove the designated Scheduling Representative, in

which case the Contractor must resubmit a replacement for approval. After acceptance, the

Contractor may not replace the Scheduling Representative without prior written consent of

the Owner.

a. The Scheduling Representative shall attend all schedule-related meetings and all

monthly update meetings throughout the duration of the Contract.

b. The Contractor agrees that whenever the Owner’s Representative advises the

Contractor in writing that the Scheduling Representative is not performing his/her

duties to the satisfaction of the Owner, the Contractor shall replace the Scheduling

Representative at no additional cost to the Owner and designate in writing, within seven

(7) calendar days, a new authorized representative satisfactory to the Owner.

B. SCHEDULE SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS:

1. The Contractor shall develop and submit the Preliminary Bar-Chart Schedule in accordance

with the requirements above. The Owner shall review the Preliminary Schedule for

compliance with the specifications and notify the Contractor at the Preconstruction Meeting

of its acceptability. The Contractor shall not begin work until the Preliminary Schedule is

accepted.

2. From the Preliminary Bar-Chart Schedule, the Contractor shall develop the CPM Schedule

and shall include summary activities representing the work required to complete the

Contract. The logic relationships between activities (other than “hammock” or “level of

effort”) will generally be finish-to-start. Start-to Finish relationships will only be permitted

by prior agreement with the Owner’s Representative. Negative float is not permitted.

Negative lag requires prior agreement of the Owner’s Representative.

3. Activities (excluding “Hammocks” or “Level of Effort”) shall be not less than one (1) day

or more than twenty (20) days in duration unless otherwise approved by the Owner’s

Representative. Procurement, reviews, closings, and third-party (excluding subcontractors)

activities are examples of activities that may be exempted from this requirement.

4. Each activity in the schedule shall have at least one predecessor and one successor unless

otherwise approved by the Owner’s Representative. All activities except “Notice to

Proceed” will be required to have at least one predecessor tied to “start” of the subject

activity, and all activities except “Project Completion” will be required to have at least one

successor tied to the “finish” of the subject activity.

5. The Contractor shall not use constraints of any type without the prior approval of the

Owner’s Representative for each instance. A constraint shall be used for project completion

indicating the requisite Contract completion date to properly generate float.

6. Float is not for the exclusive use of either the Owner or the Contractor, but is jointly owned

by both and is a resource available to and shared by both parties as needed to meet the

Contract completion dates. Accordingly, the Contractor shall not use float suppression

techniques or sequester shared float through such strategies as extending activity duration

estimates to consume available float, application of constraints, using preferential logic, the

progress override option, etc.




01 32 00 - 6

7. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner’s Representative, the schedule shall be cost loaded.

Upon acceptance of the Schedule of Values as provided in the Contract Documents, cost

loading shall be implemented on each activity with a one-to-one relationship with the

Schedule of Values, or in the event the Contractor and Owner’s Representative determine a

one-to-one relationship is not practicable, a cross-reference shall be provided. Values shall

be assigned that accurately reflect the total cost of the work described, including labor,

materials, equipment, subcontractors, etc. These values will not be used for payment

purposes, but must be maintained accurately with actual expenditure data to be based on

invoicing in monthly updates. The sum of the values assigned to the activities in the

Contractor’s schedule shall be equal to the Contract budget, expended to date and remaining

to spend values for each individual Bid Item (in accordance with the Bid Item type, e.g.,

lump sum, unit price) and the total Contract. Cost loading resources shall be named and

coded to correlate directly with Contractor’s invoicing. These values may be utilized to

assist the Owner in cash flow predictions and as an additional measure of project progress.

8. The Contractor shall submit a Detailed CPM Schedule showing all work to be accomplished

on the project. The schedule shall clearly indicate the sequence and interdependency of

work activities. The Detailed Schedule shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

a. Submittal Activities:

1) Submittal activities shall include all required Contract submittals, re-submittals,

and reviews and respective contractual durations in accordance with the terms and

conditions of the Contract.

2) Include Vendor design activities, vendor supplied information, drawings,

engineering, etc.

b. Procurement Activities:

1) The proposed procurement activities shall include mobilization, shop drawings and

sample submittals, fabrication and delivery of key and long-lead procurement

elements. The schedule shall indicate intended submittal dates and realistic

delivery dates for fabrication and delivery activities.

2) Owner’s review of: shop drawings, product data, samples and requested

substitutions shall be identified as schedule activities. The minimum duration for

these activities shall be two (2) calendar weeks for shop drawings, product data and

samples and three (3) calendar weeks for requested substitutions.

3) All durations of procurement activities shall be shown in working days on a five-

day per week basis, unless the standard workweek for the Contract is different than

five days. In that case the duration shall be adjusted accordingly.

c. Construction Activities:

1) The construction activities shall cover all physical work activities performed by the

Contractor and subcontractors. Any shut-down periods shall be clearly indicated.

2) The construction activities shall also cover all work to be performed by the Owner,

its contractors or private utility contractors related to the Contract to get all of the

inter-project dependencies identified explicitly and in detail.

3) The construction activities shall be described by location, phase and sequence as

appropriate with the work readily identifiable so that progress can be adequately

measured.

4) The time duration assigned to each activity shall be the Contractor’s best estimate

of working hours required to complete the activity considering the scope and

resources planned for activity and shall be limited to the maximum allotted work

period during the weekend shutdown.

d. Commissioning Activities:

1) The commissioning activities shall cover all training or testing activities required

by the contract period to Substantial Completion of a portion of or all of the Work.




01 32 00 - 7

e. Punchlist, Demobilization and As-Built Activities:

1) The punchlist activities shall include without limitation all activities and durations

required in this Contract in respect of punchlist walkthrough, development and

issuance of punchlist, and correction of punchlist items.

2) Demobilization activities shall include all activities required to demobilize and

return the worksite to an acceptable condition.

3) All As-Built documents required hereunder. The final schedule update shall be an

“As-Built” schedule indicating all activities have been completed.

f. Milestones:

1) All Milestone events required by the Contract Documents or requested by Owner.

g. Weather Delays:

1) Anticipated lost time due to weather shall be included in the Schedule to ensure

completion of all work within the Contract time. The Contractor’s progress

schedule must reflect these anticipated adverse weather delays in all weather

dependent activities by assigning such activities to the applicable weather workday

calendar which incorporates anticipated/actual weather days. The number of

anticipated weather days incorporated in the weather workday calendar(s) per

month shall be as found in the project General Conditions.

2) The weather workday calendar(s) shall be updated monthly to reflect actual

weather days. Individual activity durations are not to be increased to include

expected lost weather days.

3) Any temperature sensitive activities, such as asphalt paving, shall be indicated in

the schedule and accepted by the Owner as reasonable. The work calendar

associated with these activities shall also be accepted by the Owner.

h. Logic Diagram:

1) A unique activity number limited to a maximum of ten (10) numerals.

2) Concise description of the work represented by the activity. The work related to

each activity shall be limited to one work trade in one area.

3) Performance responsibilities by discipline code: MECH, ELEC, etc., or other

acceptable abbreviations approved by Owner.

4) A member project designation that shall identify the phase of the project in which

the activity is to be performed.

9. Detailed CPM Schedule, Other:

a. At each scheduling meeting, provide a computer diskette or CD-R of all electronic

schedule information. Also provide a color coded plot of the proposed Detailed

Network (Time Scale Logic Diagram) which shall be neatly organized and plotted time

scaled according to Early Start of all activities from left to right with suitable notation

relating the interface points among sheets.

b. Submit monthly with pay Request or when requested provide Computer Generated

Schedule Reports:

1) In Total Float order

2) In Early Start order

3) In order of activity number giving predecessors and successor activities, with

number, description and duration

c. For first CPM schedule and wherever changes require, provide a written Narrative that

shall present the construction approaches and explains the schedule logic. The

Narrative shall discuss the project’s critical path, state how the Contractor plans to work

the project (day/shifts/hours), and present any weather and temperature restrictions

included in the schedule. Where applicable the narrative shall completely discuss the

interface between the contractor’s work and other contractors at the level of detail

sufficient to manage the various contractors, and to the satisfaction of the Owner. The

narrative shall include a list of project specific assumptions made which if untrue are

likely to adversely affect the Contractor’s ability to maintain its schedule.




01 32 00 - 8

d. If the Owner questions the Contractor’s proposed activities, logic, or durations, the

Contractor shall provide a satisfactory revision, or adequate justification, to the

satisfaction of the Owner.

e. Failure by the Contractor to include any element of work required for performance of

the Contract shall not excuse the Contractor from completing all work within the

Contract time. Such omission or error, when detected by the Contractor or the Owner,

shall be corrected in the next issue of the project schedule, without increasing the

project’s performance time.

f. The available coding space within the master project schedule is a resource managed by

the Owner in the best interest of the project as a whole. Where applicable, the

Contractor shall develop its schedule within the member project database structure

provided by the Owner. The Contractor shall obtain advance permission from the

Owner to add project specific codes or calendars. The Owner shall not unreasonably

withhold permission.

2.5 SCHEDULE REVIEWS, REVISIONS AND ACCEPTANCE

A. The Owner shall review the initial submission of the Detailed CPM Schedule and shall respond

with comments within ten (10) days of submission. Any areas that, in the opinion of the Owner,

conflict with timely completion of the Contract shall be subject to revision by the Contractor.

B. The Contractor shall revise the Schedules to reflect the Owner’s comments within five (5) days

of receipt.

C. The Owner shall issue an acceptance letter upon determining that the Contractor’s schedules

reflect a reasonable representation of expected and required project performance. The accepted

Detailed Schedule shall serve as the Project Baseline Schedule. Acceptance by the Owner of the

Contractor’s Project Schedule does not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility whatsoever

for the accuracy or feasibility of the Project Schedule, or of the Contractor’s ability to meet the

Contract Completion Date. Nor does such acceptance create a warranty by the Owner expressed

or implied of the activities, logic, durations or manpower and equipment loading of the

Contractor’s Project Schedule.

D. Liquidated Damages, when applicable, will be measured from the Contract completion date or

from the date of time extension(s) granted by Change Order(s).

2.6 PROJECT SCHEDULE UPDATING:

A. The Project Schedule shall be updated on a bi-weekly basis throughout the entire Contract time

and until the Contract’s Substantial Completion of all the Work. Schedule updates shall be used

in progress meetings, it being understood such updates shall be the Contractor’s best estimate of

progress to date. The Contractor shall provide a four week schedule view at the weekly progress

meetings of the Schedule which shall include the previous week’s progress and the upcoming

activities for the next three weeks.

B. The Contractor shall meet with the Owner each month at the monthly progress meeting to

review actual progress made through the data date of the Schedule Update, including dates

activities started and/or completed, and to discuss the scheduling of future work. The Contractor

shall update the schedule using physically derived (as compared to duration based) percents

complete and adjustments to remaining durations. Revisions to the Network logic to more

accurately reflect the anticipated workflow can be discussed and mutually agreed-to, as well as

changes to activity durations, manning and equipment.




01 32 00 - 9

C. The effective date of each Schedule Update shall be the cut-off-date of the work to be included

in the Monthly Progress Payment Request. Contractor-prepared documents presented at the

update meeting shall include the following:

1. One (1) marked-up copy of the previous week’s Schedule Update computer-produced

reports coordinated with the requirements of the above paragraphs and indicating actual

activity start and/or complete dates, revised (current) remaining durations, and percent

complete with regard to activity progress.

2. A listing of proposed activities to be added, modified or deleted.

3. A listing of any proposed logic, duration or manning changes that would make the schedule

more accurately reflect the Project’s expected performance. The reasons for these changes

are to be described by the Contractor’s Scheduling Representative and accepted by the

Owner.

D. In case of disagreements at the schedule update meeting, concerning actual progress to date, the

Owner’s determination shall govern. In the event a submittal is rejected or returned for

correction, a new activity will be inserted into the schedule for Resubmission and another for

Review of the Re-submission. Upon completion of the schedule update meeting, the Contractor

shall revise the Project Schedule to reflect progress as of the data date of the Schedule Update

and any required revisions to the Project Schedule, and carry out a computer-produced

calculation to determine the status of the Project Schedule. The Contractor shall process the

schedule within three (3) calendar days and forward the update to the Owner.

E. Each Project Schedule Update, based upon the Contractor’s input as discussed above, will be

forwarded to the Owner for review and approval and will include the following information:

1. An updated written Narrative that compares the current project completion date to the

contract completion date and presents the current critical path. It should describe current

and expected problems and present possible cures. It should identify any decisions or

actions needed from the Owner. The Narrative should also include the following detailed

information:

a. A listing of activities added and deleted

b. A listing of logic changes.

c. Specific future actions that will recover any existing project slippage.

2. A computer diskette or CD-R containing the latest schedule update in electronic file format.

3. A color-coded plot of the current Network (Time Scale Logic Diagram) organized and

plotted according to Early Start of all activities. Computer generated schedule reports:

a. By Total Float.

b. By Early Start.

c. Total numerical order report with predecessors and successors.

d. Equipment Usage Graph (if required).

e. Acceptance of the monthly update shall be required before the monthly progress

payment is released.

2.7 RECOVERY SCHEDULES

A. If, as a result of a Schedule Update, the Project Schedule appears to no longer allow attainment

of the Project completion date, the Owner will request, and the Contractor shall submit, a copy

of the Project Schedule that has been revised to recover the current slippage. Such recovery

schedule shall meet the requirements of the detailed schedule as delineated herein and shall be

maintained alongside the Project Schedule until such time as recovery is accomplished. The

Contractor shall submit this recovery schedule at least two (2) calendar days before the next

scheduled update meeting so that the Owner may review an accept the revised Project Schedule

for use in the next schedule update.




01 32 00 - 10

B. The Contractor will attach a written narrative to the recovery schedule that will describe each of

the revisions to the schedule logic, durations and manning. The Contractor will issue a revised

Network (Time Scaled Logic Diagram), appropriate computer reports and a computer diskette or

CD-R of the electronic data.

2.8 TIME IMPACT ANALYSIS FOR PROPOSED CHANGE ORDERS AND DELAYS:

A. When the Contractor desires to obtain an extension of the project duration because of change

order or other occurrence on the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a written Time

Impact Analysis illustrating the influence of the change order or occurrence on the Contract

Schedule. Each Time Impact Analysis shall include a Fragmentary Network (FragNet)

incorporated into a copy of the then-current Project Schedule demonstrating how the Contractor

proposes to incorporate the change order or occurrence into the Project Schedule. The Time

Impact Analysis shall demonstrate the time impact based on the date the change order was given

to the Contractor or the date of the occurrence; the status of construction at that point in time;

and the event time computation of all affected activities. Upon acceptance of a change order, the

Contractor shall update the Project Baseline Schedule with such change order FragNet to

produce the Current Project Baseline Schedule. Time extensions will not be granted in the event

and for the duration the Contractor was otherwise concurrently delayed. Upon approval by the

Owner, the change order or occurrence shall be included in the next Project Schedule update.

B. The Contractor shall notify the Owner within five (5) days of any occurrence that may justify an

extension of Contract time or adjustment of milestones. The Contractor shall demonstrate using

a FragNet how such occurrence may affect the schedule, then track such affects noting any

changes in sequencing and/or mitigation efforts. The status of work prior to, the predicted

affect, and the affects during and after the occurrence shall be compared to determine any

Contract time extension or milestone adjustments.

C. An extension in the scheduled date of Contract intermediate milestones, Substantial Completion

of a portion of or of all the Work or Final Completion will only be granted in the event of

Excusable Delays affecting Work activities on the critical path or on activities which due to the

delay become critical.

1. This section governs the extent to which the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time

due to Excusable Delays. Provisions regarding compensation on account of such Excusable

Delays are set forth in the Contract. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of

the OWNER that the Excusable Delay in fact delayed the critical path for performance of

the Work, by use of critical path method (CPM) analysis using the then-current update of

the accepted Project Schedule.

2. To the extent the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time due to an Excusable Delay,

but the performance of the Work would have been suspended, delayed or interrupted by the

concurrent fault or neglect of the Contractor or by an inexcusable Delay, the Contractor

shall not be entitled to any additional costs or time extension for the period of such

concurrent delay.

D. To the extent an event results in an actual delay in the Work affecting Work activities on the

critical path, and where such event shall constitute an Excusable Delay as prescribed in the

General Conditions of the Project, a contract time extension shall not be unreasonably withheld.

1. Delays resulting from Force Majeure including weather delays. No increase in the Contract

Price will be allowed. The Contractor’s sole compensation for any delay shall be an

extension of time. Force Majeure means an occurrence beyond the control and without the

fault or negligence of either the Owner or the Contractor including, but not limited to,

unusually severe weather, flood, earthquake, fire, lightning, and other natural catastrophes,

acts of God, or the public enemy, war, riot, insurrection, civil disturbance or disobedience,

strike, labor dispute, expropriation or confiscation of facilities, changes of applicable law, or

sabotage of facilities.




01 32 00 - 11

2. Delays resulting from changes in Applicable Laws occurring after the date of execution of

the Contract. No increase in the Contract Price will be allowed. The Contractor’s sole

compensation for any delay shall be an extension of time.

E. The Time Impact Analysis shall be submitted in accordance with the following timing along

with a written proposal for any requested time extension:

1. With the filing of a written notice of claim as stated in the General Conditions, approval or

rejection of each Time Impact Analysis by the Owner shall be made as prescribed by the

General Conditions, unless subsequent meetings and negotiations are necessary. Upon

approval, a copy of the time Impact Analysis signed by the Owner shall be returned to the

Contractor, and incorporated into the next Project Schedule update.

2. The Time Impact Analysis related to a change order shall be incorporated into and attached

to the applicable change order.

3. In cases where the Contractor does not submit a Time Impact Analysis within the time

requirements stated above, it shall be considered a waiver of any request for an extension of

the Contract Performance Time. Any subsequent Time Impact Analysis submitted by the

Contractor shall be dismissed as untimely.

4. The master schedule in force at the time of the alleged delay will be used to determine the

impact of the alleged general contractor delay to other general contractors.

2.9 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports:

1. Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at

Project site:

a. List of subcontractors at site.

b. Approximate count of personnel at site.

c. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.

d. Accidents.

e. Unusual events (refer to special reports).

f. Meetings and significant decisions.

g. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses.

h. Emergency procedures.

i. Orders and requests of governing authorities.

j. Change Orders received, implemented.

k. Services connected, disconnected.

l. Equipment or system tests and start-ups.

m. Partial Completions, occupancies.

n. Substantial Completions authorized.

2.10 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute

copies of report to Architect and other parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at the

Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.

List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, an evaluation of

results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these

events are known or predictable.


END OF SECTION



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01 33 00 - 1

SECTION 01 33 00


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and other Divisions

1 thru 16 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittal of

Administrative Information, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, Operation & Maintenance

Manuals, and other miscellaneous submittals.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 01 29 00 – Payment Procedures; for submitting Applications for Payment.

2. Section 01 31 00 – Coordination; for submitting Coordination Drawings.

3. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Documentation; for submitting schedules and

reports, including Contractor’s Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.

4. Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements; for submitting test and inspection reports and for

erecting mockups.

5. Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures; for submitting warranties.

6. Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents; for submitting Project record data.

7. Section 01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance Data; for operation and maintenance manual

requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect’s and Owner’s

responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect’s and Owner’s

approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems

used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent

fixed-layout document format.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: Unless otherwise approved by the Owner and Architect, electronic copies of CAD

Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided for contractor’s use in preparing

submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities. Include dimensions that can be field verified at the time of submittal.

Transmit each submittal to Owner sufficiently in advance of scheduled performance of related

construction activities to avoid delay.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,

and related activities that require sequential activity.

a. Testing.

b. Purchasing.

c. Fabrication.

d. Delivery.




01 33 00 - 2

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for

coordination.

a. Architect and Owner reserve right to withhold action on a submittal requiring

coordination with other related submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements of Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress

Documentation, for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of

related construction activities.

D. Processing Time: Allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as

follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect’s receipt of submittal.

1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if

processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect

will notify Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Allow 21 days for reprocessing each submittal.

3. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of Contractor's failure to transmit

submittals to Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.

E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.

2. Provide “white space” of approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor’s review and approval markings and action markings taken by Architect and

Owner.

3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name and Project number.

b. Date.

c. Name of Architect.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Name of subcontractor (if applicable).

f. Name of supplier.

g. Name of manufacturer.

h. Number and title of Specification Section.

i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

4. Assign each submittal a unique identification: “W-XXXXXX-YY-Z,” where W, X, Y, and

Z are defined as follows:

a. W: Shall be assigned as follows:

1) “G” For Specification Divisions 02 through 14.

2) “M” For Specification Division 15.

3) “E” For Specification Division 16.

b. XXXXXX: For the 6-digit Section number that identifies the Division and

Specification Section in which the product or item being submitted is specified.

c. YY: For the sequence number, beginning with 01, that identifies the sequence of the

submittal within each Specification Section number.

d. Z: For the submission letter, that begins with A for the initial submission, B for the first

resubmission, and so forth.

F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations form the Contract Documents

on submittals.




01 33 00 - 3

G. Transmittal: Transmit each submittal with approved Transmittal Form. Submittals containing

information about more than one item or one Specification Section will be returned

without action. Submittals received from sources other than Contractor will be returned

without action.

1. Record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by

Architect and Owner on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the

Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label

information as the related submittal on Transmittal Form.

2. Include Contractor's signed certification stating that information submitted complies with

requirements of Contract Documents.

a. Submittal not indicating Contractor's review and approval of submittal shall be returned

without action.

3. Transmittal Form: Use approved form as developed by Owner for specific project. See

Section 00 40 00 – Sample Forms.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of

construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with marking indicating approved action taken

by Architect and Owner in connection with construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

1. Submittal Preparation – Contractor may use any or all of the following options:

a. Subcontractors and Suppliers provide electronic (PDF) submittals to Contractor via the

Submittal Exchange website or similar approved by Owner.

b. Subcontractors and Suppliers provide paper submittals to General Contractor who

electronically scans and converts to PDF format.

2. Contractor shall review and apply electronic stamp certifying that the submittal complies

with the requirements of the Contract Documents including verification of manufacturer /

product, dimensions and coordination information with other parts of the work.

3. Contractor shall transmit each submittal to Architect using the Submittal Exchange website,

www.submittalexchange.com.

a. Architect/Engineer review comments will be made available on the Submittal Exchange

website for downloading. Contractor will receive email notice of completed review.

b. Distribution of reviewed submittals to subcontractors and suppliers is the responsibility

of the Contractor.

4. Costs

a. The Contractor shall include the full cost of Submittal Exchange project subscription in

their proposal. This cost is included in the Contract Amount. Contact Submittal

Exchange at 1-800-714-0024 to verify cost prior to bid.

b. At Contractor’s option, training is available from Submittal Exchange regarding use of

the website and PDF submittals.

c. Internet Service and Equipment Requirements:

1) Email address and Internet access at Contractor’s main office.

2) Adobe Acrobat, Bluebeam PDF Revu, or similar PDF review software for applying

electronic stamps and comments.

http://www.submittalexchange.com/




01 33 00 - 4

2.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit newly prepared Project-specific information, drawn to accurate scale.

Provide Shop Drawings as complete submittals, no partial sets. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise

indicate deviations from Contract Documents.

1. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop

Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not

considered Shop Drawings.

2. Shop Drawings include but are not limited to following; fabrication and installation

drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, design mix formulas, templates and similar

drawings. Include following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions.

b. Identification of products and materials.

c. Notation of coordination requirements.

d. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

e. Compliance with specified standards.

f. Fabrication and installation drawings

g. Rough-in and setting diagrams

h. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control

wiring.

i. Templates and patterns

j. Design calculations.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

4. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2" x 11" but no larger than size of Contract Drawings.

5. Submittal: Submit PDF electronic file.

B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00– Coordination.

C. Product Data: Collect standard printed data and information into a single submittal for each

element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If data and information must be specially prepared because standard printed data or

information is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings," not as Product Data.

a. Product Data includes but is not limited to; printed information such as manufacturer's

product specifications and installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts,

roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show applicable choices and options. Where printed

Data includes information on several products, clearly mark copies to indicate applicable

information only.

3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.

b. Compliance with recognized trade association standards.

c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.

d. Application of testing agency labels and seals.

e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.

f. Notation of coordination requirements.

g. Manufacturer’s product specifications.

h. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

i. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts.

j. Color charts.

k. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

l. Printed performance curves.

m. Operational range diagrams.

n. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.




01 33 00 - 5

o. Provide copy of manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).

4. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of Contract Documents has

been confirmed.

a. Product Data submitted with extra information not clearly marked out or deleted shall

be returned.

5. Submittal: Submit PDF electronic file.

D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:

1. Comply with requirements in Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements, for mock-ups.

2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer’s color charts consisting of units or

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

3. Sample for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from

same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and

physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show fill range of color and

texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial

sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials;

complete units of repetitively used materials; color range sets; swatches showing color,

texture, and pattern; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

4. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of

qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach

label on unexposed side that includes the following.

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Sample source, availability and delivery time.

c. Product name or name of manufacturer.

d. Compliance with recognized standards.

5. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final check of these

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between

final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the material or

product represented by a Sample, submit at least 3 sets of paired units that show

approximate limits of the variations.

b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate

workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and

similar construction characteristics.

6. Number of Samples for Selection: Submit 3 full sets of available choices where color,

pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer’s

product line. Architect and Owner will each retain one full set, remainder will be returned

with options selected.

7. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit 3 sets of Samples. Architect and Owner will

each retain 1 Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain 1 returned Sample

set as a Project Record Sample.

a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques,

connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

8. Disposition: Maintain set of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control

comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to

determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual

Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of

use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner’s property,

are the property of Contractor.




01 33 00 - 6

E. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for

the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.

2. Number and name of room or space.

3. Location within room or space.

F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00 – Construction Progress

Documentation.

G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Section 01 29 00 – Payment Procedures.

H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Section 01 29 00 – Payment Procedures.

I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each

portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a

special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying

products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.

3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

2.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit electronic copy unless otherwise indicated..

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed

by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Section 01 40 00 – Quality

Requirements.

B. Contractor’s Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Section 01 32 00 –

Construction Progress Documentation.

C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of

firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project named and addresses, names and

address of architects and owners, and other information specified.

D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements.

E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel

comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) and

Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel

certified.

F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying

that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience

where required.

H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that

material complies with requirements.

I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency’s

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material compliance with requirements.




01 33 00 - 7

J. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency’s standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation

of product, for compliance with performance requirements.

K. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency’s standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed

before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate

preparation needed for adhesion.

L. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency’s

standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during

installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with

requirements.

M. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by

manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed

by a qualified testing agency.

N. Research/Evaluation Reports:

1. Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the

following information:

a. Name of evaluation organization.

b. Date of evaluation.

c. Time period when report is in effect.

d. Product and manufacturer’s names.

e. Description of product.

f. Test procedures and results.

g. Limitations of use.

O. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and

normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements of Section 01 78 23

- Operation and Maintenance Data.

P. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents

manufacturer’s recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a

product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of

manufacturer.

1. Include the following as applicable:

a. Preparation of substrates.

b. Required substrate tolerances.

c. Sequence of installation or erection.

d. Required installation tolerances.

e. Required adjustments.

f. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

Q. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized

service representative’s tests and inspections.

1. Include the following, as applicable:

a. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative

making report.

b. Statement on conditions of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.

c. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.

d. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.




01 33 00 - 8

e. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.

f. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

g. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

R. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of

insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of

coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of coverage.

S. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR’S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the contract Documents. Note corrections

and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect and Owner.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name

and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date

of Contractor’s approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,

and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

1. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not waived or relieved

by Architect's or Owner's review of submittals.

2. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract

Documents is not waived or relieved by Architect's or Owner's review, unless written

acceptance of specific deviation is given by Owner.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S AND OWNER'S ACTION

A. General: Architect and Owner will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor’s approval

stamp and will return them without action.

1. Compliance with specified characteristics is Contractor's responsibility. 2. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered non-responsive and will be

returned for resubmission without comment.

B. Action Submittals: Architect and Owner will review each submittal, make marks to indicate

corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect and Owner will stamp each

submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. Stamp will be appropriately marked, as

follows, to indicate action taken:

1. Final Unrestricted Release: Submittal marked "Reviewed, No Exceptions Taken", that part

of the Work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of

Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance.

2. Final-But-Restricted Release: Submittal marked "Reviewed, Exceptions Taken As Noted",

that part of the Work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations

or corrections on submittal and requirements of Contract Documents; final acceptance will

depend on that compliance.

3. Returned for Resubmittal: Submittal marked "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected", do not

proceed with that part of the Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication,

delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with notations;

resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark.

a. Do not permit submittal marked "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected" to be used at

Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress.




01 33 00 - 9

C. Informational Submittals: Architect and Owner will review each submittal and will not return it,

or will reject and return if it does not comply with requirements. Architect and Owner will

forward each submittal as appropriate.

D. Submittals not required by the Contract documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.

END OF SECTION



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01 40 00 - 1

SECTION 01 40 00


PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control.

B. Testing and Inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with

Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in

the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover

production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, Inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control

procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Owner,

Architect, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Sections: Following contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation; for coordination with other

schedules.

2. Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching; for repair and restoration of construction disturbed

by inspection and testing activities.

3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed

construction complies with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Test, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after

execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements.

Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mock-ups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mock-ups

are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and,

where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination,

testing, or operation; they are not Samples.

D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.




01 40 00 - 2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to demonstrate

their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on

the inspections of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

1. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

a. Specification Section number and title.

b. Description of test and inspection.

c. Identification of applicable standards.

d. Identification of test and inspection methods.

e. Number of tests and inspections required.

f. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.

g. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.

h. Requirements for obtaining samples.

i. Unique characteristic of each quality-control service.

2. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

a. Date of issue.

b. Project title and number.

c. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency.

d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.

e. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.

f. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.

g. Identification of product and Specification Section.

h. Complete test or inspection data.

i. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.

j. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.

k. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

Contract Document requirements.

l. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

m. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.

B. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner’s records, submit copies of permits, licenses,

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee

payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those for this

Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production

capacity to produce required units.

B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of

manufacturer’s products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this

Project.

C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.




01 40 00 - 3

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in the State of Nebraska and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the

kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the

system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,

design, and extent.

F. Specialist: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall

be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy

qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations

governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and

similar conventions.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing

and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests

and inspections to be performed.

H. Mock-ups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mock-ups, build mock-ups for each

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using

materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mock-ups in locations and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Owner

and Architect.

2. Notify Owner and Architect, 7 days in advance of dates and times when mock-ups will be

constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

4. Obtain Owner’s and Architect’s approval of mock-ups before starting work, fabrication, or

construction.

5. Maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner’s responsibility,

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner shall furnish contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing

agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged

to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces failed work or is necessitated

by tests that failed to comply with the contract Documents will be charged to Contractor,

and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services

specified. Costs for these services are included in Contract Sum.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing

agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in

writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 36 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing

or inspection is to be performed.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor’s responsibility, submit a

certified written report in triplicate of each quality control service to Architect.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents

are Contractor’s responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to Owner when they so direct.




01 40 00 - 4

C. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and

inspections identified in the applicable Building Codes as the responsibility of Owner.

1. Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and

deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar

quality-control service to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, with a copy to authorities

having jurisdiction.

3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial

Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

4. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested

and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

5. Testing agency will retest and re-inspect corrected work.

D. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

service connections. Report results in writing.

E. Retesting and Re-inspection: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were

Contractor’s responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-

inspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with

requirements established by the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Owner, and Contractor in

performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect, Owner and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed

in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work

complies with or deviates from requirements.

3. Submit a certified written report, in triplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-

control service through Contractor.

4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of Contract Documents or approve or

accept any portion of the Work.

5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate and coordinate with agencies performing required tests,

inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as

requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of

personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples.

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for materials mixes that require control by testing agency.

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-control

services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction

to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.




01 40 00 - 5

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of test, inspections, and similar quality-

control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days after the

date of Notice to Proceed.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party

involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

J. Fire Barrier

1. Fire barrier penetrations in any facility shall be performed in strict accordance with that

facilities fire barrier program where penetrations are protected with a listed product and

installed by trained and certified personnel. Penetrations shall be tracked with an

identification sticker, listing product, date, company name, initials of installer. Code

compliant fire partition, wall and barrier identification shall be provided on both sides of

walls or partitions.

2. DO NOT paint over any barrier or rating indication stickers or labels on all systems, walls,

doors and frames.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: Upon completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of

these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a

manner that eliminates evidence of patching.

2. Comply with Contract Document requirements for Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching.

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of assignment of responsibility

for quality-control services.

END OF SECTION



REFERENCES

01 42 00 - 1

SECTION 01 42 00

REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic contract definitions are included in Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Indicated": Refers to graphic representations, notes or schedules on Drawings, or other

paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and similar requirements in Contract Documents.

Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help user locate

reference.

C. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved,"

"required," and "permitted" mean directed by Architect, requested by Architect, and similar

phrases.

D. "Approved": When used in conjunction with Architect's action on Contractor's submittals,

applications, and requests, is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in

Conditions of the Contract.

E. "Regulations": Includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities

having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within construction industry

that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Means supply and deliver to Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,

installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Describes operations at Project site including actual unloading, temporarily storing,

unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing,

curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Means to furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

I. "Installer": Is Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor,

or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation,

erection, application, or similar operations.

1. "Experienced": When used with term "installer," means having successfully completed a

minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with

special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. Trades: Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities

must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,

such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to

tradespersons of corresponding generic name.



REFERENCES

01 42 00 - 2

3. Assigning Specialists: Certain Sections of Specifications require that specific construction

activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those operations.

Specialists must be engaged for those activities, and their assignments are requirements over

which Contractor has no option. However, ultimate responsibility for fulfilling contract

requirements remains with Contractor.

a. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building codes and

similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local

trade-union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.

J. "Project Site": Is space available to Contractor for performing construction activities. Extent of

Project Site as shown on Drawings or directed by Owner.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,

applicable construction industry standards have same force and effect as if bound or copied

directly into Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of

Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of Contract Documents, unless

otherwise indicated.

C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with 2 or more standards is specified and standards

establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply

with most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but

apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: Quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be

the minimum provided or performed. Actual installation may comply exactly with

minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed minimum within reasonable limits.

To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum,

as appropriate, for context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision

before proceeding.

D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project is required to be familiar

with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are

not bound with Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain

copies directly from publication source and make them available on request.

E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are

used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean recognized name of trade

association, standards-generating organization, authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity

applicable to context of text provision. Refer to: Gale Research Co.'s, "Encyclopedia of

Associations," or in Columbia Books ”National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S.”.



END OF SECTION



TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01 50 00 - 1

SECTION 01 50 00


PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary

utilities, support facilities, security and protection facilities.

B. Temporary facilities and controls include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Temporary utilities:

a. Sewers and drainage

b. Water service and distribution.

c. Sanitary facilities.

d. Heating and cooling facilities.

e. Ventilation.

f. Electric power service.

g. Lighting.

h. Telephone service.

2. Support facilities:

a. Temporary roads and paving.

b. Dewatering facilities and drains.

c. Project identification and temporary signs.

d. Waste disposal facilities.

e. Field offices.

f. Storage and fabrication sheds.

g. Temporary stairs.

h. Construction aids.

i. Miscellaneous services and facilities.

3. Security and protection facilities:

a. Environmental protection.

b. Storm water control.

c. Tree and plant protection.

d. Pest control.

e. Site enclosure fence.

f. Security enclosure and lockup.

g. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.

h. Covered walkways.

i. Fire protection.

C. Related Sections: Following Sections contain requirements and facilities that relate to this

Section:

1. Section 01 14 00 – Work Restrictions: to provide Interim Life Safety Measures.

2. Section 01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching: to provide for repair of existing facilities and

demolition areas.

3. Section 02 40 00 - Demolition: to provide for protection and separation in demolition areas.




01 50 00 - 2

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete,

insulated, and weather-tight; exterior walls are insulated and weather-tight; and all openings are

closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.4 USE CHARGES

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner and shall be

included in the Contract Sum.

1. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not

limited to, the following:

a. Owner’s construction forces.

b. Occupants of Project.

c. Architect.

d. Testing agencies.

e. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water Service: Use water from Owner’s existing water system without metering and without

payment of use charges.

C. Electric Power Service: Use electric power from Owner’s existing system without metering and

without payment of use charges.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Temporary Utilities Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections and similar procedures

performed on temporary utilities.

B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for

commencement of the Work, submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of

each temporary utility.

C. Notice of Intent, Notice of Transfer and Notice of Termination: An Notice of Intent (NOI) must

be submitted to the Nebraska Department of Environmental Quality (NDEQ) at least seven (7)

days prior to earth disturbing activities. All applicable storm water controls must be in place

before breaking ground. Once the construction is complete, the applicant shall submit a Notice

of Termination (NOT) to the NDEQ. A Copy of the NOI, NOT and/or Transfer, and

Authorization to Discharge from the NDEQ must be sent to Owner’s Environmental Health and

Safety (EHS). Submit copies of all SWPPP required inspections.

D. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for

construction personnel, temporary pavings and roads, fencing and soil erosion controls.


A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction, including but not limited to:

1. Building Code requirements.

2. Health and safety regulations.

3. Utility company regulations.

4. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules.

5. Environmental protection regulations.

B. Standards: Comply with latest edition of following:

1. NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations."

2. NFPA Code 101, "Life Safety Code."

3. ANSI-A10 Series standards, "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition."




01 50 00 - 3

4. NECA’s, "Temporary Electrical Facilities."

a. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA and UL standards and regulations for

temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National

Electric Code."

C. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities

are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.

D. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each

temporary utility and facility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Utilities Schedule: Prepare schedule indicating dates for implementation and

termination of each temporary utility. At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner,

change over from temporary to use of permanent service.

B. Conditions of Use:

1. Following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged

in the Work:

a. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance.

b. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures.

c. Relocate temporary services and facilities by progress of the Work.

d. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress of the Work.

e. Extend warranty or guarantee period on permanent system used during construction

period to commence on date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition

may be used if approved by Owner. Provide materials suitable for use intended.

B. Chain-Link Fencing: Provide 11-gage; galvanized steel, 2-inch, chain-link fabric fencing, 6-feet

high; galvanized steel pipe posts; 2-3/8-inch OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch OD corner posts, with

1-5/8-inch OD top rails, with galvanized barbed wire top strand; or, as detailed on civil

drawings.

C. Safety Barrier Fencing: Provide 4-foot high, safety orange polyethylene mesh fabric fencing;

galvanized steel U-Channel posts spaced not more than 6 feet apart.

D. Barricade Tape: Provide 3-inch wide, 4 mil, yellow fluorescent polyethylene tape. Black printing

on one side to read; "Caution – Do Not Enter".

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended.

B. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Drinking–water fountains, containerized, tap-dispenser. Bottled-water

drinking-water units, including paper cup supply.

C. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110-120

volt plugs into higher voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset

button and pilot light.

D. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for

surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V AC, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be

nonmetallic sheathed cable.




01 50 00 - 4

E. Heating Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide vented

self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units

is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed.

F. Field Offices: Prefabricated mobile units with lockable entrances, operable windows, and

serviceable finishes; heated and air-conditioned, on foundations adequate for normal loading.

G. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation or

combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar

nonabsorbent material.

H. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations.

I. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, class "ABC", dry chemical

extinguishers. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for size and location.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will

serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work.

Relocate and modify facilities as required.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as

required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use

of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to

existing service. Where company provides only part of service, provide remainder with

matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with company recommendations.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for a time when service can be

interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is

available, provide trucked-in services

3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to site where Owner's easements cannot be

used for that purpose.

B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for

construction until permanent service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use.

C. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution

system of sufficient size, power and capacity characteristics during construction period. Include

transformers, overload protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters and main

distribution switch gear.

1. Connect service to power source as directed by Owner.

2. Install electric power service underground, unless overhead service must be used.

3. Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage

4. Power cords shall be responsibility of each trade.




01 50 00 - 5

D. Steam, Chilled Water, and Heating Water: Contractor shall pay Owner for services used prior to

Substantial Completion. Owner’s meters shall be operational according to the Contract

Documents prior to use these utilities

E. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and

equipment.

1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single

lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed

safe length-voltage ratio.

2. Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V.

3. Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metallic cable for wiring exposed to possible damage.

Provide rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors, decks, or other traffic

areas.

4. Provide metal conduit enclosures of boxes for wiring devices.

5. Provide 4-gang outlets, spaced so 100-foot extension cord can reach each area for power

hand tools and task lighting. Provide a separate 125-V AC, 20-A circuit for each outlet.

F. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides OSHA required

illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements

without operating entire system.

2. Install exterior-yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction

operations, traffic conditions, and signage when the Work is being performed.

G. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities

for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from

adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that

will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

1. Maintain minimum temperature of 50 deg F in permanently enclosed portions of building

for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F for finishing activities and areas where

finished Work has been installed.

2. Use of permanent system: Request permission and receive written approval from Owner to

use permanent system. If approved, then provide and maintain a sealed air filter at each air

return opening thru-out duration of use. Air filter shall be changed as necessary or replaced

not more than every 14 days. Provide continued maintenance of equipment per

manufacturers recommendations.

3. Cost of temporary heating and cooling equipment shall be paid by Contractor.

4. Contractor shall be responsible for all cost of equipment, utility service, and utility usage

associated with winter protection and ground thawing.

H. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction

activities for curing or drying of completed installations of for protecting installed construction

from adverse effects of high humidity. Select safe equipment from that specified that will not

have a harmful effect on completed installations of elements being installed. Coordinate

ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize consumption of

energy.

I. Internet/Wireless: Provide temporary internet service and wireless router throughout the

construction period for common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction

activities. Contractor shall contract with Cox or CenturyLink to provide service and shall pay all

associated costs.

J. Temporary Telephone: Provide temporary telephones throughout construction period.




01 50 00 - 6

K. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets and drinking water fixtures. Comply with

regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures

and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve Project's needs.

1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups and similar disposable

materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for

used material.

2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy.

3. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel.

4. Drinking Water Facilities: Provide containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking

water units.

L. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent

that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage

ditches, dry wells, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully

used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site in a

lawful manner.

1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils and similar contaminants that

might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge.

2. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by sewer department officials.

3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After

heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly.

4. Provide temporary filter beds, settlement tanks, separators, and similar devices to purify

effluent to levels acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Locate temporary construction and support facilities for easy access.

2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove just before

Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be

permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

3. Provide incombustible construction located within construction area or within 30 feet of

building lines. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Provide an insulated, weather-tight, air-conditioned field office for

use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; and of sufficient

size to accommodate required office personnel and meetings of 12 persons at Project site.

Prefabricated or mobile units are permitted. Keep office clean and orderly.

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished and equipped to accommodate

materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be open

shelters or fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on site.

D. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas

adequate to support loads and to withstand exposure to traffic during construction period.

Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas.

Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for


1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved

areas.

2. Prepare sub-grade and install sub-base and base for temporary roads and paved areas

according to the geotechnical report.

3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, re-

grading, proof-rolling, compacting, and testing.




01 50 00 - 7

4. Delay installation of final course of permanent asphalt paving until immediately before

Substantial Completion. Repair asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final

course according to the geotechnical report.

5. Provide street cleaning service weeklyfor campus and city streets which access temporary

roads and paved areas.

E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections

for temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with

construction activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities.

Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining

property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide temporary

drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed.

3. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

F. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other Owner

required signs in sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform public and persons

seeking entrance to Project. Do not permit installation of company advertisements or

unauthorized signs.

1. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs.

Comply with details indicated.

2. Prepare signs to provide directional information to Owner's personnel, public, construction

personnel and visitors.

3. Construct signs of exterior-type Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood in

sizes and thickness indicated. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or

steel.

4. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior

primer.

G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Collect waste from construction operations daily. Do not hold waste

materials. Comply with NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris.

Enforce requirements strictly. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or

unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with 01 70 00 - Execution

Requirements.

1. Contractor will provide a waste-collection container of adequate capacity to handle waste

from construction and demolition operations and will coordinate its service schedule.

Contractor will be responsible for transporting all waste materials to designated waste-

collection container location in covered and enclosed carts along route approved by Owner.

2. See 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal for additional requirements.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct

construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that

minimize possible air, water-way, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable

effects. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints

from persons or firms near Project site.

B. Storm Water Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around

excavations and sub-grade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water

from heavy rains.

C. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line

of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree root system from damage

and erosion.




01 50 00 - 8

D. Site Enclosure Fence: When excavation begins, install chain-link or wood enclosure fence with

lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose entire Project site or portion

determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will

prevent entering site, except by entrance gates.

1. Set fence posts in compacted mixture of gravel and earth.

2. Provide gates in size and location necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and other


3. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized

personnel. Provide Owner with set of keys.

4. Provide site enclosure fence of one of the following:

a. Open-mesh, chain-link fencing system, 8-feet high with privacy screen mesh.

E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially

completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,

vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for

theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with installation and release

of material to minimize opportunity for theft and vandalism.

F. Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for

erecting structural barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to

inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed provide lighting,

including flashing red or amber lights.

1. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8-inch thick

exterior plywood.

G. Covered Walkway: Erect a structurally adequate, protective, covered walkway for passage of

persons adjacent to public street. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and

obstructions. Comply with regulations of the building code and authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide minimum clear dimensions of 5-foot wide and 7-foot high.

2. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing.

3. Provide waterproofed wood plank overhead decking, protective plywood enclosure walls,

hand rails, barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways and similar

provisions for protection and safe passage.

4. Extend back wall beyond structure to complete enclosure fence.

5. Paint and maintain in a manner approved by Owner.

6. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide a minimum 5/8-inch thick

exterior plywood.

H. Exterior Lighting: Install temporary exterior yard and sign lights so signs and Project site are

visible at night.

I. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities,

install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of types needed to protect against

reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for

Portable Fire Extinguishers," and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction,

Alterations and Demolition Operations." Comply with all of Owners “Hot Work” regulations,

when performing “Hot Work” activities.

1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible

from space being served, with sign mounted above.

a. All locations: Class ABC dry-chemical or a combination of NFPA-recommended

classes for exposures.

b. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose;

provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.

2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.




01 50 00 - 9

3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection

facilities, stairways, and other access routes for fire fighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous

fire exposure areas.

4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources

of fire ignition.

5. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for

personnel at Project site. Review needs with fire department and establish procedures to be

followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

6. Upon Owner’s request, install a temporary fire alarm pull station at each construction exit.

J. Impairment of Fire Detection, Alarm and communication Systems and/or Automatic Fire

Sprinkler Systems for more than 4 hours shall require the implementation of a “Fire Watch”.

Fire Watch shall be in accordance with NFPA 101 (2000 Edition) 9.6.1.8, 9.7.6.1 and 9.7.6.2

and also: NFPA 1 (2003 Edition), 3.390, 41.2.4 and 41.3.4. Fire Watch for Impairment shall be

performed by a UNMC employee who is trained in identifying and properly responding if fire

and/or smoke conditions are encountered. Notify UNMC Project Manager 24 hours prior to any

scheduled impairment.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and

abuse, limit availability of facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from

damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation

and similar facilities on a 24-hour day basis where required to achieve indicated results and

to avoid possibility of damage.

2. Protection: Prevent water filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground

lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available,

do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent

facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need of its service has ended,

when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial

Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been

delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged. Work, clean exposed

surfaces and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.

Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Remove temporary paving not intended or acceptable for integration into permanent paving.

Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that does

not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with oil,

asphalt, and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth

of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs and sidewalks at damaged

or altered areas, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction

period, including but not limited to following:

a. Replace air filters.

b. Clean inside of ductwork and housings.

c. Replace significantly worn parts and parts that have been subject to unusual operating

conditions.

d. Replace lamps that are burned out or noticeably dimmed by use.




01 50 00 - 10

3.6 POLLUTION CONTROLS:

A. Construction and Dust Control:

1. Contractor is responsible for dust control to include watering the site thoroughly and

continuously during site grading operations to prevent dust and dirt from rising and

blowing.

2. Provide necessary water lines and connection for this purpose.

3. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by construction

operations.

4. Provide filtration to adjacent air intake upon Owner’s request.

B. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of Work.

C. Maintain existing new/relocated pollutant discharge and sediment control systems.

3.7 TRAFFIC:

A. Conduct operations to ensure minimum interference with existing roads, walks, entrances, exits,

and other adjacent occupied facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct private drives, walks or other occupied or used facilities unless

approved in writing.

2. Do not close or obstruct public thoroughfares or walks unless approved by authorities

having jurisdiction.

3. Do not obstruct exits from existing facilities without approval of authorities having

jurisdiction.

4. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways.

B. Conduct construction operations to avoid interference with traffic accessing other UNMC and

Nebraska Medicine buildings.

END OF SECTION



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

01 60 00 - 1

SECTION 01 60 00


PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements; selection of

products for use in the Project; product delivery, storage, and handling, manufacturers’ standard

warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.


1. Section 01 23 00 - Alternates: for products selected under an alternate.

2. Section 01 42 00 - References: for applicable industry standards for products specified.

3. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures: for submitting warranties for contract closeout.

4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and

installations specified to be warranted.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporation into the Work, whether purchased for this Project or

taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms: "material,"

"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation, shown or listed in current edition of manufacturer's

published product literature, current as of date of Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or

facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless

stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new

products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process,

or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type,

function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other

characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

4. Foreign Products: As distinguished from "domestic products", are items substantially

manufactured (50 percent or more of value) outside United States and its possessions.

Products produced or supplied by entities substantially owned (more than 50 percent) by

persons who are not citizens of, nor living within, United States and its possessions are also

considered to be foreign products.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor after award of Contract.

1. Following are not considered requests for substitutions:

a. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by Owner or Architect.

b. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract

Documents.

c. Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders

issued by authorities having jurisdiction.

d. Substitutions requested during bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to

award of Contract, are included in Contract Documents.




01 60 00 - 2

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specifications: Where a specific manufacturer’s product is named and

accompanied by the words “basis of design,” including make or model number or other

designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service

performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of

evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

D. Materials: Products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or

otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.

E. Equipment: A product with operational parts, motorized or manually operated, that requires

service connections such as wiring or piping.

F. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for

a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

G. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents,

either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer’s warranty or to provide more rights for

Owner.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular form showing specified products. Include generic names

of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each

product.

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule.

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:

a. Specification Section number and title.

b. Generic name used in Contract Documents.

c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.

d. Manufacturer's name and address.

e. Supplier's name and address.

f. Installer's name and address.

g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.

h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date.

3. Initial Submittal: At Pre-Construction Conference, submit an electronic copy of initial

product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for known variations

from Contract requirements.

a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and

designations that must be established early in the Contract period.

4. Owner's Action: Owner will respond to Contractor within 14 days of receipt of completed

product list. Owner’s response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a

brief explanation of reasons for this action. No response within time period constitutes no

objections, but does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with

Contract Documents.

5. Completed List: With initial Application for Payment, submit an electronic copy of

completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for known

variations from Contract requirements.

B. Substitution Request: Owner and Architect may consider requests for substitution if received

before 21 days after date of Notice to Proceed. Requests received after 21 days shall be rejected.

1. Submit an electronic copy of each request for consideration. Submit requests in form and

according to procedures required for Change Order proposals.

2. Identify product, or fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request.

Include related Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.




01 60 00 - 3

3. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitution, and the following, as

applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other

parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that

will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the

Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as size, weight,

durability, performance, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and

installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.

f. List of similar installations for completed projects with projects names and addresses

and names and addresses of architects and owners.

g. Material test reports from qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated.

h. Research/Evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution

with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall contract Time. If

specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract

time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer’s letterhead, stating lack of

availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any in Contract Sum. Itemized

estimate of costs resulting directly or indirectly from acceptance of substitution

including redesign, license fee, royalties and claims of others affected by resulting

change. Waive all claims for additional costs which may subsequently become

apparent.

k. Certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract

Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.

l. Contractor's waver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated

results.

m. Statement that substitution carries same warranty, guarantee or bond as for product

specified.

n. Architect shall record time required for evaluating proposed substitution request.

Whether or not substitution is acceptable, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for charges

of Architect for evaluating proposed substitution request.

4. Owner's and Architect's Action: If necessary, Owner and Architect may request additional

information or documentation necessary for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request

for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed

substitution within 14 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional

information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order.

b. Use product specified if a decision cannot be made or obtained on use of proposed

substitution within time allocated.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1

Section. Show compliance with requirements.




01 60 00 - 4


A. Source Limitations: To fullest extent possible, provide products of same kind, from a single

source.

1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not, or cannot, produce a

quantity adequate to complete Project requirements in a timely manner, consult with

Architect and Owner to determine most important product qualities before proceeding.

Qualities may include attributes, such as visual appearance, strength, durability or

compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from sources

producing products that possess these qualities, to fullest extent possible.

B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously

selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible

with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible

products, Architect shall determine which products shall be used.

C. Foreign Product Limitations: Except under one or more of following conditions, provide

domestic products, not foreign products, for inclusion in the Work:

1. No available domestic product complies with Contract Documents.

2. Domestic products that comply with Contract Documents are available only at prices or

terms substantially higher than foreign products that comply with Contract Documents.

D. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint

manufacturers or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed to view surfaces of products.

1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surfaces or, where

required for observation after installation, on accessible surfaces that are not conspicuous.

2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or

power-operated equipment Locate on an easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in

occupied spaces. Nameplate shall contain following information and other essential

operating data:

a. Name of product and manufacturer.

b. Model and serial number.

c. Capacity.

d. Speed.

e. Ratings.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store and handle products according to manufacturer's recommendations, using means

and methods to prevent damage, deterioration, loss, and theft.

1. Schedule delivery to minimize storage at Project site and to prevent over-crowding of

construction spaces.

2. If requested in writing by the Owner the Contractor shall, within 10 days, furnish written

proof to the Architect and the Owner that needed materials are indeed on order, and thus

will not delay completion of the work as set forth in the Contract.

3. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that

are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other

losses.

4. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed

container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling,

storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.




01 60 00 - 5

5. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with Contract Documents, and ensure

that products are undamaged and properly protected.

6. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

7. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.

8. Store products subject to damage by the elements, above ground, under cover in a weather-

tight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

9. Comply with product manufacturer’s written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

10. Protect stored products from damage.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on

product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract

Documents.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and

identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval by Owner, before final

execution.

1. Manufacturer’s Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed.

2. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular

requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01800 - Closeout Procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with Contract Documents, that are

undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, safety guards, and

other items, devices, and details needed for a complete installation and for intended use and

effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully

in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with

requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term “as selected,” Architect will make selection.

5. Where products are accompanied by the term “match sample,” sample to be matched is

Owner’s.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications

establish “salient characteristics” of products.

7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term “or approved

Equal” or “or approved,” comply with provisions in “Comparable Products” Article to

obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.




01 60 00 - 6

B. Product Selection Procedures: Selection is governed by Contract Documents and governing

regulations. Procedures governing product selection include following:

1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Product” name a single

product and manufacturer, provide product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled

“Manufacturer” or “Source” name a single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by

the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Products” introduce a

list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that

complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Manufacturers”

introduce a list of manufacturers’ names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers

listed that complies with requirements.

5. Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available

Products” introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the

products listed or another product that complies with requirements. No substitutions will be

permitted.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled

“Available Manufacturers” introduce a list of manufacturers’ names, provide a product by

one of the manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements.

7. Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled “Product Options” indicate that size,

profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or

system, provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable product or

system by another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in “Product Substitutions”

Article.

8. Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-

of-Design Product” are included and also introduce or refer to a list of manufacturers’

names, provide either the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other

named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and

other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in

“Comparable Products” Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

9. Visual Matching Specifications: Where Specifications require matching an established

Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches

Owner's sample. Owner’s decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches

satisfactorily.

a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily or complies

with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of Contract Documents on

“substitutions” for selection of a matching product.

10. Visual Selection Specifications: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from

manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and

manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase “standard range of colors,

patterns, textures” or similar phrase, Owner will select color, pattern, or texture from

manufacturer’s product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase “full range of colors, patterns,

textures” or similar phrase, Owner will select color, pattern, or texture from

manufacturer’s product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Owner and Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 21 days

after the Notice to Proceed date. Requests received after that time shall be rejected.




01 60 00 - 7

B. Conditions: Owner and Architect will consider Contractor’s request for substitution when the

following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will

return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution:

a. Offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other

considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner’s

additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and

evaluation services, increased cost of other construction, and similar considerations.

b. Does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

c. Is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

d. Is fully documented and properly submitted.

e. Will not adversely affect Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

f. Has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.

g. Is compatible with other portions of the Work.

h. Has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

i. Provides specified warranty.

j. Involves more than one contractor and therefore requested substitutio0n has been

coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible

with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to

other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract

Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated

results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the

Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,

durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.

5. Samples, if requested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION



OFF-SITE STORED MATERIALS

01 66 00 - 1

SECTION 01 66 00


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for

approval of partial payments for certain materials stored off-site.

1.2 PRIOR APPROVAL

A. Contractor shall obtain Owner's approval before making any arrangements to obtain a Certificate

for Payment for Materials stored off-site. Materials shall be suitable for storage and be properly

packaged as necessary.

1.3 STORAGE SITE

A. Contractor shall furnish and maintain a suitable storage site, approved in advance by Owner.

1.4 STORAGE CONDITIONS

A. Material shall be stored above grade, properly protected at all times against weather, hot, cold,

moisture, and other hazards as material may require. All protection shall be provided by

Contractor, at his own expense, and maintained throughout storage period.

B. Material shall not be commingled with other similar material, but be stored by itself and plainly

labeled:

"Property of The Board of Regents of The University of Nebraska, UNMC, Omaha, Nebraska".


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 BILL OF SALE

A. Request for Certification for Partial Payment for materials stored off-site under approved

conditions shall be accompanied by a Bill of Sale, properly identifying material and transferring

ownership of materials to Owner.

B. Bill of Sale shall be accompanied with:

1. Inventory of stored material.

2. Description of storage site by street number and city, or by a legal description of the

premises.

3.2 INSURANCE

A. Contractor shall take out and maintain fire, all perils, theft, vandalism and extended coverage

insurance on off-site stored material and in-transit materials, in amount of 100% of value

thereof, under same conditions as for material stored on site of the project. Owner shall be

named beneficiary under the policy, as trustee for all concerned.




01 66 00 - 2

3.3 RESPONSIBILITY

A. Contractor agrees that, in accepting partial payment for off-site stored materials, Contractor is in

no way relieved of responsibility for safe storage of material and its safe transportation to, and

installation in, the Work, or for furnishing and installing materials in strict accordance with

Contract Documents.

B. Contractor agrees that acceptance by Owner of a Bill of Sale for Material does not imply

acceptance or rejection up until time Contractor's work is completed and finally accepted.

C. Contractor agrees that usual guarantees covering his work under Contract Documents are in no

way impaired as a result of partial payment and acceptance of the Bill of Sale.

3.4 SUPPLEMENTAL AGREEMENT

A. Before payments can be made on off-site stored materials, Contractor shall be required to

execute Supplemental Agreement Off-site Stored Material, see Section 00400 - Sample Forms.

END OF SECTION



EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

01 70 00 - 1

SECTION 01 70 00


PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.

2. Field engineering and surveying.

3. General installation of products.

4. Coordination of Owner-installed products

5. Progress cleaning.

6. Starting and adjusting.

7. Protection of installed construction.

8. Correction of the Work.


1. Section 01 31 00 - Coordination; for procedures for coordinating field engineering with

other construction activities.

2. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures; for submitting surveys.

3. Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching; for procedural requirements for cutting and

patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work.

4. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures; for submitting final property survey, with Project

Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels,

and final cleaning.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor or professional engineer certifying

location and elevation of Improvements comply with requirements.

B. Final Property Survey: Submit an electronic copy showing the Work performed and record

survey data.

C. Qualification Data: For Land surveyor and professional engineer to demonstrate their

capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and

addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. Surveyor Qualifications: Engage a land surveyor registered in State of Nebraska, to perform

services of the kind indicated.

B. Engineer Qualifications: Engage a professional engineer of discipline required, licensed in State

of Nebraska, to perform services of the kind indicated.




01 70 00 - 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: Existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and

verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction

affecting the Work.

B. Existing Utilities: Existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction

indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the

existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify location and points of connection of utility services.

2. Before construction, verify the invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer,

storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services.

3. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities

serving Project site.

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or

Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the

Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

a. Description of the Work.

b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.

c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.

d. Recommended corrections.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing

finishes or primers.

3. Examine rough-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment and fixture installation.

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to

be installed.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected or as

directed by Owner. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and

conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to

adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility

appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide

temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than 14 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s written permission.




01 70 00 - 3

C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work indicated to fit to

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before

fabrication and coordinate with appropriate trades. Coordinate fabrication schedule with

construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

D. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.

E. Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for

clarification of contract Documents, submit a request for information (RFI) to Architect. Include

a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the

Contract Documents. Identify cost and schedule impact with RFI submission.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on

Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are

discovered, notify Architect and Owner promptly in writing.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish bench marks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction

and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required

dimensions.

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.

4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work Progresses.

5. Notify Architect and Owner when deviations from required lines and levels exceed

allowable tolerances.

6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by

authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and

topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building

foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and

electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.

Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and

levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and

duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make log available

for reference by Architect and Owner.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference

points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control

points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written

approval of Architect and Owner. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control

points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to

Architect and Owner before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base

replacements on the original survey control points.




01 70 00 - 4

B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks on Project site,

referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having

jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record

Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary

reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction

to its original condition.

C. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real

property) for Project. Include on survey a certification, signed by surveyor, that principal metes,

bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on survey.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and

elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations for installing products in

applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.

Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component

securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights

directed by Architect and Owner.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and construction.

G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,

arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered

hazardous.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress

cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements

strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NPFA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and

debris.

2. Do not hold materials more than one day.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark

containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.




01 70 00 - 5

C. Work areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for

proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire

work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials

specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning

materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from

damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.

Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.

1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other

finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing

waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining

materials already in place. Supply protective covering where required ensuring protection from

damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure

operability without damaging effects.

K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction

completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious

exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning

units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper

operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer’s Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect

field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with requirements in Section

01400 – Quality Requirements.

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.




01 70 00 - 6

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

Comply with requirements in Section 01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching.

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up

with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired

without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that

cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces and other

materials.

END OF SECTION



CUTTING AND PATCHING

01 73 29 - 1

SECTION 01 73 29


PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.


1. Section 02 41 00 - Demolition; demolition of selected portions of building for alterations

2. Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to

cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

a. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. See

Division 26 and Division 27 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable

to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of

other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after

installation of other Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 14 days before

the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval by Owner before

proceeding.

1. Include following information, as applicable, in proposal:

a. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, how they will be performed, and indicate why

they cannot be avoided.

b. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's

appearance and other significant visual elements.

c. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work.

d. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.

e. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List

utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate

how long service will be disrupted.

f. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to

structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of

reinforcement with original structure.

g. Owner’s Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and

patching. Approval to proceed does not waive Owner's right to later require complete

removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.




01 73 29 - 2


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change

their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

1. Submit a proposal to obtain approval before cutting and patching following structural

elements:

a. Foundation construction.

b. Bearing and retaining walls.

c. Structural concrete.

d. Structural steel.

e. Lintels.

f. Miscellaneous structural metals.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related

components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that

results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

1. Submit a proposal to obtain approval before cutting and patching following operating

elements:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment.

b. Air or smoke barriers.

c. Fire protection and alarm systems.

d. Control systems.

e. Communication systems.

f. Conveying systems.

g. Electrical wiring systems.

h. Medical Gas systems.

i. Domestic hot and cold water systems.

j. Chilled water systems.

k. Steam systems.

l. Telecommunication systems.

m. Computer conduit/wiring systems.

n. R.O. water systems.

2. Operational systems requiring shut-down or shut-off shall be formally identified 14 days

prior to the start of work; additionally, have Contractor and Owner's Representative present

at time of actual scheduled shut-down of shut-off.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a

manner that could change their load-carrying capacity that results in reducing their capacity to

perform as intended, or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or

safety.

1. Submit a proposal to obtain approval before cutting and patching following operating

elements:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

b. Membranes and flashings.

c. Exterior curtain-wall construction.

d. Equipment supports.

e. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.

f. Noise and vibration control elements and systems.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: All surfaces affected by cutting and patching activities are to be removed,

repaired, or replaced in such a manner that maintains product warranty; methods of removal,

repair, or replacement that void product warranties will not be accepted. OR Maintain existing

warranties in all cases.




01 73 29 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use

materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,

will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. Architect and

Owner approval of said materials are mandatory; provide mock up if required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be

performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,

including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide

protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during

cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage

to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned,

bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and

patching at earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of

other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original

condition.

B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or

adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply

with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,

not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size

required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings

when not in use.

2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from exposed or finished side into concealed

surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as: “Carborundum” saw or a

“diamond-core” drill.




01 73 29 - 4

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections

where required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent

entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

7. Work may be suspended due to noise, vibration, dust, safety concerns, quality concerns, or

convenience, at Owner’s discretion. Work will recommence at Owner’s direction.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations

following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as

possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Sections of these Specifications.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate

integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration

into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and

refinishing.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into

another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in new space. Provide an even surface of

uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings

and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats

over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the

patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane

surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a

weather-tight condition.

END OF SECTION


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

01 74 19 - 1

SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible.

B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor

planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.

C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as

economically feasible.

D. Owner may decide to pay for additional recycling, salvage, and/or reuse based on Landfill

Alternatives Proposal specified below.

E. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or

by incineration:

1. Aluminum and plastic.

2. Corrugated cardboard.

3. Wood pallets.

4. Clean dimensional wood.

5. Land clearing debris, including brush, branches, logs, and stumps; see Section 31 10 00 -

Site Clearing for use options.

6. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping,

reinforcing bars, door frames, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel, stainless

steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze.

7. Glass.

8. Gypsum drywall and plaster.

9. Carpet, carpet cushion, carpet tile, and carpet remnants, both new and removed: DuPont

(http://flooring.dupont.com) and Interface (www.interfaceinc.com) conduct reclamation

programs.

10. Fluorescent lamps (light bulbs).

11. Acoustical ceiling tile and panels.

F. Contractor shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports; all landfill disposal, recycling,

salvage, and reuse must be reported; use the same units of measure on all reports.

G. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are:

1. Burning on the project site.

2. Burying on the project site.

3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private.

4. Other illegal dumping or burying.

5. Incineration, either on- or off-site.

H. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory

requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to

legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like.

B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials,

packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and

demolition operations.



01 74 19 - 2

C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity,

toxicity or reactivity.

D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility,

corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity.

E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of

exposure.

F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and

remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others.

G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into

a new product for reuse by others.

H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other

discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include

burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste.

I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.

J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site.

K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by

others.

L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well

production run-off water.

M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning

from the first time they become waste.

N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure.

O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged.

P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended

use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Submit Waste Management Plan within 10 calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award of

Bid, or prior to any trash or waste removal, whichever occurs sooner; submit projection of all

trash and waste that will require disposal and alternatives to landfilling.

C. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and

waste, means of disposal or reuse; show both totals to date and since last report.

1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit

Report will delay payment.

2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner.

3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information:

a. Identification of material.

b. Amount, in tons, of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in landfills.

c. State the identity of landfills.

d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity.

4. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each:

a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other

projects.

b. Amount, in tons yards date removed from the project site, and receiving party.

c. Include manifests, weight tickets and receipts as evidence of quantity.

d. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by

incineration.



01 74 19 - 3

5. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each:

a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project.

6. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as

appropriate to disposal method.

PART 2 - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

A. See Contract Drawings for list of items to be salvaged from the existing building for relocation

in project or for Owner.

B. See Section 01 33 00 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal

procedures, and project documentation.

C. See Section 01 50 00 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal

facilities and services.

D. See Section 01 60 00 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and

handling.

E. See Section 01 70 00 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and

patching, installation, protection, and cleaning.

3.2 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and

overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan.

B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each

subcontractor, Owner, and Architect.

C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling,

salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the

project.

D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings.

1. Prebid meeting.

2. Preconstruction meeting.

3. Regular job-site meetings.

4. Job safety meetings.

E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling,

salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers.

1. As a minimum, provide:

a. Separate area for storage of materials to be reused on-site, such as wood cut-offs for

blocking.

b. Recycling bins at worker lunch area.

2. Provide containers as required.

3. Provide temporary enclosures around piles of separated materials to be recycled or salvaged.

4. Locate enclosures out of the way of construction traffic.

5. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors.

6. If an enclosed area is not provided, clearly lay out and label a specific area on-site.

7. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to

avoid contamination of materials.

F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable

regulations.



01 74 19 - 4

G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in

order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified

materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to

prevent contamination of recyclable materials.

H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for

reuse.

I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site.

END OF SECTION



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01 77 00 - 1

SECTION 01 77 00

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including

but not limited to:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Warranties.

3. Final cleaning.


1. Section 01 29 00 - Payment Procedures: for requirements for Applications for Payment for

Substantial and Final Completion.

2. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: for progress cleaning of Project site.

3. Section 01 78 23 - Operating and Maintenance Data: for operating and maintenance manual

requirements and training of Owner’s personnel.

4. Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents: for requirements and submittal of Record

Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for

products of those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial

Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (Punch List), the value of items on the

list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents.

4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, and

similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items to location designated by Owner.

Label with manufacturer’s name and model number where applicable.

7. Return Identification badges to Owner as required.

8. Make final changeover of permanent locks and keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel

of changeover in security provisions.

9. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of Owner's operating and maintenance

personnel.

10. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

11. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with construction tools,

mock-ups, and similar elements.

12. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01 77 00 - 2

13. Submit changeover information related to Owner’s occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

14. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touch-up painting.

15. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of

request, Architect and Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of

unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion following

inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor’s list or additional items

identified by Architect and Owner, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be

issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is corrected or completed.

2. Results of completed inspection will form basis of requirements for Final Completion.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final

Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit final Application for Payment according to Section 01 29 00 – Payment Procedures.

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be

completed or corrected (Punch List), endorsed and dated by Architect and Owner. Certified

copy of list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for

acceptance.

3. Submit consent of surety to final payment.

4. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements.

5. Submit completed and properly executed affidavit forms.

6. Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems.

7. Submit GPO Completion form according to Section 00 90 00 – Group Purchasing

Agreement.

B. Final Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of

request, Architect and Owner will proceed with re inspection, including inspection list items

from earlier inspections. Owner will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or

will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will

be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is corrected or completed.

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area

affected by construction operations for incomplete items needing correction including, if

necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding

from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project Name.

b. Date.

c. Name of Contractor.

d. Page number.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01 77 00 - 3

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Warranty all building components (including all mechanical and electrical systems) shall be

provided with a minimum 1 year warranty. Specific components may have longer warranty

periods. Warranty shall be unconditional and include material, labor and response within 24

hours of notification.

B. For roof warranty requirements, see Division 7.

C. Warranty periods: In general to commence from point of substantial completion rather than date

of final installation, unless otherwise approved

D. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Owner for designated portions of the

Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is

indicated.

E. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 14 days of completion of

designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during

construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

F. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the

Project Manual.

1. Provide Warranty data in searchable, tabbed .pdf format.

G. Include each warranty with operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator

of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health

or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with

local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and

maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Complete following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of

Certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other

foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other

foreign deposits.

Rake ground that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

c. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01 77 00 - 4

d. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass. Remove glazing compound

and other substances that are vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken

glass and other damaged transparent materials.

e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free

of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their

original reflective condition.

f. Leave concrete floors broom clean.

g. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and

other substances.

h. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition.

i. Clean light fixtures, lamps, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

j. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced exterminator to make a final inspection, and rid the Project

of rodents, insects and other pests.

D. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the

Work during construction.

E. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for

cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's

property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems.

Remove waste materials and dispose of in a lawful manner.

END OF SECTION


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package OPERATON AND MAINTENANCE DATA

01 78 23 - 1

SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATON AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General conditions and other Division 1


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and

maintenance manuals and schedules, including the following:

1. Preparation and submittal of operating and maintenance manuals for building operating

systems or equipment.

2. Preparation and submittal of instruction manuals covering preservation, care and

maintenance of architectural products and finishes.

3. Preparation of a schedule and instruction of Owner's operating personnel in operation and

maintenance of building systems and equipment.


1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: for submitting copies of submittals for operation

and maintenance manuals.

2. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures: for submitting operations and maintenance

manuals.

3. Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents: for preparing Record Drawings for operation

and maintenance manuals.

4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual

requirements for products in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular

interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Maintenance Manual Preparation: Use personnel trained and experienced in operation and

maintenance of equipment or system involved.

1. For written instructions, use personnel skilled in technical writing, as necessary for

communication of essential data.

2. For Drawings or diagrams, use draftsperson to prepare Drawings clearly in an

understandable format.

B. Instruction of Owner's Personnel: Use experienced instructors trained and experienced in

operation and maintenance of equipment or system involved.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Draft Submittal: Submit a draft copy of each manual at least 15 days before requesting

inspection for Substantial Completion. Submit copies to both the Architect and Owner for

review and comment. All submissions shall be electronic in a searchable, tab-divided .pdf

format. Include a complete index or table of contents of each manual.

1. Architect will return draft with Architect and Owner review comments and will mark

whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. This copy will be returned to

Contractor within 15 days of receipt.



01 78 23 - 2

B. Final Submittal:

1. Before Final Inspection: Submit an electronic copy of each manual in final form, to Owner,

at least 15 days before final inspection. Owner will return this copy with comments within

7 days after final inspection.

2. After Final Inspection: Make corrections or modify each manual to comply with Owner’s

comments. Submit each corrected manual, to Owner, within 15 days of receipt of Owner’s

comments.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more

than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information

furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into separate sections for each

system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Each manual shall contain following materials, in the order listed:

a. Title page.

b. Table of contents

c. Manual contents

B. Title Page:

1. Provide following information:

a. Subject matter covered by manual.

b. Name and address of the Project.

c. Date of submittal.

d. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.

e. Name and address of Architect.

f. Cross reference to related systems in other volumes of operating and maintenance

manuals.

C. Table of Contents: After Title Page, include a typewritten table of contents for each volume,

arranged systematically according to Project Manual format. Include a list of each product

included, identified by product name or other appropriate identifying symbol and indexed to

content of the volume.

D. Manual Contents: Arrange contents in accordance with the Table of Contents of the Project

Specifications by system, subsystem, and equipment. Assemble instructions for subsystems,

equipment, and components of one system into a single document.

1. Submit an electronic copy in a tabbed, searchable .pdf format.

2.2 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual

Specification Sections.

1. Include the following information:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

b. Operating standards.

c. Operating procedures.

d. Operating logs.

e. Wiring diagrams.

f. Control diagrams.

g. Piped system diagrams.

h. Precautions against improper use.

i. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.



01 78 23 - 3

B. Descriptions:

1. Include the following:

a. Product name and model number.

b. Manufacturer’s name.

c. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.

d. Equipment function.

e. Operating characteristics.

f. Limiting conditions.

g. Performance curves.

h. Engineering data and tests.

i. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures:

1. Include the following, as applicable.

a. Startup procedures.

b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

c. Routine and normal operating instructions.

d. Regulation and control procedures.

e. Instructions on stopping.

f. Normal shutdown instructions.

g. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

h. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

i. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as

installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for

identification.

F. Coordination Drawings: Provide Contractor's Coordination Drawings. Provide as-installed

color-coded piping diagrams, where required for identification.

G. Valve Tags: Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve.

H. Circuit Directories: For electric and electronic systems, provide complete circuit directories of

panelboards.

1. Include the following:

a. Electric service.

b. Controls.

c. Communication.

2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include

source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair parts and sources, and

warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and

arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and

telephone number or Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference

Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information:

1. Include following, as applicable:

a. Product name and model number.

b. Manufacturer's name.

c. Material and chemical composition.

d. Color, pattern, and texture.

e. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.



01 78 23 - 4

D. Maintenance Procedures:

1. Include manufacturer’s written recommendations and the following:

a. Inspection procedures.

b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

d. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.

e. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and

related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND SCHEDULE

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include

source information, manufacturers’ maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,

maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service

contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in the

manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each

product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance

service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers’ Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers’ maintenance documentation

including following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and

component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures:

1. Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

a. Test and inspection instructions.

b. Troubleshooting guide.

c. Precautions against improper maintenance.

d. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions.

e. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

f. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of

required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedule using Owner’s template for preventive

and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Indicate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly,

semiannual, and annual frequencies.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts

identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers’ maintenance documentation and local sources

of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and

telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.



01 78 23 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and

maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment

not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for

each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional

manual for use by Owner’s operating personnel.

C. Manufacturer's Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers’ standard printed data, include only

sheets pertinent to product or component incorporated into the Work. Mark each sheet to

identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. Where more than one item is

included, identify each item using appropriate references from Contract Documents. Identify

only data or items that are applicable to the Work and delete (clearly mark-out) references to

information not applicable.

1. Supplementary Text: If manufacturer's standard printed data is not available and where the

information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems, or

it is necessary to provide additional information, prepare written text to provide information.

a. Organize in a consistent format with separate headings for different procedures and in a

logical sequence of instruction for operating or maintenance procedure.

D. Drawings: Provide specially prepared drawings to supplement manufacturer's printed data to

illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment or systems, or to illustrate control

sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record

Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance

manuals.

E. Draft submittals shall be provided 60 days prior to Substantial Completion for Owner review

and coordination.

F. Final submittals shall be provided 30 days prior to Substantial Completion to allow Owner

sufficient time to initiate regulatory required elements of long-term maintenance.

3.2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, systems, and subsystems. Provide instruction at mutually agreed upon place and

time before Final Inspection.

1. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction during other

seasons.

2. Schedule training with Owner with not less than 14 days’ advance notice.

3. Coordinate instructor, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction,

and course content.

4. Provide video recording of training sessions.

B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for

each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification

Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline.

1. Include instruction for the following:

a. System design and operational philosophy.

b. Review of documentation.

c. Operations.

d. Adjustments.



01 78 23 - 6

e. Troubleshooting.

f. Emergency procedures.

g. Maintenance.

h. Repair.

END OF SECTION



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

01 78 39 - 1

SECTION 01 78 39


PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record

Documents.

1. Project Record Documents required include:

a. Marked-up copies of Contract Drawings.

b. Marked-up copies of Shop Drawings.

c. Marked-up copies of Specifications, Addenda and Change Orders.

d. Marked-up Product Data submittals.

e. Record Samples.

f. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.

g. Record information on Work that is recorded only schematically.


1. Section 01 77 00 - Contract Closeout: for general closeout procedures.

2. Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data: for operation and maintenance manual

requirements.

3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project record Documents of

products in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: Contractor to submit 1 set of marked-up Record Prints to Architect.

Architect shall initial and date each print and mark whether general scope of changes,

additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. Architect shall

use marked-up Record Prints to make corrected Record CAD Drawings. Architect shall

return approved marked-up Record Prints to Contractor for final submittal.

b. Final Submittal: Submit 1 set of marked-up Record Prints and Architect shall submit 1

set of Record CAD Drawing files.

1) Electronic Media: USB Flash Drive or other Owner approved data storage device.

B. Record Project Manual: Submit 1 copy of Project’s Project Manual, including addenda and

contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit 1 copy of each Product Data submittal.

1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,

submit marked-up Product data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as record

Product Data.




01 78 39 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Copies: Maintain one set of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show actual installation where installation varies from

that shown originally.

a. Give attention to information on concealed elements which would be difficult to

identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before

enclosing concealed installations.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.

c. Depths of foundations below the first floor.

d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.

e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.

f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.

g. Actual equipment locations.

h. Duct size and routing.

i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.

j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.

k. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

3. Mark completely and accurately Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most

capable of showing actual physical conditions. If Shop Drawings are marked, show

cross-reference on Contract Drawings.

4. Mark record sets with colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the

Work at the same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from

original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers,

and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation “PROJECT RECORD

DRAWING” in a prominent location on the cover sheet.

2.2 RECORD PROJECT MANUAL

A. Preparation: Mark Project Manual to indicate actual product installation where installation varies

from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Note related Project Record Drawing information, where applicable.

2. Give particular attention to selection of product options, substitutions, and information on

concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

3. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of the products, materials, and

equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

4. Record name of manufacturer, supplier, installer, and other information necessary to

provide a record of selections made.

5. For each principal product specified, indicate whether Record Product Data has been

submitted in maintenance manual instead of submitted as Record Product Data.

6. Note related Change Orders, record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable.




01 78 39 - 3

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate actual product installation where installation varies

from that indicated in Product Data submitted.

1. Include significant changes in product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation.

2. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot

be readily identified and recorded later.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, where applicable.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping requirements and

submittals in connection with various construction activities. Immediately before Substantial

Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, identify each, and file,

ready for continued use and reference.

1. Categories of requirements resulting in miscellaneous records include, but are not limited to

following:

a. Field records on excavations and foundations.

b. Field records on underground construction and similar Work.

c. Survey showing locations and elevations of underground lines.

d. Invert elevations of drainage piping.

e. Surveys establishing building lines and levels.

f. Batch mixing and bulk delivery records.

g. Testing and qualification of tradesmen.

h. Documented qualification of installation firms.

i. Load and performance testing.

j. Inspections and certifications by governing authorities.

k. Leakage and water-penetration tests.

l. Fire resistance and flame spread test results.

m. Final inspection and correction procedures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING

A. General: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record

Document purposes.

B. Recording: Post changes and modifications to the Documents as they occur. Do not wait until

the end of the Project. Architect will periodically review record documents to assure compliance

with this requirement.

3.2 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance of Record Documents: Keep Record Documents and Samples in the field office

apart from Contract Documents used for construction.

1. Do not permit use for construction purposes.

2. Maintain in good order, and condition.

3. Protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location or remote electronic

backup.

4. Provide access for reference and inspection by Architect or Owner during normal working

hours.




01 78 39 - 4

END OF SECTION

D I V I S I O N 0 2

EXISTING CONDITIONS


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package DEMOLITION

02 41 00 - 1

SECTION 02 41 00

DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Demolition, as indicated, in

accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.

B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.


A. Conduct work in accordance with OSHA and EPA requirements.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 241 Standards for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition

Operations.

C. Design, engineering, and construction of shoring, bracing and supports are responsibility of

Contractor.

1. Employ a Registered Engineer, licensed to practice structural engineering in state in which

project is located.

2. Design to support dead, live, and lateral, wind or seismic loads required by code or as

otherwise indicated, along with construction loads during demolition until permanent

construction is in place.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Includes:

1. Abatement of hazardous materials within existing structures.

2. Demolition of designated structures.

3. Relocation and demolition of existing utilities.

4. Removal of demolition debris.

5. Protection of construction to remain, including:

a. Utilities.

b. Other items indicated.

6. Rough grading.

7. Salvage of items indicated.

B. Condition of Existing Structures to be demolished:

1. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of structures to be demolished.

2. Owner will maintain building conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes

insofar as practicable.

3. Reference Appendix A – Hazardous Materials Report for quantities and locations of

hazardous materials to be abated prior to demolition of existing structures.

C. Standpipes:

1. Maintain in operable condition and available for use by fire department.

2. Do not demolish standpipe more than one floor below floor being demolished.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Perform preliminary investigations to ascertain extent of work.

1. Conditions apparent by investigation shall not be allowed as claim for extra cost.

B. Obtain and pay for permits required by authorities having jurisdiction and notify interested

utilities companies prior to commencement of activities.



02 41 00 - 2

C. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction for work affecting existing means of egress.

1. Review with and obtain approval of authorities for temporary construction which affects

such areas.

2. Obtain approval of fire authorities.

D. Separate, store and dispose of hazardous materials and toxic wastes in accordance with local and

EPA regulations and criteria listed below:

1. Disposal of fluorescent light tubes in open containers is not permitted.

2. Disposal of ballasts and other building elements containing PCBs in open containers is not

permitted.

3. Disposal of building elements containing mercury in open containers is not permitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL DEMOLITION PROCEDURES

A. Items Designated for Re-use:

1. Remove, tag, protect from damage, store and deliver to locations designated.

2. Brace motors attached to flexible mountings until reinstallation.

B. Demolition of Structures:

1. Demolish completely and remove from site.

2. Use such methods as required to complete work within limitations of governing regulations.

3. Coordinate with Owner and utility suppliers for shut-off of utilities serving each building.

4. Disconnect and seal utilities before commencement of demolition.

C. Structural Demolition:

1. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections.

2. Perform removal to avoid excessive loads on supporting walls, floors or framing.

3. Proceed in systematic manner, from top of structure to grade.

4. Complete demolition work above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members

on lower levels.

5. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by means of hoists, derricks, or

other suitable method.

D. Existing Utilities to Remain.

1. Keep in service and protect against damage during demolition.

2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or facilities in use, except as authorized

by Owner.

3. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner.

E. Conduct operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, walks, entrances, exits, and

adjacent facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct private drives, walks or other facilities unless approved in writing.

2. Do not close or obstruct exits from existing facilities or obstruct public thoroughfares and

walks without approval of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways.

F. Provide covered passageways to ensure safe passage of persons in or near areas of work.

G. Provide barricades and safety lights as required.



02 41 00 - 3

3.2 PROTECTION OF FACILITIES TO REMAIN

A. Protect Property to Remain:

1. Conduct operations to prevent damage by falling debris or other cause to adjacent buildings,

structures, and other facilities as well as persons.

2. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement

or collapse of structures.

B. Protect occupants from injury and discomfort.

C. Provide temporary dustproof partitions between demolition areas and occupied areas.

1. In public areas use clean, painted 1/2 IN thick plywood.

2. Utilize fire rated construction where required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction,.

D. Provide temporary weather protection and insulation to prevent damage to existing facilities and

discomfort to persons in occupied areas.

1. Insulation value: R-19.

3.3 ITEMS SALVAGED FOR OWNER

A. Remove salvage items at appropriate stage of demolition, but early enough to prevent damage to

them by demolition operations:

1. Coordinate with Owner items Owner wishes to save.

B. Remove salvage items as a unit:

1. Clean, list, and tag for storage.

2. Protect from damage.

3. Salvage each item with auxiliary or associated equipment required for operation.

4. Store in building designated by Owner.

3.4 ITEMS SALVAGED FOR CONTRACTOR

A. Items of salvage value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses.

B. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed.

C. Storage or sale of removed items not permitted on site.

3.5 CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL OF DEMOLITION MATERIALS

A. Remove debris, rubbish, and materials resulting from demolition operations.

1. Remove and legally dispose of off-site.

2. Do not burn materials on site.

B. Dispose of items and materials not designated for Owner salvage or reuse.

1. Promptly remove from site.

2. Do not store or sell Contractor salvaged items or materials on site.

C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition

operations.

D. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of work.

END OF SECTION

D I V I S I O N 0 3

CONCRETE


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package CONCRETE REINFORCING

03 20 00 - 1

SECTION 03 20 00

CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Concrete Reinforcing, as indicated,

in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.



A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. ACI 315 Details and Detailing Concrete Reinforcement.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. For each type of material and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Shop drawings indicating size, number, dimensions and locations of reinforcing steel and

accessories, in sufficient detail to permit installation of reinforcing without reference to

Contract drawings.

a. Details of concrete reinforcement and accessories not indicated on Contract Documents

shall be in accordance with ACI 315.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Epoxy Adhesive for Anchoring Reinforcing:

1. Base:

a. HIT System by Hilti.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General Reinforcing:

1. Conform to ASTM A615, Grade-60.

B. Epoxy Anchored Reinforcing:

1. Install reinforcing anchored in concrete with epoxy adhesive, in accordance with epoxy

manufacturer’s instructions.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Bars for Concrete Reinforcement:

1. Sheared length: Plus or minus 1 IN.

2. Depth of truss bars: Plus 0, minus 1/2 IN.

3. Overall dimensions of stirrups, ties, and spirals: Plus or minus 1/2 IN.

4. Other bends: Plus or minus 1 IN.


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package CONCRETE REINFORCING

03 20 00 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. Provide minimum concrete covering for reinforcement as follows:

1. Concrete deposited against earth: 3 IN.

2. Formed surfaces exposed to weather or in contact with earth:

a. 2 IN for reinforcing bars No.6 or larger.

b. 1-1/2 IN for reinforcing bars less than No.6.

3. Interior surfaces:

a. 1-1/2 IN for beams, girders, and columns.

b. 3/4 IN for slabs, walls and joists with No.11 bars or smaller, and 1-1/2 IN with No.14

and No.18 bars.

B. Place bars to following tolerances:

1. Clear distance to formed surfaces: Plus or minus 1/4 IN.

2. Minimum spacing between bars: Minus 1/4 IN.

3. Top bars in slabs and beams:

a. Members 8 IN deep or less: Plus or minus 1/4 IN.

b. Members between 8 and 24 IN deep: Plus/minus 1/2 IN.

c. Members more than 2 FT deep: Plus or minus 1 IN.

4. Crosswise of members: Spaced evenly within 2 IN.

5. Lengthwise of members: Plus or minus 2 IN.

C. Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or

embedded items.

1. If moved more than one bar diameter, or enough to exceed above tolerances, resulting

arrangement of bars subject to approval.

D. Assure that reinforcement, at time concrete is placed, is free of materials that may adversely

affect or reduce bond.

1. Reinforcement with rust, mill scale or a combination of both is acceptable provided

dimensions and weights, including heights of deformations, of a cleaned sample is not less

than required by ASTM.

E. Support reinforcement and fasten together to prevent displacement by construction loads or

placing of concrete beyond tolerances indicated.

1. On ground, provide supporting concrete blocks or other approved method.

2. Over formwork, use concrete, metal, plastic or other approved bar chairs and spacers.

3. Where concrete surface will be exposed to weather in finished structure, furnish accessories

within 1/2 IN of concrete surface of non-corrosive material or protect against corrosion.

F. Overlap welded wire reinforcement not less than spacing of cross wires plus 2 IN.

1. Unless shown otherwise, support welded wire reinforcement by methods of Paragraph E,

above.

G. Offset vertical bars in columns at least one bar diameter at lapped splices to ensure proper

placement, furnish templates for column vertical bars and dowels.

H. Splices not specifically indicated shall be subject to approval.

I. Unless permitted by Architect, do not bend reinforcement after embedding in hardened concrete.

J. Unless permitted by Architect, do not tack weld reinforcing.

END OF SECTION

D I V I S I O N 0 4

MASONRY


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package COLD AND HOT WEATHER MASONRY PROCEDURES

04 05 05 - 1

SECTION 04 05 05 COLD AND HOT WEATHER MASONRY PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Cold and Hot Weather Masonry

Procedures, as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.



A. International Building Code, Chapter 21: Masonry.

B. Local Building Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. As required to achieve desired results.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROCEDURES

A. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602: Specification for Masonry Structures.

B. Brick Industry Association (BIA), Technical Note 1: Hot and Cold Weather Construction

C. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA), TEK 03-01C: All Weather Concrete

Masonry Construction.

3.2 GENERAL

A. At end of each day or at shutdown, cover tops of walls not enclosed or sheltered.

B. Do not use frozen or ice coated materials.

C. Remove and replace frozen or damaged masonry to satisfaction of Architect.

3.3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Construct and maintain temporary protection required to permit continuous and orderly progress

of work.

B. Provide temperature conditioning sufficient for indicated temperatures.

C. Provide sufficient temporary lighting to permit work to be correctly performed.

END OF SECTION


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package MASONRY CLEANING

04 05 10 - 1

SECTION 04 05 10

MASONRY CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Masonry Cleaning in accordance

with provisions of Contract Documents.


1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:


B. Project Information:

1. Name of proposed product and manufacturer.

2. Certification that the proposed products are compatible with materials on subject project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Cleaners:

1. Base:

a. ProSoCo.

2. Optional:

a. EaCo Chem.

B. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 01 33 00.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Use only products which are recommended by manufacturer of material to be cleaned.

B. Concrete Masonry (CMU) Cleaners:

1. Clean CMU which will remain exposed to view (including CMU walls which are scheduled

for painting).

2. Lightweight and Normal Weight CMU:

a. Base Product: Sure Klean Custom Masonry Cleaner by ProSoCo.

C. Cast-in-Place Concrete Cleaner:

1. Clean Cast-in-Place concrete walls which will remain exposed to view (including CIP walls

which are scheduled for painting).

2. Clean with most effective products which are appropriate for texture and color specified.

3. Abrasive blasted, Etched, and Exposed-aggregate Textures:

a. Base Product: Sure Klean Custom Masonry Cleaner or Heavy-duty Concrete Cleaner

both by ProSoCo.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces to be cleaned.

1. If necessary point with mortar.


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package MASONRY CLEANING

04 05 10 - 2

B. Waiting Time before cleaning:

1. Mortar Type N: Allow mortar to cure for 14 to 28 days prior to cleaning.

2. Mortar Types M and S: Allow mortar to cure for 7 to 14 days prior to cleaning.

3. Colored Mortar: Allow mortar to cure for 28 days prior to cleaning.

C. Remove excess mortar using wooden paddles and scrapers.

D. Do not proceed with cleaning until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

E. Test 4 x 4 FT 1.2 x 1.2 M area of each surface type for compatibility with cleaner, using

recommended dilutions, prior to full scale cleaning operations.

F. Cleaning indicates acceptance of surfaces and responsibility for performance.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces, not scheduled for cleaning.

B. Prepare surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Do not use wire brushes.

C. Thoroughly rinse and pre-soak walls.

D. Flush loose mortar and dirt from surface.

E. Wet to prevent runoff streaking.

F. Apply solution using fibered wall washing brush or low-pressure spray.

1. Maximum Pressure: not to exceed 400 PSI 2,750 kPa.

2. Tip spray angle: Not less than 25 DEG.

3. Maximum rate of flow: 4 to 6 GPM 15 to 23 LPM.

4. Tip shall be held at least 12 IN 300 MM from surface of masonry.

5. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations, where more restrictive.

G. Scrape off mortar and re-apply cleaning solution.

H. After scrubbing, clean thoroughly with low pressure water.

1. Comply with low-pressure spray criteria listed above.

END OF SECTION


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package MASONRY GROUTING

04 05 16 - 1

SECTION 04 05 16

MASONRY GROUTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Portland Cement - Lime Mortars and

Grout, as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.



A. Definitions:

1. PCL Mortar: Portland Cement-Lime Mortar.

2. PCL Grout: Portland Cement-Lime Grout.

3. Pre-Blended: Factory blend mortar mix dry ingredients including; sand, cement, lime,

pigments, and approved additives.

B. Referenced Standards:

1. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. ASTM C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.

b. ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

c. ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

d. ASTM C207 Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.

e. ASTM C270 Specification for Unit Masonry.

f. ASTM C404 Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.

g. ASTM C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.

2. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

a. ACI 530.1 Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures.

3. Brick Industry Association (BIA):

a. Technical Notes.

C. Use of masonry cement alone, or in combination with PCL mixes, is prohibited.

D. The use of blended hydraulic cements, including: Portland blast-furnace slag cement, Portland-

pozzolan cement, slag cement, and natural cement is not permitted.

E. Cold Weather Procedures:

1. Specified in Section 04 05 05.

F. Hot Weather Procedures:

1. When ambient temperature is over 100 DEGF 38 DEGC, or over 90 DEGF 32 DEGC with a

wind over 8 MPH 13 kph:

a. Monitor mortar temperature and maintain it between 70 to 120 DEGF 21 to 49 DEGC.

b. Limit spreading of bed mortar to 4 FT 1.2 M, maximum, and place masonry units

within 1 minute of spreading.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Material certificates for each material used in proposed mix designs.



04 05 16 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Factory Pre-blended PCL Mortar:

1. Base:

a. Spec Mix

2. Optional:

a. Amerimix (Bonsal)

b. Ash Grove Cement Company

c. U-Mix

d. US Mix Company

B. Site Mixed PCL Grout:

1. Base:

a. Products as indicated.

C. Factory Pre-blended PCL Grout Mixes:

1. Base:

a. Spec Mix.

2. Optional:

a. ProSpec (Bonsal).

D. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 01 33 00.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Factory Pre-blended Mortar Mix:

1. Use approved mix designs which comply with ASTM C270, Property Method.

2. Blend cementitious materials, aggregate and admixtures in factory under controlled

conditions, which requires only addition of water at project site.

3. Oven-dry aggregates prior to measuring and include in pre-blended mix.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, II or III.

1. Air-entraining cement is not permitted.

2. Portland Cement Color: As indicated below for each application.

3. Maximum percent of alkalis: 0.60.

C. Hydrated Lime:

1. ASTM C207, Type S or SA.

D. Mortar Aggregate:

1. ASTM C144.

2. Aggregate Color: As indicated below for each application.

E. Water: Potable.

F. Do not use the following ingredients:

1. Do not use antifreeze additives.

2. Do not use calcium chloride, thiocyanates, or other materials containing chloride ions.

3. Other admixtures: Not permitted without prior approval by Architect.

4. Do not use ready mix mortar.

5. Do not use masonry cement.

G. PCL mortar mixes to comply with ASTM C270, property specification using component

materials listed above:

1. Limit air content to 10%, maximum.

2. Use appropriate type as indicated by following Table 4110A, for each condition.



04 05 16 - 3

3. Four types of mortar - only three are typically used:

TABLE 4110A - Basic Mortar Type Selection

Location Building Segment Mortar Type per

ASTM C270

Exterior Masonry at or below grade

Foundation walls

M Retaining walls

Sewers & manhole, and paving

Exterior Masonry above grade

Reinforced or Load Bearing brick / block walls

S

Glass Unit Masonry

Veneer Masonry, Parapets, and Chimneys greater than 30 FT above grade

Other areas with severe exposure

Non-load bearing brick/block walls

N (or S) Veneer Masonry, where less than 30 FT above grade

Parapets and chimneys where less than 30 FT above grade

N

Interior Masonry

Load bearing brick/block walls

N Non-load bearing brick/block walls

Glass Unit Masonry

Brick/block veneers

H. Grout:

1. Site Mixed PCL Grout:

a. Use approved mix designs.

b. Mix on-site using approved materials as indicated.

c. Factory pre-blended dry grout mixes may be used at contractor’s option.

d. Ready-mixed product, delivered to site for direct placement in walls, may be used at

contractor’s option.

2. Factory pre-blended PCL grout mix:

a. Use approved mix designs.

b. Blend cementitious materials, aggregate and admixtures in factory under controlled

conditions, which requires only the addition of water at the project site.

c. Oven-dry aggregates prior to measuring and include in the pre-blended mix supplied to

the site.

3. PCL Grout Mixes:

a. Comply with ASTM C476.

b. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, II or III.

1) Air-entraining cement is not permitted.

2) Maximum percent of alkalis: 0.60.

c. Grout aggregate: ASTM C404.

1) Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/8 IN 9.5 MM.

2) The use of blast furnace slag is not permitted.

d. Hydrated lime:

1) ASTM C207, Type S.

e. Water: Clean and potable.

f. Other admixtures: Not permitted without prior approval by Architect.

g. Compressive Strength: As indicated by GROUT MIX SCHEDULE, below, for each

type.

h. Slump for Grout Measured in accordance with ASTM C143:

1) Minimum: 8 IN 200 MM.

2) Maximum: 10 IN 250 MM.



04 05 16 - 4

4. Grout Mix GM-1:

a. Site mixed grout.

1) Redi-mixed or factory pre-blended may be used at contractor’s option.

2) Gypsum is not allowed in grout mixtures.

b. Compressive strength, 28-day:

1) Minimum 2000 PSI 13.8 MPa.

c. Location used:

1) Fill for CMU walls.

d. Grout color: Natural grey, no pigment.

e. Portland cement color: Natural.

f. Aggregate color: Natural.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530 and ACI 530.1, except where exceeded by requirements of

the contract documents.

3.2 MORTAR INSTALLATION

A. Mix materials minimum of 5 minutes, but not more than 10 minutes.

B. Adjust consistency to satisfaction of mason subject to compliance with specified criteria.

C. Install in accordance with BIA Standards.

D. Strike joints to create a uniformly concave final joint.

E. Strike joints flush on wall surfaces scheduled to receive an air barrier.

F. If mortar begins to stiffen, it may be re-tempered in accordance with ASTM C270, Subparagraph

7.4.

G. Use mortar within 2-1/2 HRS of initial mixing.

H. Remove units which are disturbed after laying. Clean off original mortar and reset with fresh

mortar.

3.3 GROUT INSTALLATION

A. Mix materials minimum of 5 minutes, but not more than 10 minutes.

B. Use grout within 1-1/2 HRS after initial mixing.

C. Use coarse grout in spaces larger than 2 IN 50 MM in both directions.

D. Use fine grout in spaces with least dimension is less than 2 IN 50 MM.

E. Grout installation – Walls:

1. See Section 04 22 00.

END OF SECTION


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package MASONRY ACCESSORIES

04 05 23 - 1

SECTION 04 05 23

MASONRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Masonry Accessories, as indicated, in

accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.



A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM A580 Stainless Steel Wire.

2. ASTM A641 Zinc–Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.

3. ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

B. TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5 – Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:



1. Manufacturer literature for products proposed for use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Horizontal Reinforcing:

1. Base:

a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

2. Optional:

a. Wire-Bond

b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc.

B. Compressible Filler:

1. Base:

a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Horizontal Reinforcing:

1. In interior walls:

a. Cold drawn steel wire, mill galvanized, Class 3.

2. In walls surrounding wet areas with humidity over 70%:

a. Type 304 stainless steel

3. In exterior walls:

a. Type 304 stainless steel

4. Free standing, single-wythe CMU walls:

a. Horizontal reinforcing composite:

1) Width as required

b. Base Product: 220 Ladder Mesh by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

c. Base Product: 120 Truss Mesh by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package MASONRY ACCESSORIES

04 05 23 - 2

5. CMU walls serving as back-up wall for masonry veneers:

a. Horizontal reinforcing pattern for CMU back-up, with projecting wire loops to

accommodate vertically adjustable veneer wire ties.

1) Length of projection as required for cavity width indicated.

2) Include compatible wire ties for masonry veneer.

b. Interlock veneer anchor wire ties with the ladder/truss reinforcing.

1) Base Product: 270 Ladder Adjustable Eye Wire by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

2) Eye and pintle or similar design which permits vertical movement while restraining

lateral movement

3) Ties to allow for vertical adjustability during and movement after installation

4) Eye Wire:

a) Type 304 stainless steel

b) Diameter: 3/16 IN 5 MM.

B. Vertical Reinforcing:

1. Reinforcing Bars:

a. Grade 60 carbon steel

b. Size: No. 4 bars minimum, or as indicated

c. Refer to Section 03 20 00, and Drawings

C. Compressible Filler:

1. Closed cell neoprene sponge

2. Thickness: 1/4 IN 6 MM

3. Thickness: 3/8 IN 9.5 MM

4. Base Product: NS by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530 and ACI 530.1, except where exceeded by requirements of

the contract documents.

B. Fill solid with mortar or grout masonry unit cells within vertical planes of anchors, or use solid

masonry units above and below anchors.

C. Reinforcing for CMU Walls:


END OF SECTION


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY (CMU)

04 22 00 - 1

SECTION 04 22 00

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY (CMU)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Concrete Masonry (CMU), as

indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.



A. Installer Qualifications:

1. More than five (5) years successful experience in installation of concrete masonry unit

systems similar to system required.

2. Include five (5) references with bid from similar size projects.

B. Reference Standards:

1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

2. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

3. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units

4. ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units

and Related Units

5. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials

6. ACI 216.1/TMS 0216 - Code Requirements for. Determining Fire Resistance of Concrete

and Masonry. Construction Assemblies

7. ACI 530/530.1 – Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures.

8. NMCA TEK 7-1B - Fire Resistance Ratings of Concrete Masonry Assemblies

C. Test results performed to qualify materials and establish mix designs

D. Mock-up:

1. Use materials and procedures accepted for the work.

2. Minimum sample panel size is 4 FT 1.2 M square.

3. Acceptable standard for the work is established by accepted sample panel.

4. Retain sample panel at site until Work has been completed.

5. Include a grouting demonstration panel if grouting operations planned exceed or vary from

limitations set forth in ACI 530.1-05 - Section 3.5

E. Preinstallation Conference:


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer’s data sheet describing properties of concrete masonry units and

demonstrating conformance with specified standards.

2. Certification of level of fire resistance provided by units used in fire rated walls.

3. Reinforcing.

https://www.astm.org/Standards/C90.htm



04 22 00 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Units to be used in fire resistive wall assemblies:

1. Where units are used in assemblies with fire resistive rating:

a. Provide units with aggregate type, and equivalent thickness that yield fire-resistances

indicated for each wall assemblies.

b. Acceptable calculation methodologies for determining equivalent thickness:

1) ASTM C140.

2) NCMA TEK 7-1B.

3) ACI 216.1 / TMS 0216.

c. Units tested per ASTM E119 are also acceptable.

2. Provide solid units, or grouted hollow units, under lintels.

3. Provide matching concrete bricks as required.

4. Do not use chipped, cracked, spalled units exposed in finish work.

5. Provide reinforced concrete masonry lintels fabricated from precast or site cast load bearing

masonry units, filled and reinforced as indicated.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS - GENERAL PURPOSE

A. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU):

1. Modular units complying with ASTM C90.

2. Aggregate:

a. Normal Weight: In accordance with ASTM C33.

3. Sizes and shapes as indicated or required for conditions.

4. Face shell and web thickness: Table 1, ASTM C90.

2.3 REINFORCING

A. Horizontal Reinforcing products including wire ladder truss: Specified in Section 04 05 23.

B. Reinforcing Bars (vertical and horizontal): Specified in Section 03 20 00.

2.4 ACCESSORY ITEMS

A. Masonry Accessories: See Section 04 05 23.

B. Mortar and Grout: See Section 04 05 16.

C. Grout Fill: See Section 04 05 16.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept work.

B. Verify that anchors and flashings are correct.

C. Installation constitutes acceptance of substrate and responsibility for performance.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with provisions of ACI 530 and ACI 530.1, except where exceeded by

requirements of Contract Documents.

2. Perform cutting with masonry saws.

3. Cut as required to provide pattern indicated.

4. Use solid units where cutting or laying would expose holes.

5. Do not install damaged units.

6. Do not wet concrete masonry units.

7. Avoid use of less than half size units.



04 22 00 - 3

8. Build chases and recesses as indicated and required for work of other trades.

B. Install in running bond unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 FIRE AND SMOKE WALL IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify walls indicated on Drawings as having a required fire or smoke rating.

1. Follow guidelines set in Chapter 7 of International Building Code.

2. Permanently identify rating and type of barrier with stencil and paint in contrasting, 3 IN

high letters in a manner acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.

3. Text for fire and smoke barriers: “X HOUR FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER—

PROTECT ALL OPENINGS”.

3.4 LAYING AND TOOLING

A. Lay out walls in advance for uniform and accurate spacing of bond patterns and joints.

B. Properly locate openings, movement joints and offsets.

C. Lay masonry units with face shells of bed joints fully mortared.

1. Mortar webs in courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, in starting course on foundations

and when necessary to confine grout or loose filled insulation.

2. Mortar head joints a minimum distance from each face equal to face shell thickness.

3. Align vertical cells and maintain openings unobstructed to be grouted.

D. Maintain nominal 3/8 IN 9.5 MM joint widths.

1. Cut joints flush where sheet waterproofing will be installed over masonry units.

2. Tool exposed joints.

3. Compress mortar in below ground joints.

E. Enlarge voids or holes, except weep holes, and fill with mortar during tooling.

F. Point up joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide neat, uniform appearance.

G. Remove masonry disturbed after laying.

1. Clean and relay in fresh mortar.

2. Do not pound units to fit.

3. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean, and reset in fresh mortar.

H. Where work is stopped and later resumed, rake back 1/2 masonry unit length in each course; do

not tooth.

1. Remove loose units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.

I. Protect against weather, when work is not in progress.

1. Cover top of walls with waterproof sheeting, extend at least 4 FT 1.2 M down both sides of

walls; anchor in place.

a. Do not use adhesives on surface of brick.

b. Do not set sheeting in joint.

2. Provide cold weather protection; Section 04 05 05.

J. Build in items indicated and specified.

1. Fill with mortar around built-in items.

2. Grout fill space between metal frames and masonry.

3. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place layer of

metal lath in joint below and fill core with grout.

K. Remove masonry protrusions extending 1/2 IN 13 MM or more into cells or cavities to be

grouted.

3.5 REINFORCING

A. General:

1. In addition to the following general requirements, provide reinforcing size type and spacing

as indicated on Drawings and Details.



04 22 00 - 4

B. General Reinforcing Requirements:

1. Reinforce masonry openings over 12 IN 300 MM wide, where control and expansion joints

are not provided, with horizontal joint reinforcing placed in 2 horizontal joints above lintel

and below sill.

a. Extend reinforcing minimum of 24 IN 300 MM beyond jambs of opening.

2. Embed horizontal reinforcing in bed joint mortar for entire length with minimum cover of

5/8 IN 16 MM on exterior side of walls and 1/2 IN 13 MM at other locations.

a. Provide same minimum cover for other embedded items.

3. Minimum laps for horizontal reinforcing: 6 IN 150 MM.

4. Do not bridge Control Joints or Expansion Joints with horizontal reinforcing.

a. Install smooth dowels or other approved device across Control Joints which resist shear

loads but allow in-plane expansion, contraction and linear shrinkage movements.

C. Horizontal Reinforcing (wire ladders/trusses):

1. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing concrete masonry walls.

a. See elsewhere for reinforcing requirements for anchored veneers.

2. Unless otherwise indicated:

a. Install horizontal reinforcing within 8 IN 200 MM of first bed joint.

b. Running Bonds: Install horizontal reinforcing at 16 IN 400 MM OC vertically

thereafter.

c. Stacked Bonds: Install reinforcing 8 IN 200 MM OC vertically thereafter where stack

bond masonry is indicated.

3. Make corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated L and T sections.

a. Cut and bend as required.

4. At intersecting load bearing walls install rigid steel anchors not over 24 IN 600 MM OC

vertically.

a. Embed ends in grout filled cores.

D. Horizontal Reinforcing Bars:

1. Install where indicated.

2. Sizes as indicated.

E. Vertical Reinforcing Bars at CMU Walls other than Anchored Veneers:

1. Install vertical reinforcing bars as indicated.

2. When not indicated, provide the following minimum vertical reinforcing:

a. Provide one No.5 continuous at 48 IN 1200 MM on center.

b. Provide one No.5 Continuous at each corner, at each side of each opening, at each side

of each control joint, and at the ends of walls.

3.6 GROUT FILL

A. Do not place grout until entire portion of wall to be grouted has attained strength to resist grout

pressure.

B. Use mechanical vibrator to remove voids and to consolidate fill.

C. Grout walls incrementally as CMU is placed.

D. Minimize lift heights to ensure walls remain safe and stable until grout has attained strength to

resist overturning or collapse.

1. Consider detrimental lateral loads which could be anticipated including storms, winds,

seismic and soil conditions.

2. Adequately brace.

E. Where vertical or horizontal reinforcing bars are required, place and inspect prior to filling

operation.

F. Fill cores containing vertical reinforcing.

G. Place in maximum 4 FT 1.2 M lifts.

H. Leave lifts minimum 1-1/2 IN 38 MM below top of course to form key with next lift.



04 22 00 - 5

3.7 CONTROL JOINTS (CJ)

A. Provide control joints and other movement joints as indicated.

B. Where not indicated:

1. Locate control joints at natural planes of weakness in masonry wall such as:

a. Changes in wall height.

b. Changes in wall thickness, such as at pipe and duct chases and pilasters.

c. At (above) movement joints in foundations and floors on which wall is bearing.

d. At (above) movement joints in roofs and floors that bear on wall.

e. Within 8 IN 200 MM of one or both jambs of door, window, louver and similar

openings:

1) Place CJ at one side of openings less than 6 FT 1.8 M wide.

2) Place CJ at both sides of openings greater than 6 FT 1.8 M wide.

f. Within 4 FT 1.2 M of corners on one leg, minimum.

1) Opposing leg: No more than 20 FT 6 M from corner.

g. Intersections: Within 12 FT 3.6 M of wall intersections.

2. In addition to the above, locate control joints at no more than the following maximum

(horizontal) distances:

a. Walls greater than 16 FT - 8 IN 5.1 M tall: No more than 25 FT 7.6 M O.C.

b. Walls between 8 FT 2.4 M and 16 FT - 8 IN 5.1 M tall: Not more than 1-1/2 times wall

height.

c. Walls less than 8 FT 2.4 M tall: 12 FT 3.6 M.

C. Installation/construction of control joints:

1. Utilize sash blocks or similar shapes which have slotted end to accept gaskets.

a. Pre-molded Control Joint Strips: Specified in Section 04 05 23.

2. Cut ladder/truss type horizontal reinforcing as it crosses control joints.

3. While mortar is still fresh, rake out mortar from joint, leaving a completely clean joint.

4. After wall has cured, install backer rod and sealant on both wall faces.

a. Sealant and Backer Rod: Specified in Section 07 92 13 and Section 07 92 16.

3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum variation from plumb in vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises:

1. 1/4 IN 6 MM in 10 FT 3 M.

2. 3/8 IN 9 MM in a story height not over 20 FT 6 M.

3. 1/2 IN 12 MM in 40 FT 12 M or more.

B. Maximum variation from plumb for external corners, control joints, expansion joints and other

conspicuous lines:

1. 1/4 IN 6 MM in any story or 20 FT 6 M maximum.


C. Maximum variation from level of grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves

and other conspicuous lines:

1. 1/4 IN 6 MM in any bay or 20 FT 6 M.


D. Maximum variation from plan location of related portions of columns, walls and partitions:

1. 1/2 IN 12 MM in any bay or 20 FT 6 M.


E. Maximum variation in cross section of columns and thicknesses of walls from dimensions

indicated:

1. Minus 1/4 IN 6 MM.

2. Plus 1/2 IN 12 MM.

3.9 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace loose, stained, or damaged units.



04 22 00 - 6

1. Provide new units to match.

2. Install in fresh mortar.

3. Point to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Clean in accordance with Section 04 05 10.

3.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. Comply with the requirements of ACI 530.1 Section 1.6C and facilitate the testing and

inspection agency’s needs.

B. The Owner will provide testing and inspection services. This does not relieve the contractor of

the responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance of contract documents.

END OF SECTION

D I V I S I O N 0 7

THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package SELF-ADHERING SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING

07 13 26 - 1

SECTION 07 13 26 SELF-ADHERING SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane

Waterproofing, as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.



A. Apply waterproofing to exterior of walls below grade including exterior of walls surrounding

elevator pits and other areas having lowered floor slabs.

B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension.

2. ASTM D570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.

3. ASTM D903 Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds.

4. ASTM D1970 Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous

Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.

5. ASTM D3767 Standard Practice for Rubber - Measurements of Dimensions.

6. ASTM D5385 Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproofing

Membranes.

7. ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

8. ASTM E154 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth

Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover.

C. Applicator Qualifications:

1. Not less than five similar sized projects with material specified.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Manufacturers’ product data sheets, details and installation instructions including

components and accessories, indicating product used to be in compliance with

specifications.


1. Manufacturer certification of installer qualifications.

2. Product test reports from qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of

waterproofing with physical properties and other requirements based on comprehensive

testing in accordance with specified test methods within previous five years.

3. Minutes of Preinstallation Conference.

C. Contract Closeout Information:

1. Warranty.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Provide written five year material warranty signed by manufacturer for waterproof integrity.



07 13 26 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane Waterproofing:

1. Base:

a. Henry Company

2. Optional:

a. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing Incorporated

b. Grace Construction Products

c. Polyguard Products, Inc.

d. W. R. Meadows.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane Waterproofing:

1. Self-adhesive rubberized asphalt composite sheet membrane:

a. Total minimum thickness: 60 MIL 1.5 MM thick, composite sheet consisting of:

1) Minimum 56 MIL 1.4 MM thick rubberized asphalt membrane laminated to;

2) Minimum 4 MIL 0.1 MM thick cross-laminated polyethylene film with release

liner on adhesive side.

b. Base Product: Henry Blueskin WP 200.

2. Sheet shall be formulated for use with ambient and substrate temperatures at time of

installation, and for use with primer or surface conditioner complying with VOC limits of

authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Provide waterproofing complying with following physical properties:

Physical Properties

Property Test Method Typical Value

Film Thickness ASTM D3767 60 mils 1.5 MM

Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D1970 Unaffected at -45 DEGF

-45 DEGC Elongation ASTM D412 Greater than 300%

Tensile Strength, Film ASTM D412 325 PSI 2240 kPa minimum

Peel Adhesion to Concrete ASTM D903 9.0 LBS/IN 1.75 MM

Resistance to Hydrostatic Head ASTM D5385 231 FT 61 M minimum

Puncture Resistance ASTM E154 50 LBS 27 KG minimum

Permeance ASTM E96 0.02 perms 2.86 ng/m2/Pa

Water Absorption ASTM D570 Less than 0.1%

4. Surface primer:

a. Liquid primer recommended by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material for

substrate and application temperatures.

5. Sheet flashing:

a. Self-adhering, polymer-modified rubberized-asphalt composite sheet of same material,

construction, and thickness as waterproofing sheet membrane.

6. Liquid membrane:

a. Elastomeric, 2-component, liquid, cold fluid-applied, trowel grade, or low viscosity as

recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for application.

7. Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing

manufacturer.

8. Penetration seal:

a. Self-adhering reinforced membrane, 2-1/2 IN 64 MM wide, with a tack-free protective

adhesive coating on 1 side and a release film on self-adhering side.



07 13 26 - 3

B. Protection Course Fabric:

1. Vertical applications:

a. CCW 200V.

b. 2-Ply polyester fabric.

C. Drainage Composite Panels:

1. Composite 3-dimensional non-biodegradable panels with permeable geotextile bonded to

dimpled, molded plastic drainage core:

a. Geotextile: Non-woven or woven fabric of polypropylene or polyester fibers, or

combination of both.

b. Select geotextile fabric porosity as recommended for soil/backfill encountered on

project.

2. Vertical Applications:

a. CCW MiraDRAIN 6200:

1) Material Thickness: 0.40 IN 10 MM (7/16 IN 11 MM nominal); ASTM D1777.

2) Compressive strength: 15,000 PSF, (104 PSI) 720 kPa; ASTM D1621

3) Core Flow Rate, installed vertically: 12.5 GPM/FT 2.6 L/s/m of width; ASTM

D4716.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Cure concrete to moisture content acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer.

1. Verify substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture.

2. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D4263.

B. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes,

and other voids.

C. Clean, prepare and treat substrate according to manufacturer’s written instructions, to provide

clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.

D. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage affecting other

construction.

E. Prime as recommended by manufacturer.

F. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.2 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Construction joint, control joints, cracks and voids exceeding 1/16 IN 1.5 MM:

1. Fill with liquid membrane and install 8 IN 200 MM membrane strip.

B. Expansion Joints:

1. Where anticipated movement is less than 1/2 IN 13 MM, install 3-ply membrane system as

recommended by manufacturer.

C. Vertical Inside and Outside Corners:

1. Prepare, prime, and treat inside corners according to waterproofing manufacturer’s

instructions.

2. Install 12 IN 300 MM membrane strip centered over vertical corners.

D. Horizontal inside corners including foundation wall to footing intersections:

1. Prepare, prime, and treat inside corners according to waterproofing manufacturer’s

instructions.

2. Install 3/4 IN 19 MM fillets of liquid membrane.

3. Extend liquid membrane each direction from corner or install membrane strip centered over

corner.

E. Horizontal outside corners:



07 13 26 - 4

1. Prepare and treat outside corners according to waterproofing manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Apply double layer overlapping membranes.

F. Pipes, posts, conduits, and similar penetrations:

1. Apply a double layer of membrane extending out at least 6 IN 150 MM from the penetrating

item.

2. Seal with mastic or liquid membrane product.

3. Coordinate detailing at penetrations made after waterproofing system is complete with

subcontractors responsible for penetrations.

G. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through

waterproofing and at protrusions according to waterproofing manufacturer’s instructions.

1. At top of wall conditions: Terminate membrane below final grade.

a. Apply mastic to terminations and joints.

3.3 SELF-ADHERING COMPOSITE SHEET APPLICATION

A. Install self-adhering composite sheet according to waterproofing manufacturer’s written

instructions.

B. Apply primer to substrate at required rate.

1. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by waterproofing membrane in same day.

2. Re-prime areas exposed for more than 24 HRS.

C. Apply and firmly adhere sheet membrane over area to receive waterproofing:

1. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2 IN 64 MM minimum lap widths and

end laps.

2. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.

3. Install from low point to high point to ensure proper lap direction.

4. Roll laps of membrane installed on vertical surfaces, and roll membrane on sloping and

horizontal surfaces.

D. Apply continuous sheet membrane over membrane strips bridging each type of joint to

dimensions required by manufacturer.

E. Seal exposed edges of membrane terminations.

F. Install sheet membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in adjacent waterproofing.

G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not meeting requirements.

1. Slit and flatten fish mouths and blisters.

2. Patch with sheet membrane extending 6 IN 150 MM beyond repaired areas.

H. Waterproofing membrane must not be left exposed to construction traffic or ultraviolet rays

without protection.

3.4 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION

A. Install protection course over waterproofing membrane using tape or adhesive according to

manufacturer’s written instructions and before commencing subsequent construction operations.

B. Do not penetrate waterproofing, and do not use stick clips to install protection course.

C. Minimize exposure of membrane

3.5 DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure drainage panels according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Use adhesives and mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate waterproofing.

C. Do not penetrate waterproofing, and do not use stick clips to install protection course.

D. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity.

E. Protect installed panels during subsequent construction.



07 13 26 - 5

F. Adhesively attach drainage board at top-of-wall termination.

1. Hold top of composite drainage board 6 IN 150 MM below finish grade.

2. Fold fabric over and tuck into wall in such a way that will avoid intrusion of backfill

material in to the drainage channels.

3.6 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during application and remainder of construction

period, according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Protect installed system from damage due to ultraviolet light exposure, physical abuse, and other

causes.

1. Provide temporary coverings where system will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed

and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION

D I V I S I O N 2 6

ELECTRICAL


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

26 00 10 - 1

SECTION 26 00 10

ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Electrical General Requirements, as

indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.


C. Drawing Use and Interpretation:

1. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of systems and equipment,

except:

a. Specific installation details.

b. When specific dimensions are indicated for electrical equipment it is intended that these

be limiting dimensions. When proposed equipment exceeds these limiting dimensions,

notify Architect. Features and functions of specified equipment shall not be superseded

by these limiting dimensions.

2. For exact locations of building elements, refer to dimensioned architectural/structural

drawings.

3. Field measurements take precedence over dimensioned drawings.

4. Intention is to indicate size, capacity, approximate location, direction and general

relationship of one work phase to another, but not exact detail or arrangement.

5. Field verify locations and arrangement of existing systems and equipment.


A. Perform work in accordance with but not limited to:

1. Federal, state and local codes, regulations and ordinances.

2. All authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) requirements.

4. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

5. NFPA-70: National Electrical Code (NEC).

6. NFPA-70E: Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.

1.3 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Examine Contract Documents to determine how other work will affect execution of electrical

work. All work required for this coordination shall be included in bid.

B. Make arrangements for and pay for permits, licenses, and inspections.

C. Cause as little interference or interruption of existing utilities and services as possible.

1. Schedule work which will cause interference or interruption in advance with Owner,

Architect, authorities having jurisdiction and affected trades.

D. Determine and verify locations of existing utilities on or near site.

1. Notify Engineer of any discrepancies prior to commencing work.

E. Temporary construction power and communications (See Division 01)

F. Record drawings:

1. Keep a complete set of electrical drawings in job site office for indicating actual installation

of electrical systems and equipment.

2. Use this set of drawings for no other purpose.

3. Where any material, equipment, or system components are installed differently from that

indicated, indicate differences clearly and neatly using ink or indelible pencil.


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

26 00 10 - 2

4. Drawings may be electronic if using an electronic redline or markup program and utilizing

contract drawing files as a base.

5. At project completion, submit record set of drawings. Refer to Section 01 78 39 for specific

requirements.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 GENERAL

A. When changes in location of any work are required, obtain approval of Architect before making

change.

B. Do not change indicated sizes without written approval of Architect.

C. Provide offsets and crossovers in conduits, raceways, and ducts.

2.2 DEMOLITION

A. Field verify locations and arrangement of existing systems and equipment.

B. Do not cut into existing services without first verifying with Owner that service has been

correctly identified.

1. Perform work that interrupts any service during premium time.

a. Include cutting into existing lines for new connection.

2. Inform building engineering staff in advance of any shut off that will occur and give

estimate of duration.

3. Begin work only after engineering staff is fully informed and has agreed to schedule of shut

offs.

C. Fabricate and install interconnecting portions of these systems prior to shut down for final

connections.

D. Perform demolition as directed by Contractor.

1. Remove equipment indicated.

2. Relocate items indicated after thorough cleaning.

E. Salvage items in accordance with Section 02 41 00.

F. Existing equipment and materials removed from existing construction and not indicated or

required to be reused shall become the property of the Owner, if they so elect.

1. Present equipment and materials removed to Owner's representative, who shall select

equipment and materials to retain.

2. Equipment and materials not retained shall become property of Contractor and shall be

removed from site.

END OF SECTION


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 05 43 - 1

SECTION 26 05 43

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Underground Ducts and Raceways

for Electrical Systems, as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.

B. Definitions:

1. Unsuitable material: Debris and/or soil material judged unsuitable by Engineer for support

of slabs or other site improvements.

2. Engineer: Soils Engineer employed by Owner, empowered to conduct inspections and

make approvals.

3. Rock excavation:

C. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.


A. Compaction density test:

1. Standard Proctor, ASTM D698.

B. Owner will hire an independent soils laboratory to conduct in place moisture and density tests.

1. Contractor to pay for retests of materials failing initial tests.

2. Notify Owner's representative at least 48 HRS prior to anticipated date of testing.

3. Contractor will pay additional cost if work is delayed due to Contractor’s failure to notify

Owner's agent as specified above.

C. Comply with Safety Rules & Regulations for Excavation for local jurisdiction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Handholes.

B. Product Data:

1. Duct bank conduit separation.

C. Project Information:

1. Test reports.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Protect existing utilities and structures as indicated in Section 26 00 10.

B. Avoid overloading. Keep surcharge sufficient distance back from edge of excavation to prevent

slides or caving. Maintain and trim excavated materials in such a manner to be as little

inconvenience as possible to public and adjoining property owners.

C. Provide full access to public and private premises, to fire hydrants, sidewalks and other points to

prevent serious interruption of travel.

1.5 EXTRA WORK

A. Removal and replacement of unsuitable material below design elevations will be paid for as

extra work.

1. Notify Owner's agent in time to have Engineer measure and record quantity removed.

2. Recorded quantity will be basis for payment.

3. Include unit price on Bid Form.



26 05 43 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Handholes:

1. Base:

a. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

2. Optional:

a. Armorcast Products Company.

b. Synertech.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Duct System:

1. Duct system: Single or multiple, round bore PVC conduits shall be completely encased in

concrete as indicated.

a. Rigid PVC conduit, schedule 80..

b. Separators: Concrete, plastic or other non-metallic, non-decaying material.

c. Concrete: 20 685 kPa 3000 PSI. Conform to Division 03 requirements.

d. Reinforcing steel: ASTM A615 Grade 60. Conform to Division 03 requirements.

2. Pull wire: Heavy nylon cord, free of kinks and splices.

3. Marker tape: 75 MM 3 IN wide, 0.127 MM.005 IN thick brightly colored plastic tape with

continuous metallic backing and a 0.0254 MM.001 IN corrosion resistant metallic foil core.

Tape shall be labeled ELECTRIC, TELEPHONE or SIGNAL at intervals not exceeding

3000 MM 10 FT.

B. Handholes:

1. Base Product: Quazite by Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

a. Construction: Polymer concrete.

b. Suitable for light vehicular traffic (2267 Kg 5000 LB over 250 x 250 MM 10 x 10 IN

area).

c. Designed and tested to temperatures of -45 DEGC -50 DEGF.

d. Meet the requirements ANSI/SCTE 77 Specification for Underground Enclosure

Integrity

e. Secure cover with minimum 2 hex head fastener nuts.

f. Open bottom.

g. Embossed identification on cover: ELECTRIC

h. Dimensions: Nominal 305 MM 12 IN long x 305 MM 12 IN wide x 305 MM 12 IN

deep.

i. Provide 50 MM 2 IN cover.

C. Backfill material:

1. As approved by Engineer.

2. Free of rock, cobbles, roots, sod, organic matter, and frozen material.

3. Moisture content at time of placement:

a. 3% plus/minus of optimum moisture content.

b. Add water to dry material, or dry wet material as required, or furnish off site material at

no additional cost to Owner.



26 05 43 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove and dispose of materials determined by Engineer to be unsuitable.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of duct, duct bank, manholes, handholes, and boxes with other

utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field. Notify Engineer if there is

a conflict between areas of excavation and existing structures or archaeological sites to remain.

C. Coordinate elevations of duct and duct bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes with

final locations and profiles of duct and duct banks, as determined by coordination with other

utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features.

1. Revise locations and elevations as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct

and duct bank will drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by Engineer.

2. Lay duct lines to minimum grade of 100 MM in 30 M 4 IN in 100 FT.

3. Grade may be from one manhole to next, or both ways from high point between manholes,

depending on contour of finished grade.

4. Install duct lines so that top of concrete is not less than 760 MM 30 IN below finished grade

or finished paving at any point.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Excavate trenches by open cut method to depth indicated and necessary to accommodate the

work.

1. Do not excavate below indicated grades unless required to remove unsuitable material.

2. Backfill over-excavations in firmly compacted 150 MM 6 IN lifts.

3. Keep trenches free of water.

4. Brace and sheet trenches as soil conditions dictate. Do not remove until backfilling has

progressed to a stage that no damage to conduit will result from removal.

B. Open no more than 90 M 300 LF of trench at one time, or less, as required by Engineer.

C. Clean conduit before using or laying.

D. Lay no conduit in water or in unsuitable weather or trench conditions.

E. Accomplish changes in direction of runs exceeding total of 15 DEG, either vertical or horizontal,

by long sweep bends with minimum radius of 7620 MM 25 FT.

1. Sweep bends may be made up of one or more curved or straight sections or combinations

thereof.

F. Furnish manufactured bends at end of runs.

1. Minimum radius of 457 MM 18 IN for conduits less than 75 MM 3 IN trade size and 915

MM 36 IN for ducts of 75 MM 3 IN trade size and larger.

G. During construction and after duct line is completed, plug ends of conduits to prevent water

washing into conduit or manholes.

1. Keep conduits clear of concrete, dirt, and any other substance during course of construction.

H. Where it is necessary to cut tapered end on a piece of conduit at site, make cut with tool or lathe

designed to cut taper to match taper of particular conduit being used.

I. Terminate conduits in end bells where duct lines enter pull boxes or manholes.

J. After duct line has been completed, pull standard flexible mandrel not less than 305 MM 12 IN

long, with diameter approximately 6 MM 1/4 IN less than inside diameter of conduit, through

each conduit. Then pull brush with stiff bristles through each conduit to make certain that no

particles of earth, sand, or gravel have been left in line.

K. Pneumatic rodding may be used.

L. Install pull wire in unused new ducts.

1. Extend minimum of 915 MM 3 FT into each manhole or above pads beyond ends of ducts.



26 05 43 - 4

M. Encase each conduit in concrete not less that 75 MM 3 IN beyond any surface of conduit.

1. Stagger conduit joints a minimum of 300 MM 12 IN in concrete encased duct banks.

2. Mix, place and cure concrete in accordance with Division 03 requirements.

N. Provide uniform spacing between conduits: Not less that 50 MM 2 IN.

1. Place separators on maximum 1220 MM 4 FT centers.

2. Anchor ducts to prevent movement during placement of concrete.

O. Make conduit joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for conduit and

coupling selected.

1. Make conduit joints watertight.

2. Brush plastic solvent cement on inside of plastic coupling fitting and outside of conduit

ends.

P. Place marker tape above service lines, electrical feeders and communication ducts outside

building footprint. Locate tape 300 MM 12 IN below finished grade.

3.3 BACKFILLING

A. Perform field tests and verify electrical system complies with specified requirements before

backfilling.

B. Hand or pneumatic tamp backfill around and over pipe in lifts not exceeding 200 MM 8 IN loose

thickness.

C. Backfill carefully to avoid displacing pipe joints either horizontally or vertically and to avoid

breaking pipe.

D. Do not water flush for consolidation.

3.4 COMPACTION

A. Compact trench backfill in areas under paved roads, parking areas, sidewalks and other

structures as directed by Engineer to at least 95% of maximum dry density.

B. In locations where trench will not be under paved areas, compact backfill to minimum 90% of

maximum dry density.

C. Remove materials which cannot be compacted as specified.

D. Replace with suitable material and compact.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform backfill density tests as directed by Engineer.

1. Allow for one test per 30 M 100 FT of trench.

END OF SECTION

D I V I S I O N 2 7

COMMUNICATIONS


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

27 05 00 - 1

SECTION 27 05 00

BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Requirements of Drawings, General and Supplementary Conditions, Divisions 00 and 01 apply

to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Basic Materials and Methods for

Communications Systems, as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents to

provide a full and operating communications system as described within Division 27 documents.

B. Related Sections:

1. Electrical Requirements: Division 26

2. Utilities: Division 33.

C. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.

D. Provide all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or

necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation, whether or not specifically indicated in

the Contract Documents.

E. Report percentage of work completed on a monthly basis.

F. Provide all floor penetrations, floor sleeves, conduit raceways, wall penetrations, etc. not shown

on the telecom plans but needed for the routing of cabling provided herein.

G. Provide firestopping as required for all penetrations where division 27 cables pass through a fire

rated barrier to restore the barrier to its original rating.

H. Provide labor for testing horizontal and backbone cabling.

I. Provide Telecommunications grounding and bonding.

J. The same manufacturer’s product shall be utilized throughout the entire project for all copper

and fiber optic cabling.

K. Substitutions: No substituted products shall be installed except with written approval by Owner.

L. Drawings use and interpretation:

1. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of systems and equipment,

except when specifically dimensioned or detailed.

2. For exact locations of building elements, refer to dimensioned architectural/structural

drawings.

3. Field measurements take precedence over dimensioned drawings.

4. Intention is to show size, capacity, approximate location, direction and general relationship

of one work phase to another, but not exact detail or arrangement.

M. Installation of all communications systems and equipment is subject to clarification as indicated

in reviewed shop drawings and field coordination drawings.

N. Dimensions indicated are limiting dimensions.

O. Do not use equipment exceeding dimensions indicated or equipment or arrangements that reduce

required clearances or exceed specified maximum dimensions.



27 05 00 - 2

P. Description of systems:

1. Provide materials to provide filly functioning systems in compliance with performance

requirements specified.

2. Provide modifications required by reviewed shop drawings and field coordinated drawings.

Q. The work of this division shall consist of, but shall not be limited to, the providing of the

following systems:

1. Communications Systems - Grounding and Bonding: Section 27 05 26.

2. Communications Systems - Structured Cabling: Section 27 10 00.

1.3 REFERENCES AND COMPLIANCES TO THE LATEST EDITIONS, AS RELATED

A. Design, manufacture, test, and install telecommunications cabling networks per manufacture’s

requirements and in accordance with NFPA-70 (National Electrical Code), state codes, local

codes, requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and particularly the following standards:

1. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 - Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises

2. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

3. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 - Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components

Standards

4. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard

5. ANSI-J-STD-607-A - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding

Requirements for Telecommunications

6. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606(A) The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications

Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings

7. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A -- Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Multimode

Fiber Cable Plant

8. AMP NETCONNECT Design Installer Agreement (ND&I) (current)

9. BICSI® Telecommunications Distributions Methods Manual, latest edition.

10. ISO/IEC 11801 Generic Cabling for Customer Premises.

11. National Electrical Code (NEC).

12. IEEE C2-2002 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC®) current edition.

13. FCC Part 68 Code of Federal Regulations, Title 47, Telecommunications.

14. UL 1459 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Safety—Telephone Equipment.

15. UL 1863 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Safety—Communication Circuit

Accessories.

16. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA).

17. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

18. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA).

19. Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA).

20. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Provide a fully functional communications infrastructure, which includes:

1. Build-out of all telecommunications areas, entrance facility, building distribution, floor

distribution and data/telecommunication outlets meeting the requirements of

ANSI/TIA+/EIA.

2. Adherence to the design guidelines for installation of cabling in pathways and spaces as

defined by ANSI/TIA/EIA 569

3. All material, labor, tool, apparatus and equipment to furnish completely working

telecommunication cabling system.

4. Horizontal cables, backbone cables, cross connects, patch cords and data/telecommunication

outlets.

5. Complete grounding of all systems components and cabinets to the telecommunications

main grounding busbar in compliance with ANSI/TIA/EIA 607.

6. Cable identification tags and system labeling shall match owners existing system.

7. Coordination of the entire installation with all other divisions.



27 05 00 - 3

B. In circumstances where Specifications and Drawings conflict, the Drawings shall govern

quantity and the Specifications shall govern quality.

1.5 SUBMITTALS (SEE SECTION 01 33 00)

A. General:

1. Submit for review by the Architect/Engineer, complete engineered documentation for each

system for evaluation of the proposed system with respect to project design requirements.

Submittals for each system shall consist of engineered shop drawings and manufacturer's

descriptive product data sheets for each system component to indicate conformance with the

contract documents.

2. Provide complete submittal package (shop drawings/product data) per individual

specification section. Information contained within each submittal package shall only

pertain to the referenced specification section.

3. Provide submittal information as indicated within each Division 27 section and as indicated

herein.

4. When application engineering and each submittal package have been prepared, a meeting

shall be set up with the Architect/Engineer and Owner for preliminary shop drawing review.

The project superintendent for the work of this division shall explain the entire system

operation, equipment and other items as called for within the contract documents.

Information to be reviewed shall be submitted one week in advance of proposed meeting

date for review and preliminarily reviewed at this meeting. This meeting will be held in the

Owner's jobsite office.

5. All submittal documents shall be submitted in electronic “pdf” format. Drawings shall be

produced on 30” x 42” format and product data shall be produced on 8.5” x 11” format.

B. Submittal Description - Shop drawings:

1. Content:

a. Cover Letter: Accompany each shop drawing submittal with a cover letter stating that

the shop drawings have been thoroughly reviewed by the Contractor and are in full

compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Have the person who

prepared the submittal sign (and stamped, if applicable) the cover letter and include a

drawing index. Failure to comply with this requirement shall constitute grounds for

rejection of submittal.

b. Drawing Information: Shop drawing submittals shall consist of floor plans, enlarged

room plans, wall and rack elevations, installation details, and other aspects of the system

that differ from the Contract Documents or the design intent. Use the same scales as the

Drawings (e.g., 1/8" = 1'-0" for floor plans; 1/4" = 1'-0" for enlarged room plans).

c. Resubmittals: Accompany resubmittals with a cover letter that lists the revisions made

to each drawing in response to Submittal Review Comments. Failure to include this

cover letter will constitute rejection of the resubmittal package without review.

2. As indicated in each Division 27 section and as indicated herein.

3. Submit for review the following submittal components (as applicable) for each system for

evaluation of the proposed system with respect to project design requirements:

a. Provide complete floor plans. Each plan shall show proposed device locations.

1) Show actual device nomenclature as illustrated on riser and single line diagrams.

2) Show pullboxes, equipment enclosures and terminal cabinets.

3) Show conduits and fill (optional if lateral conduits are shown with size and fill on

the riser).

b. Provide complete enlarged scale equipment room plans. Each plan shall show proposed

“head-end” equipment type and locations.

1) Plan layout showing all system requirements within room with device notations.

2) Elevations of each wall within equipment room depicting equipment locations,

notations and dimensioning.

3) Equipment rack/cabinet elevations, scaled, notating each component located within

the rack/cabinet and cross-referenced to product data.



27 05 00 - 4

c. Riser diagram:

1) Illustrate conduit relationships between devices shown on the floor plans.

2) (Lateral conduits are optional if shown on the plans).

3) Show actual device nomenclature as illustrated on the plans and breaker number

where the power will be sourced.

d. Single-line diagrams:

1) Show signal relationships of devices within the system.

2) Show actual device nomenclature as illustrated on the riser and plans.

3) Show wire numbers.

e. Equipment enclosure wiring diagrams:

1) Show a pictorial illustration of each equipment enclosure and/or terminal cabinet.

2) Show the device nomenclatures exactly as shown on the single line diagrams.

3) Show the terminations including the wire numbers as shown on the single line

diagrams.

4) Show wire colors for each terminal.

5) For each wire exiting the enclosure, show the destination of the wire by floor, room

number and the drawing number of the panel where the wire terminates.

f. Free standing device wiring diagrams:

1) For each free standing device, such as a computer, printer or the like, show the rear

elevation of the device as a pictorial.

2) Show the termination connectors on the device.

3) Show the wire numbers attached to the connectors.

g. Custom assembly diagrams:

1) For each custom assembly such as a receptacle assembly, control panel or the like,

provide an assembly drawing illustrating the appearance of the assembled device

including dimensions, assembly components and functional attributes.

h. Drawing comparison:

1) Copy of drawing annotated where proposed system layout differs from designed

system. Any differences to be explained.

4. Each individual submittal item for materials and equipment shall be marked to show

specification section and paragraph number which pertains to the item. Manufacturer’s

description sheets shall have an arrow stamp pointing to each item on the sheet that is

intended for review. Each operational feature of the systems included shall be addressed in

narrative form and relate to specific system requirements described in the plans and

specifications. All drawing submittals shall be submitted on same size sheets, identified by

system, and sequentially numbered throughout the entire set.

C. Submittal Description - Product Data:

1. Content:

a. Cover Letter: Include a cover letter stating that the submittal is in full compliance with

the requirements of the Contract Documents. Sign (and stamped, if applicable) cover

letter and list items and data submitted.

b. Product Information: Include manufacturer's technical data, product literature, "catalog

cuts", data sheets, specifications, and block wiring diagrams (if necessary) to clearly

describe the product’s characteristics, physical and dimensional information, electrical

performance data, materials used in fabrication, material color & finish, and other

relevant information such as test data, typical usage examples, independent test agency

information, and storage requirements. Clearly indicate by arrows or brackets precisely

what is being submitted on and those optional accessories, which are included and those

which are excluded. At a minimum, include products listed in Division 27. Include

relevant products that will be installed, which are not listed in the specifications.

c. Resubmittals: Provide a cover letter with the resubmittal that lists the action taken and

revisions made to each product submittal in response to Submittal Review Comments.

No review shall take place for any resubmittal packages that is not accompanied by this

cover letter. Failure to include this cover letter will constitute rejection of the

resubmittal package.



27 05 00 - 5

2. Product list for Division 27 equipment per specified system.

3. As indicated in each Division 27 section and as indicated herein.

4. Description of system operation indicating overall system operation and purpose and

capabilities of each component within system.

5. Where multiple options are shown on a single data sheet, highlight product options that will

be provided and strikethrough options that are not applicable or otherwise specifically

identify all options/features to be included in the project.

6. Cross reference data sheets to components shown on shop drawings.

7. Specification comparison:

a. Copy of specification annotated where proposed product differs from specified product.

Any differences to be explained.

8. Each data sheet shall have a footer each page with the following information:

a. Submitting Contractor’s Logo

b. Specification Section

c. Specification Reference

d. Manufacturer Name

e. Manufacturer Part Number

f. Brief Description

g. Page 1 of xx

h. EXAMPLE FOOTER:

D. Samples:

1. As indicated in each Division 27 section.

E. Project information:


F. Contract closeout information:


G. Record drawings: Conform to the requirements of Division 01 and as follows:

1. Keep a complete set of all electronic systems drawings in job site office for showing actual

installation of electronic systems and equipment. Drawings shall show location and routing

of conduit and cable.



shown, indicate differences clearly and neatly using ink or indelible pencil.

4. At project completion, submit record set of drawings to Construction Manager/General

Contractor for review and distribution to the Owner.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Five continuous years, minimum, design and manufacture of the materials and equipment

specified herein.

2. Manufacturer(s) of products and equipment specified herein shall demonstrate that they

have a quality assurance program in place to assure that the specifications are met. Include

in the program, at a minimum, provisions for:

a. Incoming inspection of raw materials

b. In-process inspection and final inspection of the cable product

c. Calibration procedures of test equipment to be used in the qualifications of the product.

d. Recall procedures in the event that out of calibration equipment is identified.



27 05 00 - 6

3. Conform to government standards on quality assurance for applications within these

specifications.

B. Installer Qualifications:

1. The intent of these specifications is to insure the systems described in this division are

provided and installed by a technically experienced installer and, further, that the work is

fully coordinated between the various systems by a single installer who is technically

qualified as described herein.

2. Company specializing in installation of structured data/telecom cabling systems networks

for a minimum of five years. Experience shall include the following:

a. List at least 10 facilities of equal size, complexity and technical requirements utilizing

the equipment submitted.

b. For each facility, list:

1) Name and location of facility

2) Date of occupancy by Owner

3) Owner's representative to contact and telephone number

4) Construction Manager or General Contractor

5) Architect

c. Material and equipment shall be new, and conform to grade, quality, and standards

specified. Equipment and materials of the same type shall be a product of the same

manufacturer throughout.

d. The successful cabling contractor must meet the following requirement:

1) Must have a BICSI® certified RCDD review the drawings and meet with the A/E

and Comal County representatives to discuss the project and to ensure that a

structured cabling system is installed that provides a comprehensive

telecommunications infrastructure.

3. Where the installer is a branch office or other division of a larger organization, the

qualifications of the branch office or other division shall meet the requirements of the

Contract Documents. The installer incorporated under the same name, shall have

successfully completed a minimum of three similar communications construction projects,

both in scope and system types.

4. The work of this division shall be managed and supervised by a full-time site project

superintendent who shall have the following qualifications:

a. Experience in the applications engineering, installation, and supervision of similar

construction projects both in scope and system type for a minimum of 5 years.

b. Full time employee of the installer.

c. Have a working knowledge of all systems installed under this division.

d. Project superintendent shall be on site full time through duration of construction.

5. Equipment and materials of the type for which there are independent standard testing

requirements, listings, and labels, shall be listed and labeled by the independent testing

laboratory.

6. A complete technical specification for the submitted equipment, noting differences and

adherence to this Section. Subcontractors shall assume all rights and obligations toward the

contractor that the contractor assumes toward the owner and engineer/designer.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery:

1. Do not deliver products to the site until protected storage space is available.

2. Coordinate materials delivery with installation schedule to minimize storage time at jobsite.

3. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged packaging and

containers with identification labels (name of the manufacturer, product name and number,

type, grade, UL classification, etc.) intact.

4. Immediately replace equipment damaged during shipping at no cost to the Owner, so as not

to impact the construction schedule.



27 05 00 - 7

B. Storage and Protection:

1. Store materials in clean, dry, ventilated space free from temperature and humidity

conditions (as recommended by manufacturer) and protected from exposure to harmful

weather conditions.

2. Comply with manufacturer's storage requirements for each product. Comply with

recommended procedures, precautions or remedies as described in the Material Safety Data

Sheets (MSDS) as applicable.

3. Maintain factory wrapping or provide a heavy canvas/plastic cover to protect units from

dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

4. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not acceptable.

5. Provide heat where required to prevent condensation or temperature related damage.

C. Handling:

1. Handle materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

Handle with care to prevent damage, breakage, denting, and scoring.

2. Do not install damaged materials and equipment. Replace damaged equipment at no cost to

the Owner.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warrant products and labor provided will, under normal use and service, be free from defects

and faulty workmanship for period of 2 years from the date of acceptance. During the warranty

period the entire system shall be kept in operating condition at no additional material or labor

costs to the Owner.

B. Render service within one business day of system failure notification. Note deviations or

improvements to this service at the time of bid and obtain written acceptance from the Owner, or

Owner’s Representative.

C. Contractor shall agree to repair or replace defective components/materials and correct defective

work when given notice by Owner during the warranty period.

D. Damage caused to completed work done by others shall be replaced or repaired by the

contractor.

E. Effect replacement or substitutions of equipment within 12 hours upon receipt of warranty

request from Owner during normal working hours.

F. Manufacturers of the major system components shall maintain a replacement parts department

and provide testing equipment when needed. Provide complete replacement parts within one

business day during the warranty period.

1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Contract closeout information:


B. Record drawings:

1. Keep a complete set of all electronic systems drawings in job site office for showing actual

installation of electronic systems and equipment. Drawings shall show exact location of

devices, equipment and routing of conduit and cable.



shown, indicate differences clearly and neatly using ink or indelible pencil during

construction.

4. At project completion, update shop drawings with a notated revision to reflect all As-Built

changes and submit final record set of drawings to A/E for approval.

5. Upon A/E approval, provide (2) hard copies and (2) PDF on USB digital copies to A/E for

distribution to the Owner.



27 05 00 - 8

C. At the time of final inspection, provide four sets of complete data on communication equipment

used in this project. This data shall be in bound form and shall include all shop drawings

required for this project.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Table of Contents in the form of the Bill of Materials provided as defined by each Division

27 section.

2. Data sheets for each device as indicated in each Division 27 section and as indicated herein.

3. Where multiple options are shown on a single data sheet, highlight product options that will

be provided and strikethrough options that are not applicable or otherwise specifically

identify all options/features to be included in the project.

4. Stamp each data sheet with its associated specification section reference.

5. Following each data sheet provide its corresponding Operation and Maintenance technical

manual.

6. Description of system operation indicating overall system operation and purpose and

capabilities of each component within system.

7. Cross reference data sheets to components shown on system/riser diagrams.

8. Provide (2) colored, tabbed, hard copies in 3-ring binders, and (2) PDF on USB colored,

digitally tabbed, digital copies.

E. All Operation and Maintenance Data shall include "record drawing" system interconnection

diagrams with major components identified and number and type of interconnecting conductors.

Submit two copies and one sepia of each record drawing.

1. Floor plan drawings shall be provided showing location of equipment and routing of conduit

and cable.

F. Maintenance and operating instructions on all systems.

G. Certification from system manufacturers that systems are installed in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations and are functioning correctly at the time of final inspection.

1.10 OWNER'S PERSONNEL TRAINING

A. Include all costs required to:

1. Train operation and maintenance personnel in use and maintenance of systems provided

under this section.

2. Train maintenance staff in troubleshooting and maintenance of each system.

3. Provide copies of technical manuals, including functional / operational circuit characteristics

and schematic diagrams, for each system and system component.

B. Training sessions shall be conducted by instructors certified in writing by manufacturer of

specific system.

1. Conduct sessions for not less than four hour periods during normal working hours, i.e.,

Monday through Friday, 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM.

2. Training session schedules shall conform to requirements of Owner.

3. Submit schedules to Owner for approval not less than two weeks prior to training session.

4. Do not schedule training sessions for different systems concurrently.

5. Training hours shall be cumulative of hours specified in each section.

6. Provide a minimum of 80 hours of training to be apportioned between systems.

C. Instruct operating staff in proper operation, including hands-on training.

D. Video record all training sessions including but not limited to classroom training, operational

training and hands on training.

E. Provide two interactive DVD copies of recorded training material to Owner.



27 05 00 - 9

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Acceptable manufacturers:

1. Individual items:

a. Base: As noted in each Division 27 section.

b. Optional: As noted in each Division 27 section.

2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with General Conditions.

B. Use only prime quality, new materials, apparatus and equipment.

C. Use UL labeled electrical materials where listing has been established for materials or devices in

question.

D. Structural steel for supports: ASTM-A36/A36M.

1. Galvanize members installed in areas of high humidity or condensation.

2. Furnish other members with shop coat of rust inhibiting primer.

3. Shop fabricate for field assembly using bolts.

4. Minimize field welding.

5. Retouch primer and galvanizing after field welding.

2.2 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish spare parts required in each Division 27 section.

B. All spare parts shall be new and in original packaging from manufacturer.

C. Insure parts are package to protect from damage and to allow for easy storage.

D. Provide inventory of all spare parts.

2.3 WEATHER PROOF EQUIPMENT

A. Use weatherproof (WP) enclosures for all exterior devices and equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Use only thorough, highly skilled, and experienced workers.

B. When changes in location of any work are required, obtain approval of Architect/Engineer prior

to making change.

1. Make changes at no extra cost to Owner.

C. Provide access panels in any area where equipment is located which requires accessibility for

service and/or maintenance

D. Do not change indicated sizes or configuration without written approval of Architect/Engineer.

E. Provide to Division 26 subcontractor all non-standard electrical boxes related to Division 27

scope of work.

F. Work provided by Division 26.

1. Complete raceway/cable tray system from the main head end equipment to the end field

device, including any necessary standard size back boxes, horizontal distribution, system

pullboxes and access panels.

2. 208 volt AC wiring and connections to UPS equipment.

3. Division 27: subcontractor shall submit conduit requirements and special back boxes for

work to be performed by Division 26 subcontractor in a timely manner so as not to impede

the progress of the work.



27 05 00 - 10

4. Division 27: subcontractor shall provide information to Division 26 subcontractor for any

additional conduits required or increase in size of conduit to effect the installation of the

electronic systems contained herein. Costs of additional conduits or size increase shall be

the responsibility of the Division 27 subcontractor.

5. Division 27: subcontractor shall be responsible for 120 volt AC wiring and connections

from the output of UPS distribution panel to all required Division 27 equipment including

required connections.

G. Fill percentage: Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent.

H. Conduit verification:

1. Verify that all conduit is clear of foreign matter and substances prior to pulling of wire or

cable.

2. Apply a chemically inert conduit lubricant to all wire and cable prior to pulling. Do not

subject wire and cable to tension greater than recommended by the manufacturer. Under no

circumstances shall wire or cable be "jerked", "yanked" or attached to any mechanical

pulling device which exerts excessive force; shear or tensile.

3. Secure all wire and cable runs vertically in conduit for continuous distances greater than

thirty (30) feet at the vertical run terminations. Non-coaxial cables shall be secured by

screw-flange nylon cable ties or similar devices. Symmetrical clamping devices with split,

circular or other wire conforming, non-metallic bushings shall be provided for all other

cables.

I. Provide copper and fiber optic communications cables, etc., for the work of this division.

J. Division 27 systems shall not occupy the same conduit/raceway with any other system or power

cables.

K. Provide installation, including electrical connections, cable pulling, testing and interfacing of

systems.

L. Deliver materials and equipment to project and store in original containers or cartons, properly

protected from elements.

M. Store items subject to moisture or temperature damage in dry, temperature controlled spaces.

N. Execute all work described in this specification and shown on drawings and all work dependent

upon, and necessary to, complete finish of the work so described or shown, in a workmanlike

manner using materials best adapted to purposes where such work or material is not specifically

mentioned.

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Provide cutting, fitting, repairing, patching and finishing of installed work.

1. Include installed work of other sections where it is necessary to disturb such work to permit

installation of electronic systems work.

2. Repair or replace existing or new work disturbed.

B. Avoid cutting, where possible, by setting sleeves or frames, and by requesting openings in

advance.

C. Before cutting, obtain approval of Architect/Engineer.

1. Use only approved methods.

2. Cut all holes neatly and as small as possible to admit work.

3. Do not weaken walls or floors; locate holes in concrete to miss structural sections.

D. Locate openings and sleeves to permit neat installation of conduits and equipment.

E. Do not remove or damage fireproofing materials.

1. Install hangers, inserts, supports, and anchors prior to installation of fireproofing.

2. Repair or replace fireproofing removed or damaged, at no extra cost.



27 05 00 - 11

3.3 COORDINATION

A. General:

1. Coordinate the work with the other trades to assure that where this work interfaces to other

trades, those interfaces are provided, complete and functional.

2. Verify all field conditions.

3. Positioning Members: Provide additional support or positioning members as required for the

proper installation and operation of equipment, materials and devices provided as part of

this work as approved by the Architect or Owner without additional expense.

4. Interface Devices: Provide all items necessary to complete this work in conformance with

the Contract Documents or the satisfaction of the Owner without any additional expense.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Install all equipment in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports.

1. Use structural supports suitable for equipment.

2. Check loadings and dimensions of equipment with shop drawings.

3. Do not cut, or weld to, building structural members.

C. Verify that equipment will fit support layouts indicated.

1. Where substitute equipment is used, revise indicated supports to fit at no additional cost.

D. Arrange for necessary openings to allow entry of equipment.

1. Where equipment cannot be installed as structure is being erected, provide and arrange for

building-in of boxes, sleeves or other devices to allow later installation.

E. Installation of communications electronics equipment shall not proceed until the progress of

construction has reached the following status in the area of installation:

1. Temperature and humidity are controlled.

2. Finished ceiling is installed.

3. Walls are finish coated with final paint treatment.

4. Floors are finished and sealed.

5. Millwork is completely installed, approved and signed off.

F. Equipment installed in areas where the previously described conditions have not been met and

maintained after equipment installation shall be removed and either cleaned or replaced at the

Architect/Engineer's discretion.

G. Install equipment to permit easy access for normal maintenance.

1. Maintain easy access to switches, pull boxes, panels, receptacles, etc.

2. Relocate items which interfere with access.

H. Provide tamper resistant security fasteners on all device plates, etc., and for all exposed

fasteners, in inmate areas within secure court holding area. These areas include but are not

limited to the following: all spaces within the vehicular sally port, inmate vestibule, holding

cells, visitation booths and movement corridors within facility secure perimeter and all other

areas as directed.

3.5 FINISHES (SEE DIVISION 09)

3.6 WIRING

A. All cable and wire:

1. Standard type available from more than one cable manufacturer.

2. Manufacturer and installer are responsible for system performance.

B. All cabling, wiring, conduits/raceways and equipment housings: In strict accordance with

recommendations of equipment manufacturer; finish and color of all face plates as directed by

Architect/Engineer.



27 05 00 - 12

C. Furnish and install all wiring and cable for communications systems, and perform all

connections and equipment terminations.

1. Check each cabling system run thoroughly for opens, shorts, faults, and other

discontinuities.

2. Test each system receptacle for continuity, ground condition, and voltage level prior to

allowing plug-in of system equipment.

3. All conductors from outgoing terminal blocks in control consoles, panels and/or systems

equipment cabinets to devices controlled to be continuous.

a. No splicing of conductors allowed.

4. Field device terminations to be per manufacturer's requirements.

a. Conductor to conductor connections to be fully insulated crimp on male/female tab type

or pin and sleeve type.

b. No conical spring connectors to be used.

D. Install communications systems cable in conduit 32 mm minimum, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Boxes: Provide a 6 inch loop for all wire and cable routed through pull boxes or distribution

panels. Cable loops and bends shall not be at a radius smaller than that recommended by the

manufacturer. Enlarge pull boxes as necessary to accommodate this requirement.


A. Perform indicated tests to demonstrate workmanship, operation, and performance.

1. Conduct tests in presence of Architect/Engineer, Owner and, if required inspectors of

agencies having jurisdiction.

2. Arrange date of tests in advance with Architect/Engineer, manufacturer and installer.

3. Give minimum of 1 week notice to all inspectors.

4. Furnish or arrange for use of electrical energy, steam, water, diesel fuel, or gas required for

tests.

B. Repair or replace equipment and systems found inoperative or defective and retest.

1. If equipment or system fails retest, replace it with products conforming to Contract

Documents.

2. Continue remedial measures and retests until satisfactory results are obtained.

C. Test equipment and systems as indicated for each item, unless otherwise recommended by

manufacturer.

3.8 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL TESTS

A. Prior to the time of substantial completion, an operational test, witnessed by a representative of

the Architect/Engineer and Owner, shall be held of each system comprising the total electronic

system to determine full compliance with the contract drawings. Provide all personnel,

equipment, instrumentation and communication equipment and include all costs of testing in the

contract.

B. The installer shall certify in writing that the systems are installed in compliance with the

manufacturer's recommendations, comply with the requirements of the contract documents and

are operating correctly. These written certifications shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer

Commissioning Authority and shall signify that the total electronic system is operationally tested

and ready for final acceptance testing by the Architect/Engineer.

C. Final acceptance tests of the total communications systems shall be conducted as directed by the

Architect/Engineer.



27 05 00 - 13

D. It shall be the responsibility of the Installer to submit for the Architect/Engineer's approval, a

proposed systems check list for use in final acceptance testing. This checklist shall consist of a

list of individual tasks on a device-by-device basis, organized into logical groups per system

being supplied. The checklist shall be submitted not later than 90 days prior to the scheduled

start of acceptance testing. Acceptance testing may not begin until the Architect/Engineer has

approved the form and content of the acceptance checklist.

3.9 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Inspect all equipment and put in good working order.

B. Clean all exposed and concealed items.

C. All equipment shall be clean and dust free.

3.10 PUTTING SYSTEMS IN OPERATION - START UP

A. Put all systems into satisfactory operation prior to final acceptance, at time agreed to by Owner

and Architect/Engineer.

B. Operate all systems in good working order for period of 10 working days prior to final

acceptance testing.

3.11 DEVICE MOUNTING SCHEDULE

A. Dimensions are to center of device unless otherwise indicated..

3.12 LABELING

A. Labeling:

1. All labeling shall be in accordance with TIA-606-B requirements.

END OF SECTION


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - STRUCTURED CABLING

27 10 00 - 1

SECTION 27 10 00

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - STRUCTURED CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Requirements of Drawings, General and Supplementary Conditions, Divisions 00 and 01 apply

to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, installation, and test equipment required to provide a complete

and operational Structured Cabling System.

B. References:

1. EIA/ECA-310-E - Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment, 2005.

2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA – 70), National Electrical Code (NEC), 2014.

3. ANSI/TIA-568-D – Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises, 2015.

4. ANSI/TIA-569-D Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces, 2015.

5. ANSI/TIA-606-B Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure, 2012.

6. ANSI/TIA-607-B – Generic Telecommunications Bonding and grounding (Earthing) for

Customer Premises, 2011.

7. ANSI/TIA-758-B - Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure

Standard, 2012.

8. UL 444 – Communications Cables, 2008.

9. UL 1666 - Standard for Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber

Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts, 2007.

10. UL 1778 Uninterruptible Power Systems.

C. Related Sections:

1. Basic Materials & Methods for Communications Systems: Section 27 05 00.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. There are three existing fiber optic cable runs that provide connectivity between existing

buildings that route through MMI. The MMI building will be demolished, and it is critical that

the fiber backbone connections between the existing buildings have as minimal downtime as

possible. These existing fiber runs include:

1. 2- 24 strand single mode fibers from room 0404 in Tower 4 to UNO

2. 1-24 strand single mode fibers from Hixson Lied to Annex 14.

3. 1- 96 strand single mode fibers from Hixson Lied to Buffett Cancer Center.

B. A new 4-4” conduit concrete-encased ductbank shall be provided as a new pathway for new

single mode fibers. New fibers shall be installed between existing fiber vaults as indicated on

the drawings. Coordinate the new Ductbank with the civil drawings, existing utilities, and

demolition shoring.

C. The drawings indicate the existing fiber routing based on limited field verification. Not all

existing copper and fiber cables were labeled. Contractor shall familiarize themselves with the

drawings and existing conditions prior to removal of any cable or construction. Contractor shall

communicate all copper or fiber cable removal with UNMC and receive UNMC IT approval

prior to removal of any multi-pair voice copper cable or fiber.



27 10 00 - 2

D. Base Fiber Scope - (Splicing):

1. New fiber shall be spliced in existing fiber vaults to the existing fibers for all three fiber

cable runs. Coordinate downtime with UNMC IT Department prior to any fiber outage.

Fiber splicing may occur after hours. Test all fibers from source to source after fiber

splicing and remove existing fiber after coordinating with UNMC IT department. Remove

all fiber connections to MMI.

2. UNMC has indicated that any existing multi-pair voice copper connections through MMI

are not used and shall be removed. Not all multi-pair voice copper cables are indicated.

Contractor shall field verify existing multi-pair copper cables that route through MMI and

remove the cable run from source to source. If removal of the copper cables results in a

spare conduit, provide a pull string in the conduit for future use.

E. Alternate #1 Fiber Scope - (New fiber point to point)

1. New fiber shall be provided from source to source. After new fiber has been installed,

terminated, and tested; coordinate with UNMC IT department for final fiber patching and

connectivity. After confirmation with UNMC IT department that network connectivity has

been reestablished, remove the existing fibers and rack mounted terminations.

2. The UNO fiber run is excluded from this alternate.

1.4 SUBMITTALS (SEE SECTION 27 05 00)

A. Shop drawings:

1. Complete wiring diagrams of components.

2. No submittal review will be conducted until receipt of certification.

1.5 WARRANTY (SEE SECTION 27 05 00)

1.6 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA (SEE SECTION 27 05 00)

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE (SEE SECTION 27 05 00)

1.8 OWNER PERSONNEL TRAINING (SEE SECTION 27 05 00)

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS (SEE SECTION 27 05 00)

A. Deliver spare parts in protective wrapping and packaging for proper storage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All communications components installed on this project will be UL or third party certified.

B. Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society

reference standards of the organizations, submit proof of such compliance.

C. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance.

D. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization,

competent to perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. The certificate shall

state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods

and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard.

E. Provide a complete system of telecommunications cabling and pathway components using star

topology.

F. Provide support structures and pathways, complete with outlets, cables, connecting hardware and

telecommunications cabinets/racks.



27 10 00 - 3

G. Cabling and interconnecting hardware and components for telecommunications systems shall be

UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified, and shall comply with NFPA 70

and conform to the requirements specified herein.

H. Provide connecting hardware and termination equipment in the Telecommunications Entrance

Facility, Telecommunication and I/T Equipment and Distribution Rooms (DRs) to facilitate

installation as shown on design drawings for terminating and cross-connecting permanent

cabling.

I. Provide telecommunications interconnecting hardware color coding in accordance with

ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A.

2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING

A. Cabling shall be UL listed for the application and shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568-D, and

NFPA 70.

B. Provide a labeling system for cabling as required by ANSI/TIA-606-B and UL 969.

C. Ship cable on reels or in boxes bearing manufacture date for UTP in accordance with ICEA S-

102-700 and optical fiber cables in accordance with ICEA S-83-596 for all cable used on this

project.

D. Cabling manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of installation shall not be used.

2.3 BACKBONE CABLING

A. Optical Fiber

1. Provide Reduced Water Peak (RWP) Single Mode Fiber Optic Cable in accordance with

ICEA S-83-596, ANSI/TIA-568-D, UL 1666 and NFPA 70.

2. Cable shall be imprinted with fiber count, fiber type and aggregate length at regular

intervals not to exceed 40 inches.

3. TIA-492CAAB, single-mode, 9/125-um diameter, 0.10 numerical aperture, tight buffered

fiber optic cable.

4. Provide single-mode fiber optic cable in counts and quantities as shown on drawings.

a. Single Mode:

1) 9/125 micron for backbone

2) LC type terminations

3) Termination colors shall match existing.

4) Cable color shall be orange.

5. Provide Optical Fiber Nonconductive Riser (OFNR) rated cable in accordance with NFPA

70 and UL 910.

6. Type OFNP may be substituted for type OFNR in accordance with NFPA 70.

7. The cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be in accordance with

ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-A.

8. Fiber installed outdoor shall be exterior rated.

B. Innerduct

1. Innerduct shall be UL Listed.

2. Innerduct shall be recognized per NEC Articles, 770 and 800 for Plenum, Riser and General

Purpose applications for optical fiber, and telecommunications cables.

3. Innerduct shall be listed under UL 1666 - Standard for Riser Application for Optical Fiber

Raceway.

4. Fabricate Raceway from precision extruded PVC resin.

5. Kevlar_ pull tape can be preinstalled in the 1 inch through 2 inch diameter.

6. The footage shall be sequentially marked.

7. Shall be available in ¾in (19.05mm) through 2in (50.8mm) diameters.



27 10 00 - 4

2.4 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL

A. Provide fiber optic panels in 1, 2 and 4RU versions for maintenance and cross-connecting of

optical fiber cables.

B. Panel shall be 17in (431.8mm) depth for high density fiber termination and/or splicing,

constructed of black powder-coated 16 gauge steel and polycarbonate plastic and be compatible

with an EIA/ECA-310-E 19in (482.6mm) equipment rack.

C. Fiber Optic adaptors and adaptor plates shall be the same type and configuration as those used

elsewhere in the system.

D. Panel shall have sliding tray which removes completely from enclosure forward and backward to

facilitate field terminations and splicing.

E. Each adaptor plate shall provide duplex single-mode LC adapters in accordance with TIA-604-

10-B with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves.

F. Provide dust cover for unused adapters.

G. The rear of each panel shall have a cable management tray a minimum of 8in (203.2mm) deep

with removable cover, incoming cable strain-relief and routing guides.

H. A 3ft (914.4mm) slack loop of fiber shall be provided within each panel, and panels shall

provide strain relief for cables.

I. Patch panels shall properly provide termination, splice storage, routing, radius limiting, cable

fastening, storage, and cross-connection.

J. Provide a minimum spare capacity of 25 percent in the installed patch panels.

K. Match existing fiber optic patch panels in Tower 4. Fiber optic patch panel in Tower 4 shall be

Panduit CPPLA48WBLY or CPPLA24WBLY.

L. Match existing fiber optic patch panels in Hixon-Lied. Fiber optic patch panel in Hixon-Lied

shall be OCC DCC2488/110Six or DCC488/110SIX.

M. Match existing fiber optic patch panels in BCC. Fiber optic patch panel in BCC shall be OCC

DCC2488/110Six or DCC488/110SIX.

2.5 OPTICAL FIBER ADAPTERS PANEL

A. Provide Mode optical fiber adapters suitable for duplex LC in accordance with TIA-604-10-B

with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves as indicated.

B. Provide dust cover for adapters.

C. Optical fiber adapters shall comply with TIA-455-21-A for 500 mating cycles.

D. Match existing Panduit equipment in Tower 4.

E. Match existing OCC equipment in Hixon-Lied.

F. Match existing OCC equipment in BCC.

2.6 OPTICAL FIBER CONNECTORS

A. Provide single-mode fiber optic Pigtails in accordance with TIA-455-21-A for fusion splicing of

all fiber optic strands.

B. Fiber optic pigtails shall be available in 3-meter lengths, made of OFNR fiber optic cable, and be

compliant with ANSI/TIA-568-D.

C. Single-mode LC pigtails shall connector styles in accordance with TIA-604-10-B in UPC polish

type.

D. Provide duplex LC connectors.



27 10 00 - 5

E. Match existing Panduit equipment in Tower 4.

F. Match existing OCC equipment in Hixon-Lied.

G. Match existing OCC equipment in BCC.

H. All connectors shall be built on .9 mm tight buffered cable.

I. Insertion loss shall average .3dB, but not exceed .5dB at 1310nm and 1550nm per mated pair.

J. Insertion loss guaranteed to be less than .5dB at 1310nm and 1550 nm per mated pair (single-

mode), typical insertion loss .3dB.

K. Return loss for single-mode UPC polish is greater than 55dB, with typical of 57dB.

2.7 OUTDOOR FIBER OPTIC SPLICE HARDWARE

A. Fiber optic splice hardware shall be Commscope FOSC 450.

B. Provide Fiber optic splice holders and sleeves to provide maximum protection for fiber optic

fusion splice connections from shock and vibration.

C. The Fiber Splice Sleeves shall meet the requirements for GR-1380 specifications.

D. Outer tubing shall meet MIL-I-23053/5 Class 2 requirements.

E. The sleeves shall feature a stainless steel strength member, polyolefin copolymer inner tube and

polyolefin outer tube with precise cut lengths and smooth ends.

F. Sleeves shall be available in Standard, Slim, Mini, and Micro styles.

G. The holders shall be available in foam or solid plastic with 6- and 12-fiber design options and

adhesive backs.

2.8 FACEPLATES

A. Telecommunications cover plates shall comply with UL 514C, FCC Part 68, ANSI/TIA-568-D;

flush design constructed of high impact fire-retardant plastic rated UL 94V-0, and be UL Listed.

B. The cover plate thermoplastic material shall match color of receptacle/switch cover plates

specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS.

C. The cover plate housing shall be a one-piece, single-gang flush mount style that fits standard

NEMA openings.

1. Panduit (White): CFPL2IWY

D. It shall provide two or four ports.

E. Provide blank modular inserts for unused ports.

F. Cover plates shall include station ID designation windows for each wall plate.

2.9 FIBER OPTIC ASSEMBLIES

A. Contractor shall supply factory assembled pre-connectorized cable assembly with LC type to

interface with the patch panel bulkhead feed-through receptacle.

B. Each fiber optic cable assembly shall be comprised of a duplex LC fiber connector terminated a

duplex single mode zip cord cable.

C. One duplex fiber optic cable assembly shall be supplied for each pair of fiber optic strands

installed as part of this project.

D. Return loss for single mode connectors shall be a minimum of minus 55dB.

E. Connector/cable interface on single-mode cable assemblies shall be able to withstand a tensile

force of 25 pounds without detrimental affects on the connector loss characteristics.



27 10 00 - 6

F. Each connectorized cable assembly shall have a loss of less than or equal to 0.3 dB.

G. Fiber optic cable assemblies shall be provided in the following lengths (as directed by

DOTComm):

1. 1 Meter - 25 percent of total fiber optic assemblies supplied.



2.10 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL

A. Provide as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

B. Cables passing through fire-rated floors or walls shall pass through fire-rated wiring devices

which contain an intumescent insert material that adjusts automatically to cable additions or

subtractions.

C. The device (per code requirements) shall include both internal and external firestopping.

D. Cables penetrating through fire-rated floors or walls shall utilize fire-rated pathway devices

capable of providing an F rating equal to the rating of the barrier in which the device is installed.

E. The device shall be tested for smoke leakage (L rating) and shall not require the use of any

optional sealing materials to achieve the published rating.

F. The device shall utilize a fire and smoke sealing system that automatically adjusts to the addition

or removal of cables.

2.11 LABELING MATERIALS

A. All communications components installed as part of this project shall be labeled in accordance

with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A.

B. All labels shall meet the visibility and durability requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A and be

pre-printed or laser printed.

C. Hand written labels are not acceptable.

D. Labels shall have white printing area and black print.

E. If cable jacket is white, provide cable label with printing area that is any color other than white,

preferably orange or yellow so that labels are easily distinguishable.

F. Labels shall be made with industrial adhesives that resist dirt and oil and have a split backing for

easy removal.

G. Labels shall be constructed of materials pursuant to labeling application as follows:

1. Flexible Nylon: shall be used for curved surfaces (wire and cable) and rough surfaces for

indoor applications flexible nylon memory resistant material shall be used.

2. Permanent Polyester Labels: Shall be used for flat surfaces permanent polyester.

3. Vinyl: Shall be used for outdoor applications.

4. Non-adhesive Polypropylene: May be used for ID window labels and magnifier label

holders.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION (SEE SECTION 27 05 00)

A. Install telecommunications cabling and pathway systems, including the horizontal and backbone

cable, pathway systems, telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies, and associated

hardware in accordance with ANSI/TIA-568-D, ANSI/TIA-569-D, NFPA 70, and UL standards

as applicable.



27 10 00 - 7

B. Pathways and outlet boxes shall be installed as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

C. Install telecommunications cabling with copper media in accordance with the following criteria

to avoid potential electromagnetic interference between power and telecommunications

equipment.

D. The interference ceiling shall not exceed 3.0 volts per meter measured over the usable bandwidth

of the telecommunications cabling.

E. Cabling shall be run with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with

terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

3.2 BACKBONE CABLING

A. Fiber Optic Backbone Cabling

1. Install distribution backbone optical fiber in innerduct through indicated pathways between

existing Radio Equipment Room/ER (within existing Sheriff’s Office Building, new MDF

Room #C101 (within new Jail) and each IDF room.

2. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended bending radii and pull tension.

3. Prepare cable for pulling by cutting outer jacket 10in (254mm) leaving strength members

exposed for approximately 10in (254mm).

4. Twist strength members together and attach to pulling eye.

5. Vertical cable support intervals shall be in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.

6. Backbone fibers shall be fusion-spliced to factory-produced pigtails.

B. Innerduct

1. Install innerduct to house fiber Riser cable as indicated on the drawings.

2. Multiple fibers counts can be provided innerduct.

3. Single mode fiber shall be installed in different innerducts.

4. Innerduct colors shall match fiber colors.

5. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened package until installation.

6. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction, and NEC, Article 770 and 800.

7. Install fittings, accessories, etc., as necessary for a complete system.

3.3 COPPER PATCH PANELS

A. Patch panels shall be mounted in equipment cabinets and racks with sufficient ports to

accommodate the installed cable plant plus 25 percent spares.

B. Copper cable entering a patch panel shall be secured to the panel as recommended by the

manufacturer by means of strain relief bars to prevent movement of the cable.

3.4 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANELS

A. Fiber optic cable loop shall be 3ft (914.4mm) in length.

B. The outer jacket of each cable entering a patch panel shall be secured to the panel to prevent

movement of the fibers within the panel, using clamps or brackets specifically manufactured for

that purpose.

C. Fiber optic cable shall be fusion spliced in accordance with GR-1380 to factory pre-terminated

LC type pigtails.

D. Splices shall be installed in spicing hardware specifically designed for the fiber optic patch

panels used.



27 10 00 - 8

3.5 LABELING

A. Provide labeling for all communications system components in accordance with DOTComm’s

Standards

1. XX-YY-ZZ (Floor/Closet – Patch Panel – Cable Count)..

B. Handwritten labeling is unacceptable.

C. Stenciled lettering for voice and data circuits shall be provided using thermal ink transfer

process.

D. Pathways

1. Label pathways using the recommended identifiers shown in Annex B of the

ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A Administration.

2. Pathways shall be marked at each endpoint and at all intermediate pull or junction boxes.

3. In the case of partitioned pathways (i.e. innerduct) each partition shall have a unique

identifier.

4. Pathway label shall be adhesive type labels.

E. Backbone Cables

1. Backbone feed cables shall be marked within 12in (304.8) of each endpoint.

2. Any cable installed in conduit shall be labeled at all intermediate pull or junction boxes.

3. Use adhesive type labels for all communications cable labels.

4. Cable labels shall be affixed to cables - marking directly on the cable is not permitted.

F. Patch Panels

1. All cabling shall be terminated to patch panels.

2. All new cabling shall be Cat. 6 or Cat. 6A (for WAPs).

3. All patch panel connections shall be labeled using color coded labels with identifiers in

accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A.

4. Patch panels shall be labeled with an identifier and all individual ports shall be labeled with

an identifier.

5. Patch panels ports may be labeled with adhesive type labels or non adhesive type labels may

be used in the panel clear label strip.

G. Faceplates

1. All work area outlet faceplate labels shall indicate the horizontal link identifier for each

cable that it houses.

2. For faceplates that use clear plastic cover strips a non adhesive tag may me used.

H. Firestopping

1. Each firestopping location shall be labeled at each location where firestopping is installed,

on each side of the penetrated fire barrier, within 300 mm (12 in.) of the firestopping

material.

3.6 DOCUMENTATION

A. As-Built

1. Vendor shall provide an “as-built” Visio floor plan electronic cop, or other agreed upon

document, with cable labeling identification, as outlined in section 3.6 a 1 for each category

cable.

2. Cable certification document shall be performed per BICSI/ANSI 002 2011 for all vertical

and horizontal cable pulls.



27 10 00 - 9

3.7 TESTING

A. General

1. Perform telecommunications cabling inspection, verification, and performance tests in

accordance with ANSI/TIA-568-D.

2. Perform optical fiber field inspection tests via attenuation measurements on factory reels

and provide results along with manufacturer certification for factory reel tests.

3. Remove failed cable reels from project site upon attenuation test failure.

B. Inspection

1. Visually inspect Category UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for UL or third party

certification markings.

2. Inspect cabling terminations in telecommunications rooms and at workstations to confirm

color code for T568A pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm

compliance with ANSI/TIA-568-D, ANSI/TIA-568-D.

3. Visually confirm Category 6 UTP marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and

patch panels.

C. Verification Tests

1. For single-mode optical fiber, perform optical fiber end-to-end attenuation tests in

accordance with ANSI/TIA-568-D and TIA-526-7 using Method A, Optical Power Meter

and Light Source Method B, OTDR for single-mode optical fiber.

2. Perform verification acceptance tests.

D. Performance Tests

1. Copper Backbone

a. Test all high pair count copper cables for continuity, opens, shorts, reverses and crossed

pairs.

2. Cat-6 and 6A UTP

a. Perform Category 6 link tests in accordance with ANSI/TIA-568-D.

b. Tests shall include wire map, length, insertion loss, NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT,

PSELFEXT, return loss, propagation delay, and delay skew.

3. Optical fiber Links.

a. Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests in accordance with ANSI/TIA-568-D.

END OF SECTION

D I V I S I O N 3 1

EARTHWORK


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package EARTH MOVING

31 20 00 - 1

SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Preparing subgrades.

2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.

3. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to

support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary

flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and di-

mensions indicated.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and

electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the

ground surface.

I. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt

pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement

concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or

backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground ser-

vices within buildings.

1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless

permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility ser-

vices according to requirements indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not availa-

ble from excavations.



31 20 00 - 2

B. All soil materials shall be in accordance with the City of Omaha Standard Specifications for

Public Works Construction (2020), and all modifications thereafter.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for

marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm)

thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork

operations.

B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, de-

bris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Sec-

tion "Site Clearing."

C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31 Sec-

tion "Site Clearing." during earthwork operations.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface

and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil

materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be au-

thorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and

rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25

mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and re-

moving concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and

subgrades.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or

conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than

top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of

pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of

pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp ob-

jects along trench subgrade.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other un-

yielding bearing material, 4 inches (100 mm) deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding course.



31 20 00 - 3

3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Proof-roll subgrade below the future building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired

equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or satu-

rated subgrades.

B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities, as directed by Engineer, without additional compensation.

C. All subgrade inspections shall be in accordance with the geotechnical report prepared for this

project by Terracon Consulting, Inc., dated September 2, 2021, and all modifications thereafter.

3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.

Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of

remaining trees.

3.8 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding

course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings,

and bodies of conduits.

C. Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30

inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase

piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing

roadway subbase.

D. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm)

in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides

and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of pip-

ing or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

E. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

F. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6

inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.9 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill

material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.

2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.

3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.

4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.

5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

3.10 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Soil moisture control shall be in accordance with the geotechnical report prepared for this project

by Terracon Consulting, Inc., dated September 2, 2021, and all modifications thereafter.



31 20 00 - 4

3.11 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Compaction of Soil Backfills and Fills shall be in accordance with the City of Omaha Standard

Specifications for Public Works Construction (2020), and all modifications thereafter. Specifi-

cally:

B. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight

according to ASTM D 698: VERIFY WITH GEOTECH REPORT

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches

of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent and granular

material at 95 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 8 inches below subgrade and compact each lay-

er of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and com-

pact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 98 per-

cent and granular backfill at 92 percent.

3.12 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply

with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish

subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested

with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.


A. Field Quality Control shall be in accordance with the City of Omaha Standard Specifications for

Public Works Construction (2020), and all modifications thereafter.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing

agency to perform field quality-control testing.

C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with

subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with re-

quirements.

D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed

to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing sub-

grades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by

Architect.

E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,

ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable.

F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of com-

paction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; re-

compact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.14 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep

free of trash and debris.



31 20 00 - 5

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed

surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent con-

struction operations or weather conditions.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, back-

fill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,

and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.15 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,

trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION


Demolition & Site Prep of Former JPL-MMI Property IFC Package APPENDIX A - HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REPORT (FLYSHEET)

00 - 1

APPENDIX A - HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REPORT (FLYSHEET)

END OF SECTION

www.amienvironmental.com

8802 South 135th Street, Suite 100 Omaha, NE 68138

800.828.8487 402.397.5001 402.397.3313 (fax)

ASBESTOS, LEAD BASED PAINT & HAZARDOUS BUILDING MATERIALS PRE-DEMOLITION INSPECTION REPORT

Munroe-Meyer Institute & Former JP Lord School

444 & 330 South 44th Street, Omaha, NE 68105 AMI Project No.: 20-275

January 8th, 2021

1. SURVEY OVERVIEW During the month of December 2020, two (2) building structures located at the above referenced location were inspected for Asbestos-Containing Materials (ACMs), Lead-Based Paint (LBP) and Hazardous Building Materials (HBM) by representatives of AMI Environmental (AMIE). The inspection was conducted in preparation for demolition of the buildings. The inspection was directed by Mr. Colin Lauenroth of AMIE in accordance with regulatory requirements and generally accepted industry methods. Copies of applicable requisite training certificates and State of Nebraska License for Mr. Lauenroth are provided as attachments. Purpose, Scope and Limitations The purpose and scope of the inspection was to identify, and sample suspect ACMs and LBPs present in the buildings that may be impacted by the planned demolition. HBMs were documented only; no sampling or analysis was performed. The site inspection included all accessible interior areas and exterior surfaces of the structures with the exception coring of the roofing systems that may compromise the roof function. Roof coring for sampling will require coordination at some time prior to demolition. Due to the full occupancy of the facilities, samples were not taken where doing so would result in objectional damage to the surfaces, structures, or where institutional barriers preclude access. This report is provided for the sole use of the University of Nebraska Medical Center (UNMC). Use of this report by any other parties will be at such party's sole risk, and AMI Environmental disclaims liability for any such use or reliance by third parties. This service was performed exercising the ordinary skill and competence of consulting professionals in relevant disciplines in this region. The results presented in this report are indicative of conditions only during the time of the sampling period and only of the specific areas referenced. The asbestos inspection was conducted in accordance with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) National Emission Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) regulations (ref.: 40 CFR, Part 61), following criteria established for identifying asbestos-containing building materials that may be impacted by planned demolition activities; applicable protocols established by the Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) (ref.: 40 CFR 763). The State of Nebraska accepts EPA AHERA training for asbestos inspectors and does have a state licensing requirement for asbestos inspectors. There is no licensing requirement for lead paint sampling in non-HUD facilities.

Report –Asbestos, Lead-Based Paint & Hazardous Building Materials AMI No. 20-275 Munroe-Meyer Institute & Former JP Lord School January 8th, 2021

444 & 330 South 44th Street, Omaha, NE 68105 Page 2 of 5



800.828.8487 402.397.5001 402.397.3313 (fax)

Asbestos Inspection The USEPA and the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) define ACMs as any material that contains greater than one percent (>1%) asbestos, as determined by visual area estimation (microscopic analysis). The State of Nebraska follows the EPA standard. Some materials contain one percent or less asbestos. While these materials are not classified as ACMs by the USEPA and State of Nebraska, they are still regulated by OSHA.

Bulk Sampling A total of three-hundred and ninety-four (394) asbestos bulk samples were collected and submitted for laboratory analysis from suspect materials identified during the asbestos inspection. Laboratory analysis was performed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. utilizing Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM). EMSL participates in the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) and is accredited by the American Industrial Hygiene Association Laboratory Accreditation Program (AIHA-LAP). The existing former JP Lord Elementary USEPA Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) Inspection Reports for the former JP Lord Elementary School, provided by the Omaha Public Schools, were also used. Please refer to Table 1 – Asbestos-Containing Material Sampling Table for a complete listing of all suspect materials sampled and analyzed for asbestos. The laboratory’s analytical reports are provided as an attachment.

Lead-Based Paint Inspection The LBP inspection included visual identification of homogenous paint applications and bulk (chip) sampling of the paint(s). While the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) promulgates guidelines for LBP inspections in child occupied facilities, there are no formal guidelines for non-HUD regulated inspections. Thus, the LBP inspection was conducted in accordance with generally accepted industry standards and practices. Additional aspects of the inspection methodology are discussed below.

Homogenous Paint Applications are significant paint applications that are visually distinct by their color and uniformity. Significant paint applications do not include incidental occurrences of paint such as isolated occurrences of accent trim, artistic paints, etc. While visual inspection alone cannot generally identify sub-layers of paint, these applications are often identified during the chip sampling process.

Lead-Based Paint (LBP)

Pursuant to Federal Register, Vol. 61, No. 169, LBP is defined as paint or other surface coatings containing equal to or more than 0.5 percent lead by weight.

Paint Chip Sampling One-hundred and three (103) chip samples were collected from one-hundred and three (103) significant and visually distinct paint applications. Laboratory analysis was performed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. utilizing Flame Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry (SW 846 3050B/7000B). EMSL is accredited by the National Lead Laboratory





800.828.8487 402.397.5001 402.397.3313 (fax)

Accreditation Program (NLLAP) and American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) Environmental Lead Laboratory Accreditation Program accreditation number is 100194. Please refer to Table 2 – Lead Paint Sampling Table for a complete listing of the paint applications identified and sampled for lead. The laboratory’s analytical reports are provided as an attachment.

Hazardous Building Materials (HBM) Inventory The inspection included identification of common equipment, components and/or substances that will require special handling and disposal, or recycling at the time of demolition. These items are identified in Table 3 – Miscellaneous Hazardous Materials Table 3 provided herein as an attachment. No HBM sampling or analysis was performed. 2. SUMMARY OF INSPECTION FINDINGS Asbestos Inspection Findings and Abatement Cost Estimate ◼ Materials with Asbestos in concentrations greater than one percent (>1%.)

The following asbestos containing materials were found inside and on the exterior of the Munroe-Meyer Institute:

• Thermal system insulation (Mudded pipe fittings, Pipe Wrap, and Mudded Insulation). These pipes run throughout the tunnels and continue up and around all three floors of the original Hattie B. Munroe and the C.L. Meyer Building. These pipes can be found in wall chases and above ceilings.

• Interior window caulk and glazing. This caulking/glazing can be found on all interior windows in the original Hattie B. Munroe and the C.L. Meyer Building.

• Black, pipe penetrations located in the tunnels of the original Hattie B. Munroe and the C.L. Meyer Building.

• Popcorn Ceiling Texture and white ceiling texture located in the original Hattie B. Munroe and the C.L. Meyer Building.

• Black mastic located under the maroon flooring material in the C.L. Meyer Building.

• 9”x9” and 12”x12” vinyl floor tiles were found in both the original Hattie B. Munroe and the C.L. Meyer Building.

• Black asbestos containing mastic was found under some of the floor tiles, but not all floor tiles.

• Drywall seam caulk located in various places in the C.L. Meyer building.

• Interior door caulk located on all exterior doors in the C.L. Meyer building.

• Exterior window caulk located on the original Hattie. B. Munroe building, the Hattie B. Munroe Addition 1 and the C. L. Meyer Building.

• Vent caulk located in the South East corner of the C.L. Meyer building.

• Roof coating, located on the C.L. Meyer roof.

• Ventilation exhaust chimney coating and transite paneling located on the roof of the original Hattie B. Munroe building.

• AHU gasket located on the first floor of C. L. Meyer.

• Fire doors were not sampled, but they are assumed to be asbestos containing material.





800.828.8487 402.397.5001 402.397.3313 (fax)

The following asbestos containing materials were found inside and on the exterior of the former JP Lord School Building:

• 9”x9” and 12”x12” vinyl floor tiles and associated black mastic located in the classrooms, offices, and the gym.

• Black sink undercoating was found in the JP Lord classrooms.

• Seam mastic was found on the insulated box in the JP Lord basement mechanical room.

• Thermal system insulation mastic was found on the pipe joints in the JP Lord basement mechanical room and crawl space.

• Window caulk located in the stairwell leading down to the basement mechanical room.

• Mudded pipe fittings and air-cell thermal system insulation located in the JP Lord attic and in the wall chase.

• CMU wall seam caulk located behind the stage.

• Exterior seam caulks, Located on the JP Lord roof.

• Exterior transite paneling located on the overhang around JP Lord

• Exterior door and window caulk/glazing located on windows and doors.

• Transite paneling located on the back of the bookshelves near the windows in the classrooms.

• Fire doors were not sampled, but they are assumed to be asbestos containing material located throughout JP Lord.

• Chalk board adhesive was not sampled, but it is assumed to be an asbestos containing material.

• Wire insulation was not sampled due to safety concerns, but it is assumed to be an asbestos containing material.

Estimated Total Asbestos Abatement Cost………….........................................$525,000.00

Lead-Based Paint Inspection Findings ◼ Paint applications containing equal to or greater than 0.5% lead by weight were

detected in the following applications.

• Stair and ramp paint, gray, located in JP Lord behind the stage and the stairs down to the mechanical room.

• Structural steel paint, gray, located above the ceiling in the stairwell down to the mechanical room in JP Lord.

• Pipe wrap paint, yellow, located in the mechanical rooms throughout the Munroe-Meyer Institute.

• Metal pipe paint, yellow, located in mechanical rooms throughout the Munroe-Meyer Institute.

• Metal railing paint, gray, located in mechanical rooms.

• Electric conduit paint, light green, located in the mechanical rooms throughout the Munroe-Meyer Institute.





800.828.8487 402.397.5001 402.397.3313 (fax)

Hazardous Building Materials Findings ◼ There were various suspect hazardous building materials (HBMs) located at

the facility including light fixture components, emergency lighting, and miscellaneous chemicals located in the buildings. Refer to table 3 for a list of HBMs and the estimated quantities of these materials.

Attachments

1. Table 1 - Asbestos-Containing Material Sampling Table & Test Results 2. Asbestos-Containing Material Sampling Photo Log 3. Asbestos Lab Results 4. Table 2 - Lead Paint Sampling Table & Test Results 5. Lead Paint Sampling Photo Log 6. Lead Paint Lab Results 7. Table 3 – Miscellaneous Hazardous Materials 8. Inspector Credentials

Table 1 – Asbestos Material Sampling Table

NA - Not Available F – Friable

NF – Non-Friable

SM – Surfacing Material TSI – Thermal System Insulation

MM – Miscellaneous Material

ND – Non-Detect NS – Not Sampled

SFP – Stop on First Positive (Not Analyzed)

PS – Previously Sampled PACM – Presumed asbestos containing material.

ACMs & PACMs identified in bold & shading.

Munroe-Meyer Institute & Former JP Lord School Table 1 – Asbestos Materials Sampling Table

DATE: January 8, 2021 AMI Project #20-275 Page - 1

HM No.

Related

HM No

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Material Location

Sample

No.

%

Type

F /

NF

Cond

Est.

Qty.

Comment

MM-01 Sink Under Coating Black 1 JP Lord Classrooms AQ-01 5% Chrysotile NF Good 32 SF

MM-02 MM-02A,

MM-02 B

Insulation Brown 2 JP Lord Basement, Mechanical

Room

AP-10 ND Insulated Box in

Mechanical Room

MM-02A Wrap White 2 JP Lord Basement, Mechanical

Room

AP-10 ND Insulated Box in

Mechanical Room

MM-02B Seam Mastic White 2 JP Lord Basement, Mechanical

Room

AP-10 3% Chrysotile NF Good Whole

Box

Insulated Box in

Mechanical Room

MM-03 TSI Pipe Joint Mastic White 3 JP Lord Basement, Mechanical

Room and Crawl Space

AP-11 3% Chrysotile NF Good ~120 EA 60 in Mech. Room, 60

in Crawl Space

MM-04 Window Caulk White 4 Stairs Down to Mechanical

Room

AP-16 5% Chrysotile NF <10%

Damaged

8 LF Former Window

TSI-01 Mudded Pipe Fitting White 5 JP Lord Attic and Wall Chase AS 21&AS-22 5% Chrysotile F Good 37 EA 14 in Attic Area, 23 in

North Pipe Chase

MM-05 CMU Wall Seam Caulk Tan 6 JP Lord, Behind Stage AQ-39&AQ-40 3% Chrysotile NF Good 35 LF NW Corner of Room

Behind Stage

TSI-02 TSI-02A Mudded Pipe Fitting

Elbows

Gray 7 MMI Pedestrian Tunnel AT-52 80% Chrysotile F Good ~17 EA Yellow 5lb Steam Pipe

TSI-02 Pipe Wrap Yellow/White 7 MMI Pedestrian Tunnel AT-52 ND

TSI-03 TSI-03A Pipe Wrap Blue/White 8 MMI Pedestrian Tunnel AT-55 ND

TSI-03A Mudded Pipe Fitting

Elbows

Gray 8 MMI Pedestrian Tunnel AT-55 30% Chrysotile F Poor 6 EA

TSI-04 TSI-04A,

TSI-04B

Pipe Wrap Blue 9 MMI Pedestrian Tunnel AT-56 ND



NF – Non-Friable









HM No.

Related

HM No

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Material Location

Sample

No.

%

Type

F /

NF

Cond

Est.

Qty.

Comment

TSI-04A Air Cell Insulation Tan 9 MMI Pedestrian Tunnel AT-56 ND

TSI-04B Mudded Insulation White 9 MMI Pedestrian Tunnel AT-56 30% Chrysotile F Poor 360 LF Light Blue and Dark

Blue Mudded

Insulation Running the

Length of the Pipes

TSI-05 TSI-05A Pipe Wrap Yellow 10 C.L. Meyer (CLM) Basement

Mechanical Room/Tunnels

AK-58 ND

TSI-05A Mudded

Insulation/Fittings

White 10 C.L. Meyer (CLM) Basement


AK-58 40%

2%

Amosite

Chrysotile

F <10%

Damaged

Yellow, 100lb Steam

Pipe

TSI-06 TSI-06A TSI Mastic Beige 11 C.L. Meyer (CLM) Basement


AK-59 ND

TSI-06A Mudded Elbow White 11 C.L. Meyer (CLM) Basement


AK-59 20%

15%

Amosite

Chrysotile

F <10%

Damaged

2” Pipe Branching Off

of 5lb Steam Pipe

TSI-07 TSI-07A Pipe Wrap Yellow 12 C.L. Meyer (CLM) Basement


AK-60 ND



AK-60 25%

5%

Amosite

Chrysotile

F <10%

Damaged

100lb Steam Pipe

TSI-08 TSI-08A Pipe Wrap Brown 13 C.L. Meyer (CLM) Basement


AK-63 ND



AK-63 15%

25%

Amosite

Chrysotile

F Good Steam Return Pipe

MM-06 Pipe Penetration Black 14 C.L. Meyer (CLM) Tunnels AK-64 5% Chrysotile NF Good 10 EA

TSI-09 TSI-09A Pipe Wrap Tan 15 C.L. Meyer (CLM) Tunnels,

Walls, and Ceilings

AK-66 ND



NF – Non-Friable









HM No.

Related

HM No

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Material Location

Sample

No.

%

Type

F /

NF

Cond

Est.

Qty.

Comment

TSI-09A Mudded Elbow Gray 15 C.L. Meyer (CLM) Tunnels,

Walls, and Ceilings

AK-66 10%

10%

Amosite

Chrysotile

F Good ~700 EA 2” Pipe. Runs

Throughout CLM

Tunnels, Wall Chases

and Above Plaster

Ceilings on All Floors

TSI-10 TSI-10A Pipe Wrap Brown 16 C.L. Meyer (CLM) Basement


AK-67 ND

TSI-10A Mudded Insulation White 16 C.L. Meyer (CLM) Basement


AK-67 30%

5%

Amosite

Chrysotile

F Good ~3000

LF

Branch off Return

Steam Pipe. Mudded

Insulated Pipes Run

Throughout CLM

TSI-11 TSI-11A,

TSI-11B

TSI Mastic White 17 CLM, 1st Floor, S. Mechanical

Room

AL-74 ND

TSI-11A Pipe Wrap Brown 17 CLM, 1st Floor, S. Mechanical

Room

AL-74 ND

TSI-11B Mudded Elbow Gray 17 CLM, 1st Floor, S. Mechanical

Room

AL-74 20% Chrysotile F Good Pipes Continue into

Pedestrian Tunnel and

Basement Tunnels

TSI-12 TSI-12A Pipe Wrap Sky Blue 18 CLM, 1st Floor, S. Mechanical

Room

AL-76 2% Chrysotile F Good Pipes Continue into

Pedestrian Tunnel and

Basement Tunnels

TSI-12A Mudded Elbow White 18 CLM, 1st Floor, S. Mechanical

Room

AL-76 ND

SM-01 Popcorn Ceiling Texture White 19 CLM 1st Floor Hallway AL-87, AL-88,

AL-89

2% Chrysotile F Good 2200SF On all 3 CLM Floors

MM-07 MM-07A Flooring Material Red 20 CLM, Rms: 1099A, 1021A,

1021B

AL-92 ND



NF – Non-Friable









HM No.

Related

HM No

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Material Location

Sample

No.

%

Type

F /

NF

Cond

Est.

Qty.

Comment

MM-07A Mastic Black 20 CLM, Rms: 1099A, 1021A,

1021B

AL-92 4% Chrysotile NF Poor 260 SF Exit Area

MM-08 MM-08A 12”x12” Vinyl Floor Tile

(VFT)

Tan 21 CLM, Rm. 1007 AL-100 2% Chrysotile NF Good 500 SF Under Carpet

MM-08A Mastic Black 21 CLM, Rm. 1007 AL-100 ND

MM-09 Interior Window Caulk Gray 22 CLM, 1st Floor, Play Area AL-105 5% Chrysotile NF <10%

Damaged

60 LF

TSI-13 TSI-13A Pipe Wrap Green 23 Hattie B. Munroe (HBM) 1st

Floor, Mechanical Room 1042

and Tunnels

AA-108 ND

TSI-13A Mudded Elbow White 23 Hattie B. Munroe (HBM) 1st

Floor, Mechanical Room 1042

and Tunnels

AA-108 87% Chrysotile F Good

TSI-14 TSI-14A Pipe Wrap Yellow 24 HBM, 1st Floor Mechanical

Room 1042 and Tunnels

AA-111 ND

TSI-14A Mudded Elbow White 24 HBM, 1st Floor Mechanical


AA-111 86% Chrysotile F Good ~250 EA Pipes Run Throughout

Original HBM

Building (Tunnels,

Wall Chases, and

Above Ceilings)

TSI-15 TSI-15A Pipe Wrap Blue 25 HBM, 1st Floor Mechanical


AA-114 ND



AA-114 89% Chrysotile F Good ~800 LF Pipes Have Mudded

Insulation, Runs the

Entire Length of the

Pipes Throughout

Original HBM

Building



NF – Non-Friable









HM No.

Related

HM No

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Material Location

Sample

No.

%

Type

F /

NF

Cond

Est.

Qty.

Comment

TSI-16 TSI-16A Pipe Wrap Brown 26 HBM, 1st Floor Mechanical


AA-116 ND



AA-116 7% Chrysotile F Good

MM-10 Pipe Penetration Black 27 HBM Tunnels AA-118 9% Chrysotile NF Good 2 EA

MM-11 MM-11A 12”x12” VFT Tan 28 HBM Elevator AA-127 6% Chrysotile NF Good 80 SF South Elevator

MM-11A Mastic Black 28 HBM Elevator AA-127 ND South Elevator

MM-12 Interior Window Caulk Gray 29 HBM All Windows AD-167 6% Chrysotile NF Good 2050 LF All Older Windows on

2nd and 3rd Floors of

Original HBM

Building

SM-02 Popcorn Ceiling Texture White 30 CLM 2nd Floor Hallway AM-177, AM-

178, AM-179

3% Chrysotile F Good 2100 SF

MM-13 MM-13A 9”x9” VFT Pink 31 CLM 2nd Floor Hallway (E to

W by Elevator)

AM-183 3% Chrysotile NF Good 650 SF

MM-13A Mastic Black 31 CLM 2nd Floor Hallway (E to W

by Elevator)

AM-183 ND

MM-14 MM-14A 9”x9” VFT Pink 32 CLM 2nd Floor Offices AM-186 3% Chrysotile NF Good Rm. 2005 and

Surrounding Rooms

Under Carpet

MM-14A Mastic Black 32 CLM 2nd Floor Offices AM-186 ND

MM-15 MM-15A 9”x9” VFT Green

33 CLM 2nd Floor Main Hallway

(N to S) and North Hallway, (E

to W)

AM-193 3% Chrysotile NF Good 1900 SF Under Carpet



NF – Non-Friable









HM No.

Related

HM No

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Material Location

Sample

No.

%

Type

F /

NF

Cond

Est.

Qty.

Comment

MM-15A Mastic Black 33 CLM 2nd Floor Main Hallway (N

to S) and North Hallway, (E to

W)

AM-193 ND

MM-16 MM-16A 12”x12” VFT Pink/Brown 34 CLM, 2nd Floor Hallway Near

Room 2028

AM-194 4% Chrysotile NF Good 800 SF Under Carpet

MM-16A Mastic Black 34 CLM, 2nd Floor Hallway Near

Room 2028

AM-194 5% Chrysotile NF Good 800 SF

MM-17 Interior Window Caulk Gray 35 HBM 3rd Floor AG-224 4% Chrysotile NF Good All Interior Windows

in HBM (Original

Building)

MM-18 MM-18A 9”x9” VFT Green/Tan

Camo

36 HBM 3rd Floor, Rms: 3046 &

3050 Closet

AG-227 5% Chrysotile NF Good 20 SF

MM-18A Mastic Black 36 HBM 3rd Floor, Rms: 3046 &

3050 Closet

AG-227 ND

SM-03 Popcorn Ceiling Texture White 37 HBM 3rd Floor Hallway AG-229, AG-

230, AG-231

3% Chrysotile F Good 3300 SF 2nd and 3rd Floors

MM-19 MM-19A 12”x12” VFT Tan 38 CLM 3rd Floor Hallway by

Rm. 3028

AN-238 3% Chrysotile NF Good 550 SF Under Carpet

MM-19A Mastic Black 38 CLM 3rd Floor Hallway by

Rm. 3028

AN-238 5% Chrysotile NF Good 550 SF

MM-20 Seam Caulk

(Drywall/Ductwork)

Tan 39 CLM Various Areas Above

Ceiling Tiles

AN-241 2% Chrysotile NF Good Through

out

SM-04 Popcorn Ceiling Texture White 40 CLM 3rd Floor Hallway

(Above Drop Ceiling)

AN-246, AN-

247, AN-248


MM-21 Interior Window Caulk Gray 41 Throughout CLM AN-249 3% Chrysotile NF Good ~1100

LF



NF – Non-Friable









HM No.

Related

HM No

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Material Location

Sample

No.

%

Type

F /

NF

Cond

Est.

Qty.

Comment

MM-22 Interior Window Glaze Gray 42 Throughout CLM AN-250 2% Chrysotile NF Good ~2200

LF

MM-23 MM-23A 9”x9” VFT Green and

Bone

43 CLM 3rd Floor, Rm. 3016C AN-255 5% Chrysotile NF Good 10 SF

MM-23A Mastic Black 43 CLM 3rd Floor, Rm. 3016C AN-255 ND

MM-24 Window Glaze Gray 44 CLM, 3rd Floor, S. Entryway AN-258 2% Chrysotile NF Good Former Exterior

Windows (New

Entryway)

MM-25 Window Frame Caulk White 45 CLM, 3rd Floor, S. Entryway AN-260 2% Chrysotile NF Good Former Exterior

Windows (New

Entryway)

MM-26 9”x9” VFT Tan 46 CLM, 1st Floor Offices AL-310 10% Chrysotile NF Good ~2200

SF

Under Carpet

SM-05 Ceiling Texture White 47 CLM, 1st Floor Offices (Rms:

1029, 1028, 1026, 1027, 1024,

1025)

AL-312, AL-

313, AL-314


MM-27 Door Caulk Gray 48 CLM, 1st Floor, Interior Caulk

on Exterior Doors

AL-315 5% Chrysotile NF Good 20 LF

MM-28 MM-28A 9”x9” VFT Pink with Rust 49 CLM 1st Floor Offices/Rooms AL-316 5% Chrysotile NF Good 50 SF

MM-28A Mastic Black 49 CLM 1st Floor Offices/Rooms AL-316 ND

MM-29 MM-29A 12”x12” VFT Confetti 50 CLM 1st Floor, Rm. 1020 AL-319 ND

MM-29A Mastic Black 50 CLM 1st Floor, Rm. 1020 AL-319 2% Chrysotile NF Good 350 SF

MM-30 MM-30A 12”x12” VFT Tan Overcast 51 JP Lord Main Electrical Room AQ-320 7% Chrysotile NF Good 300 SF



NF – Non-Friable









HM No.

Related

HM No

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Material Location

Sample

No.

%

Type

F /

NF

Cond

Est.

Qty.

Comment

MM-30A Mastic Black 51 JP Lord Main Electrical Room AQ-320 5% Chrysotile NF Good 300 SF

MM-31 Exterior Window Caulk Gray 52 CLM N. Side Exterior, 2nd

Floor

AX-329 5% Chrysotile NF Poor All Exterior Windows

on CLM

MM-32 Exterior Vent Caulk Cream/White 53 JP Lord Roof AR-332 4% Chrysotile NF Poor 70 LF

MM-33 Exterior Seam Caulk Gray/Tan 54 JP Lord Elevated Roof

Perimeter

AR-333 3% Chrysotile NF Poor 35 LF At Perimeter Block

Seams, Under Newer

Silicone Caulk

MM-34 Exterior Panels Gray 55 JP Lord, Under Roof

Overhangs

AR-342 25% Chrysotile NF Good 2500 SF

MM-35 Seam Caulk Black/Tan 56 JP Lord, Below Roof

Overhang on N. Side

AR-343 2% Chrysotile NF Good 20 LF

MM-36 Exterior Window/Door

Caulk

Gray (Painted

White)

57 JP Lord Outside of Kitchen

and Door to Outside Play Area

AY-344 3% Chrysotile NF Poor 100 LF

MM-37 Exterior Window Glaze Gray (Painted

White)

58 JP Lord, Outside of Gym and

Other Exterior Windows

AY-347 2% Chrysotile NF Poor 3600 LF

MM-38 Exterior Window Caulk White 59 JP Lord, Exterior Windows AY-348 2% Chrysotile NF Poor 3050 LF

MM-39 Exterior Window Caulk Gray 60 HBM Addition 1 Exterior

Doors and Windows

AV-352 2% Chrysotile NF Good 560 LF

MM-40 Exterior Window Caulk Gray 61 CLM Exterior Windows AX-356 4% Chrysotile NF Poor 1500 LF All Exterior Windows

on CLM Building

MM-41 Exterior Vent Caulk White 62 CLM, SE Exterior Corner AX-357 3% Chrysotile NF Poor 95 LF

MM-42 Exterior Window Caulk Tan 63 CLM, Exterior Windows AX-358 3% Chrysotile NF Poor 2915 LF Second Caulk on

Exterior CLM

Windows (Near Glass)



NF – Non-Friable









HM No.

Related

HM No

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Material Location

Sample

No.

%

Type

F /

NF

Cond

Est.

Qty.

Comment

MM-43 Interior Window Caulk Gray 64 HBM Pedestrian Tunnel AT-263 4% Chrysotile NF Good 48 LF

TSI-17 Ventilation Exhaust

Chimney Coating

White 65 HBM Roof, Small Mechanical

Room

AJ-278 70% Chrysotile F Good 30 SF

MM-44 Panel Gray 66 HBM Roof, Small Mechanical

Room, Inside Exhaust

Chimney

AJ-280 5%

12%

Amosite

Chrysotile

NF Good 24 SF

MM-45 Roof Coating Gray 67 CLM Roof, Around Perimeter

on Stone

AO-299 5% Chrysotile NF Good 390 LF

MM-46 Exterior Exhaust Window

Caulk

Light Gray 68 CLM Roof, Small Mechanical

Room

AO-300 4% Chrysotile NF Good 35 LF

MM-47 Roof Coating Black/Gray 69 CLM Roof, Small Metal Roof

Structure. South Side of Roof

AO-303 5% Chrysotile NF Poor 15 LF

MM-48 Interior Window Caulk Gray 70 CLM Windows AN-307 2% Chrysotile NF Poor CLM, All Windows

MM-49 Interior Window Glaze Gray 71 CLM Windows AN-308 2% Chrysotile NF Poor CLM, All Windows

MM-50 MM-50A 12”x12” VFT Red Brick 72 CLM 3rd Floor, Rm. 3013 AN-309 2% Chrysotile NF Good ~2000

SF

CLM 3rd Floor Offices

Under Carpet

MM-50A Mastic Black 72 CLM 3rd Floor, Rm. 3013 AN-309 ND

MM-51 MM-51A 9”x9” VFT Light Tan w/

Rust

73 HBM, 3rd Floor Offices and

Closets (Rms. 3045, 3050, 3048,

3035, 3031, and 3059)

AG-403 4% Chrysotile NF Good ~3000

SF

MM-51A Mastic Black 73 HBM, 3rd Floor Offices and

Closets (Rms. 3045, 3050, 3048,

3035, 3031, and 3059)

AG-403 ND

MM-52 MM-52A,

MM-52B

9”x9” VFT Brown Stone

Pattern

74 HBM, 2nd Floor Mech. Room

2052

AD-405 3% Chrysotile NF Good 12 SF



NF – Non-Friable









HM No.

Related

HM No

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Material Location

Sample

No.

%

Type

F /

NF

Cond

Est.

Qty.

Comment

MM-52A Mastic Yellow 74 HBM, 2nd Floor Mech. Room

2052

AD-405 ND

MM-52B Mastic 2 Black 74 HBM, 2nd Floor Mech. Room

2052

AD-405 ND

MM-53 MM-53A,

MM-53B

9”x9” VFT Light Tan w/

Brown Streaks

75 HBM, 2nd Floor, Rms. 2051,

2052


MM-53A Mastic Yellow 75 HBM, 2nd Floor, Rms. 2051,

2052

AD-407 ND

MM-53B Mastic 2 Black 75 HBM, 2nd Floor, Rms. 2051,

2052

AD-407 ND

MM-54 MM-54A 12”x12” VFT Tan 76 HBM, 2nd Floor, Rm. 2072 AD-408 3% Chrysotile NF Good ~3000

SF

Offices in West Wing

of HBM Original

Building Under Carpet

MM-54A Mastic Black 76 HBM, 2nd Floor, Rm. 2072 AD-408 ND

MM-55 MM-55A 12”x12” VFT Tan 77 HBM, 2nd Floor, Threshold to

Rm. 2070


MM-55A Mastic Dark Brown 77 HBM, 2nd Floor, Threshold to

Rm. 2070

AD-409 ND

MM-56 AHU Gasket Black 78 CLM, 1st Floor AHU Room

(1009) Near Indoor Play Area

AL-382 3% Chrysotile F <10%

Damaged

60 LF

MM-57 MM-57A,

MM-57B

12”x12” VFT White 79 CLM, 1st Floor Rm. 1008 AL-385 ND

MM-57A Mastic Yellow 79 CLM, 1st Floor Rm. 1008 AL-385 ND

MM-57B Mastic 2 Black 79 CLM, 1st Floor Rm. 1008 AL-385 2% Chrysotile NF Good 111 SF



NF – Non-Friable









HM No.

Related

HM No

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Material Location

Sample

No.

%

Type

F /

NF

Cond

Est.

Qty.

Comment

MM-58 Drywall Seam Mastic Tan 80 CLM 1st Floor Throughout AL-389 3% Chrysotile NF Good Through

out

Above Ceiling in Room

1025 at Drywall Seams

(45LF)

MM-59 MM-59A 9”x9” VFT Emerald Green 81 CLM 1st Floor Rooms (Rms.

1029 and 1027)

AL-390 3% Chrysotile NF Good ~800 SF Also 2nd Floor

MM-59A Mastic Black 81 CLM 1st Floor Rooms (Rms.

1029 and 1027)

AL-390 ND

MM-60 MM-60A 9”x9” VFT Tan w/ Brown

Streaks

82 CLM, 2nd Floor (Rm. 2012) AM-391 2% Chrysotile NF Good 61 SF Under Carpet in

Rooms

MM-60A Mastic Black 82 CLM, 2nd Floor (Rm. 2012) AM-391 ND

TSI-18 Pipe Insulation (Air Cell) Tan 83 JP Lord, Between Attic &

Plaster Ceiling

AHERA ACM F Good 20 LF Former AHERA

Results

MM-61 Transite Panels Gray 84 JP Lord, Fin Tubes/Back of

Bookshelves in all Classrooms,

Nurse’s Office, Work Room,

and Principal’s Office

AHERA ACM NF Good 420 SF Former AHERA

Results

MM-62 MM-62A 9”x9” VFT Bone/Rust 85 JP Lord, Gym, Room 2, Room

4, Work Room


Results

MM-62A Mastic Black 85 JP Lord, Gym, Room 2, Room

4, Work Room


Results

MM-63 MM-63A 9”x9” VFT Tan/Black 86 JP Lord, Room 1 AHERA ACM NF Good 1040 SF Former AHERA

Results

MM-63A Mastic Black 86 JP Lord, Room 1 AHERA ACM NF Good 1040 SF Former AHERA

Results

MM-64 MM-64A 9”x9” VFT Green/ White/

Black

87 JP Lord, Room 5 and Gym AHERA ACM NF Good 1500 SF Former AHERA

Results



NF – Non-Friable









HM No.

Related

HM No

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Material Location

Sample

No.

%

Type

F /

NF

Cond

Est.

Qty.

Comment


Results

MM-65 MM-65A 9”x9” VFT Bone/Green 88 JP Lord, Room 9, Room 7 AHERA ACM NF Good 1800 SF Former AHERA

Results

MM-65A Mastic Black 88 JP Lord, Room 9, Room 7 AHERA ACM NF Good 1800 SF Former AHERA

Results

MM-66 MM-66A 9”x9” VFT Bone/Black 89 JP Lord, Room 6 AHERA ACM NF Good 1000 SF Former AHERA

Results


Results

MM-67 MM-67A 9”x9” VFT Brown/White 90 JP Lord, Room 8 AHERA ACM NF Good 1000 SF Former AHERA

Results


Results

MM-68 Fire Doors Brown Throughout Hattie B. Munroe,

C. L. Meyer, and JP Lord

NS PACM NF Good

MM-69 Chalk Board Adhesive Green

Chalkboards

JP Lord Classrooms NS PACM NF Good

MM-70 Wire Insulation Black JP Lord Crawl Space NS PACM NF Good

Asbestos Containing Materials Survey Photo Log 1 AMI Project No. 20-275 Munroe Meyer Institute & Former JP Lord School January 8, 2021

444 & 330 South 44th Street, Omaha, NE 68105 Appendix A, Asbestos-Containing Materials

PHOTO 1

MM-01

Sink Under Coating, Black, JP Lord Classrooms PHOTO 2

MM-02B

Seam Mastic, White, JP Lord Basement,

Mechanical Room

PHOTO 3

MM-03

TSI Pipe Joint Mastic, White, JP Lord

Basement, Mechanical Room and Crawl Space

PHOTO 4

MM-04

Window Caulk, White, Stairs Down to

Mechanical Room

PHOTO 5

TSI-01

Mudded Pipe Fitting, White, JP Lord Attic and

Wall Chase

PHOTO 6

MM-05

CMU Wall Seam Caulk, Tan, JP Lord, Behind

Stage



PHOTO 7

TSI-02

Mudded Pipe Fitting Elbows, Gray PHOTO 8

TSI-03A

Mudded Pipe Fitting Elbows, Gray, MMI

Pedestrian Tunnel

PHOTO 9

TSI-04B

Mudded Insulation, White, MMI Pedestrian

Tunnel PHOTO 10

TSI-05A

Mudded Insulation/Fittings, White, C.L. Meyer

(CLM) Basement Mechanical Room/Tunnels

PHOTO 11

TSI-06A

Mudded Elbow, White, C.L. Meyer (CLM)

Basement Mechanical Room/Tunnels

PHOTO 12

TSI-07A





PHOTO 13

TSI-08A



PHOTO 14

MM-06

Pipe Penetration, Black, C.L. Meyer (CLM)

Tunnels

PHOTO 15

TSI-09A

Mudded Elbow, Gray, C.L. Meyer (CLM)

Tunnels, Walls, and Ceilings

PHOTO 16

TSI-10A

Mudded Insulation, White, C.L. Meyer (CLM)


PHOTO 17

TSI-11B

Mudded Elbow, Gray, CLM, 1st Floor, S.

Mechanical Room



PHOTO 18

TSI-12

Pipe Wrap, Sky Blue, CLM, 1st Floor, S.

Mechanical Room

PHOTO 19

SM-01

Popcorn Ceiling Texture, White, CLM 1st Floor

Hallway

PHOTO 20

MM-07A

Mastic, Black, CLM, Rms: 1099A, 1021A, 1021B PHOTO 21

MM-08

12”x12” Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT), Tan, CLM,

Rm. 1007

PHOTO 22

MM-09

Interior Window Caulk, Gray, CLM, 1st Floor,

Play Area

PHOTO 23

TSI-13A

Mudded Elbow, White, Hattie B. Munroe

(HBM) 1st Floor, Mechanical Room 1042 and

Tunnels



PHOTO 24

TSI-14A

Mudded Elbow, White, HBM, 1st Floor

Mechanical Room 1042 and Tunnels

PHOTO 25

TSI-15A



PHOTO 26

TSI-16A



PHOTO 27

MM-10

Pipe Penetration, Black, HBM Tunnels

PHOTO 28

MM-11

12”x12” VFT, Tan, HBM South Elevator PHOTO 29

MM-12

Interior Window Caulk, Gray, HBM All

Windows



PHOTO 30

SM-02

Popcorn Ceiling Texture, White, CLM 2nd Floor

Hallway

PHOTO 31

MM-13

9”x9” VFT, Pink, CLM 2nd Floor Hallway (E to

W by Elevator)



PHOTO 32

MM-14

9”x9” VFT, Pink, CLM 2nd Floor Offices PHOTO 33

MM-15

9”x9” VFT, Green, CLM 2nd Floor Main

Hallway (N to S) and North Hallway, (E to W)

PHOTO 34

MM-16

12”x12” VFT, Pink/Brown, CLM, 2nd Floor

Hallway Near Room 2028

PHOTO 35

MM-17

Interior Window Caulk, Gray, HBM 3rd Floor

PHOTO 36

MM-18

9”x9” VFT, Green/Tan Camo, HBM 3rd Floor,

Rms: 3046 & 3050 Closet

PHOTO 37

SM-03

Popcorn Ceiling Texture, White, HBM 2nd & 3rd

Floor Hallway



PHOTO 38

MM-19 & MM-

19A

12”x12” VFT, Tan, CLM 3rd Floor Hallway by

Rm. 3028 with Black Mastic

PHOTO 39

MM-20

Seam Caulk (Drywall/Ductwork), Tan, CLM

Various Areas Above Ceiling Tiles

PHOTO 40

SM-04

Popcorn Ceiling Texture, White, CLM 3rd Floor

Hallway (Above Drop Ceiling)

PHOTO 41

MM-21

Interior Window Caulk, Gray, Throughout

CLM

PHOTO 42

MM-22

Interior Window Glaze, Gray, Throughout

CLM

PHOTO 43

MM-23

9”x9” VFT, Green and Bone, CLM 3rd Floor,

Rm. 3016C



PHOTO 44

MM-24

Window Glaze, Gray, CLM, 3rd Floor, S.

Entryway

PHOTO 45

MM-25

Window Frame Caulk, White, CLM, 3rd Floor,

S. Entryway

PHOTO 46

MM-26

9”x9” VFT, Tan, CLM, 1st Floor Offices PHOTO 47

SM-05

Ceiling Texture, White, CLM, 1st Floor Offices

(Rms: 1029, 1028, 1026, 1027, 1024, 1025)

PHOTO 48

MM-27

Door Caulk, Gray, CLM, 1st Floor, Interior

Caulk on Exterior Doors

PHOTO 49

MM-28

9”x9” VFT, Pink with Rust, CLM 1st Floor

Offices/Rooms



PHOTO 50

MM-29A

Mastic, Black, CLM 1st Floor, Rm. 1020 PHOTO 51

MM-30& MM-

30A

12”x12” VFT, Tan Overcast, JP Lord Main

Electrical Room with Black Mastic

PHOTO 52

MM-31

Exterior Window Caulk, Gray, CLM N. Side

Exterior, 2nd Floor

PHOTO 53

MM-32

Exterior Vent Caulk, Cream/White, JP Lord

Roof

PHOTO 54

MM-33

Exterior Seam Caulk, Gray/Tan, JP Lord

Elevated Roof Perimeter

PHOTO 55

MM-34

Exterior Panels, Gray, JP Lord, Under Roof

Overhangs



PHOTO 56

MM-35

Seam Caulk, Black/Tan, JP Lord, Below Roof

Overhang on N. Side

PHOTO 57

MM-36

Exterior Window/Door Caulk, Gray (Painted

White), JP Lord Outside of Kitchen and Door

to Outside Play Area

PHOTO 58

MM-37

Exterior Window Glaze, Gray (Painted White),

JP Lord, Outside of Gym and Other Exterior

Windows

PHOTO 59

MM-38

Exterior Window Caulk, White, JP Lord,

Exterior Windows

PHOTO 60

MM-39

Exterior Window Caulk, Gray, HBM Addition

1 Exterior Doors and Windows

PHOTO 61

MM-40

Exterior Window Caulk, Gray, CLM Exterior

Windows



PHOTO 62

MM-41

Exterior Vent Caulk, White, CLM, SE Exterior

Corner

PHOTO 63

MM-42

Exterior Window Caulk, Tan, CLM, Exterior

Windows

PHOTO 64

MM-43

Interior Window Caulk, Gray, HBM Pedestrian

Tunnel

PHOTO 65

TSI-17

Ventilation Exhaust Chimney Coating, White,

HBM Roof, Small Mechanical Room

PHOTO 66

MM-44

Panel, Gray, HBM Roof, Small Mechanical

Room, Inside Exhaust Chimney

PHOTO 67

MM-45

Roof Coating, Gray, CLM Roof, Around

Perimeter on Stone



PHOTO 68

MM-46

Exterior Exhaust Window Caulk, Light Gray,

CLM Roof, Small Mechanical Room

PHOTO 69

MM-47

Roof Coating, Black/Gray, CLM Roof, Small

Metal Roof Structure. South Side of Roof

PHOTO 70

MM-48

Interior Window Caulk, Gray, CLM Windows PHOTO 71

MM-49

Interior Window Glaze, Gray, CLM Windows

PHOTO 72

MM-50

12”x12” VFT, Red Brick Colored, CLM 3rd

Floor, Rm. 3013 and Surrounding Offices

PHOTO 73

MM-51

9”x9” VFT, Light Tan w/ Rust, HBM, 3rd Floor

Offices and Closets (Rms. 3045, 3050, 3048,

3035, 3031, and 3059)



PHOTO 74

MM-52

9”x9” VFT, Brown Stone Pattern, HBM, 2nd

Floor Mech. Room 2052

PHOTO 75

MM-53

9”x9” VFT, Light Tan w/ Brown Streaks,

HBM, 2nd Floor, Rms. 2051, 2052

PHOTO 76

MM-54

12”x12” VFT, Tan, HBM, 2nd Floor, Rm. 2072

(Offices in West Wing of HBM Original

Building Under Carpet)

PHOTO 77

MM-55

12”x12” VFT, Tan, HBM, 2nd Floor, Threshold

to Rm. 2070

PHOTO 78

MM-56

AHU Gasket, Black, CLM, 1st Floor AHU Room

(1009) Near Indoor Play Area

PHOTO 79

MM-57B

(Not Pictured) White 12”x12” VFT with Yellow

Mastic and Black Mastic. Located in CLM, 1st

Floor. Room 1008. 120 SF.



PHOTO 80

MM-58

Drywall Seam Mastic, Tan, CLM 1st Floor

Throughout

PHOTO 81

MM-59

9”x9” VFT, Emerald Green, CLM 1st Floor

Rooms (Rms. 1029 and 1027) Also on Second

Floor

PHOTO 82

MM-60

9”x9” VFT, Tan w/ Brown Streaks, CLM, 2nd

Floor (Rm. 2012)



PHOTO 83

TSI-18

Pipe Insulation (Air Cell), Tan, JP Lord,

Between Attic & Plaster Ceiling

PHOTO 84

MM-61

Transite Panels, Gray, JP Lord, Fin Tubes/Back of

Bookshelves in all Classrooms, Nurse’s Office, Work

Room, and Principal’s Office

PHOTO 85

MM-62 &

MM-62A

9”x9” VFT, Bone/Rust, JP Lord, Gym, Room 2,

Room 4, Work Room with Black Mastic

PHOTO 86

MM-63 &

MM-63A

Not Pictured, 9”x9” VFT, Tan/Black, JP Lord,

Room 1 with Black Mastic

PHOTO 87

MM-64 &

MM-64A

9”x9” VFT, Green/ White/ Black, JP Lord,

Room 5 and Gym with Black Mastic

PHOTO 88

MM-65 &

MM-65A

9”x9” VFT, Bone/Green, JP Lord, Room 9,

Room 7 with Black Mastic



PHOTO 89

MM-66 &

MM-66A

9”x9” VFT, Bone/Black, JP Lord, Room 6 with

Black Mastic

PHOTO 90

MM-67 &

MM-67 A

9”x9” VFT, Brown/White, JP Lord, Room 8

EMSL Analytical, Inc.4140 Litt Drive Hillside, IL 60162

Tel/Fax: (773) 313-0099 / (773) 313-0139

http://www.EMSL.com / [email protected]

262009502EMSL Order:

Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:

Attention: Phone:Colin Lauenroth (402) 397-5001

Fax:AMI Group, Inc. (402) 397-3313

Received Date:8802 South 135th Street 12/04/2020 4:00 PM

Analysis Date:Suite 100 12/07/2020

Collected Date:Omaha, NE 68138-6511

Project: 20-275 NESHPA PRE-DEMOLITION, MMI & JP LORD

Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized

Light Microscopy

Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous

Non-Asbestos Asbestos

% Type

AQ-1

262009502-0001

5% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)95%Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

CLASSROOMS, GYM

KITCHENS - SINK

UNDER COATING

(BLACK)

AQ-3

262009502-0002

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)40%Cellulose

Min. Wool

30%

30%

White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

CLASSROOMS -

2'X4' CEILING TILE,

WHITE (BUSY

WORMHOLES)

AQ-4

262009502-0003


Min. Wool

30%

30%

White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

WORKOUT ROOM -

2'X4' CEILING TILE,

WHITE (CONCRETE

PATTERN)

AQ-5

262009502-0004


Min. Wool

30%

30%

White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

WORKOUT ROOM -

2'X4' CEILING TILE,

WHITE (EXTRA

PINHOLES)

AQ-7-Cove Base

262009502-0005

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

GRAY BASE COVE

WITH WHITE

MASTIC -

CLASSROOMS

AQ-7-Mastic

262009502-0005A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

GRAY BASE COVE

WITH WHITE

MASTIC -

CLASSROOMS

AP-8-Wrap

262009502-0006

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

JP LORD

MECHANICAL ROOM

- MUDDED PIPE

COLLARS (WHITE)

WITH YELLOW

INSULATION AND

WHIT PIPE WRAP

AP-8-Insulation

262009502-0006A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)10%Glass90%Yellow

Fibrous

Homogeneous

JP LORD

MECHANICAL ROOM

- MUDDED PIPE

COLLARS (WHITE)

WITH YELLOW

INSULATION AND

WHIT PIPE WRAP

AP-9-Wrap

262009502-0007

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

JP LORD

MECHANICAL ROOM

- MUDDED PIPE

COLLARS (WHITE)

WITH YELLOW

INSULATION AND

WHIT PIPE WRAP

Report amended: 12/08/2020 13:32:44 Replaces initial report from: 12/07/2020 15:45:30 Reason Code: Data Entry-Change to Sample ID

Page 1 of 5ASB_PLM_0008_0001 - 1.78 Printed: 12/8/2020 1:33 PM


Tel/Fax: (773) 313-0099 / (773) 313-0139



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AP-9-Insulation

262009502-0007A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

JP LORD

MECHANICAL ROOM

- MUDDED PIPE

COLLARS (WHITE)

WITH YELLOW

INSULATION AND

WHIT PIPE WRAP

A-P-10-Insulation

262009502-0008

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)10%Glass90%Brown

Fibrous

Homogeneous

MECHANICAL ROOM

- BROWN

INSULATION, WHITE

WRAP, WHITE

MASTIC

AP-10-Wrap

262009502-0008A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

MECHANICAL ROOM

- BROWN

INSULATION, WHITE

WRAP, WHITE

MASTIC

AP-10-Mastic

262009502-0008B

3% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)97%White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

MECHANICAL ROOM

- BROWN

INSULATION, WHITE

WRAP, WHITE

MASTIC

AP-11

262009502-0009


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

PIPE WRAP JOINT

MASTIC (WHITE)

AP-12-Wrap

262009502-0010

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)40%Cellulose60%White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

PIPE WRAP (WHITE)

YELLOW

INSULATION

AP-12-Insulation

262009502-0010A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

PIPE WRAP (WHITE)

YELLOW

INSULATION

AP-13-Insulation

262009502-0011


Fibrous

Homogeneous

2" PIPE WRAP

(WHITE) AND

YELLOW

INSULATION

AP-13-Wrap

262009502-0011A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

2" PIPE WRAP

(WHITE) AND

YELLOW

INSULATION

AP-14-Insulation

262009502-0012

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)40%Cellulose60%Yellow

Fibrous

Homogeneous

2" PIPE WRAP

(WHITE) AND

YELLOW

INSULATION

AP-14-Wrap

262009502-0012A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)40%Cellulose60%White/Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

2" PIPE WRAP

(WHITE) AND

YELLOW

INSULATION

AP-15

262009502-0013

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)40%Cellulose60%Brown

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

ELECTRIC WIRE

PENETRATION

FILLER (BROWN)

AP-16

262009502-0014

5% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)95%Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

WINDOW CAULK

(WHITE)

AS-17

262009502-0015

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)10%Min. Wool90%White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

9"X9" CEILING TILES

(WHITE) W/HOLES

AS-18

262009502-0016


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

9"X9" CEILING TILES

(WHITE) W/HOLES




Tel/Fax: (773) 313-0099 / (773) 313-0139



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AS-19-Insulation

262009502-0017


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

DUCT INSULATION

(YELLOW) W/

SILVER PAPER AND

BROWN MASTIC

AS-19-Paper

262009502-0017A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)10%Cellulose90%Silver

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

DUCT INSULATION

(YELLOW) W/

SILVER PAPER AND

BROWN MASTIC

AS-19-Mastic

262009502-0017B

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Brown

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

DUCT INSULATION

(YELLOW) W/

SILVER PAPER AND

BROWN MASTIC

AS-20

262009502-0018


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AHU CAULK (GRAY)

AS-21

262009502-0019

5% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)65%Min. Wool30%Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

MUDDED PIPE

FITTING (WHITE)

AS-22

262009502-0020


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

MUDDED PIPE

FITTING (WHITE)

AS-23-Wrap

262009502-0021

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)40%Cellulose60%Tan/Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

TAN PIPE

WRAPWITH

YELLOW MASTIC

AS-23-Insulation

262009502-0021A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)10%Glass90%Tan

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

TAN PIPE

WRAPWITH

YELLOW MASTIC

AS-24-Wrap

262009502-0022


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

TAN PIPE

WRAPWITH

YELLOW MASTIC

SQ-24-Insulation

262009502-0022A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

TAN PIPE

WRAPWITH

YELLOW MASTIC

AS-25-Skim Coat

262009502-0023


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

PLASTER GRAY W/

WHITE SKIM COAT

AS-25-Base Coat

262009502-0023A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

PLASTER GRAY W/

WHITE SKIM COAT

AS-26-Skim Coat

262009502-0024


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

PLASTER GRAY W/

WHITE SKIM COAT

AS-26-Base Coat

262009502-0024A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

PLASTER GRAY W/

WHITE SKIM COAT

AS-27-Skim Coat

262009502-0025


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

PLASTER GRAY W/

WHITE SKIM COAT

AS-27-Base Coat

262009502-0025A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

PLASTER GRAY W/

WHITE SKIM COAT

AS-28-Skim Coat

262009502-0026


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

PLASTER GRAY W/

WHITE SKIM COAT

AS-28-Base Coat

262009502-0026A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

PLASTER GRAY W/

WHITE SKIM COAT




Tel/Fax: (773) 313-0099 / (773) 313-0139



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AS-29-Skim Coat

262009502-0027


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

PLASTER GRAY W/

WHITE SKIM COAT

AS-29-Base Coat

262009502-0027A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

PLASTER GRAY W/

WHITE SKIM COAT

AS-30-Skim Coat

262009502-0028


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

PLASTER GRAY W/

WHITE SKIM COAT

AS-30-Base Coat

262009502-0028A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

PLASTER GRAY W/

WHITE SKIM COAT

AS-31-Skim Coat

262009502-0029


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

PLASTER GRAY W/

WHITE SKIM COAT

AS-31-Base Coat

262009502-0029A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

PLASTER GRAY W/

WHITE SKIM COAT

AQ-36-Floor Tile

262009502-0030

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Tan

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

12"X12" TAN VFT W/

YELLOW MASTIC

AQ-36-Mastic

262009502-0030A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

12"X12" TAN VFT W/

YELLOW MASTIC

AQ-37-Floor Tile

262009502-0031


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

12"X12" TAN VFT W/

YELLOW MASTIC

AQ-37-Mastic

262009502-0031A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

12"X12" TAN VFT W/

YELLOW MASTIC

AQ-38-Cove Base

262009502-0032


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

BROWN COVE

BASE AND YELLOW

MASTIC

AQ-38-Mastic

262009502-0032A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

BROWN COVE

BASE AND YELLOW

MASTIC

AQ-39

262009502-0033

3% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)97%Tan

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

TAN SEAM CAULK

AQ-40

262009502-0034


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

TAN SEAM CAULK

AQ-44

262009502-0035

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White/Red

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

RED FIRE CAULK

AQ-45

262009502-0036

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Beige

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

CREAM SINK

UNDERCOATING

AQ-46-Floor Tile

262009502-0037

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Brown/Tan

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

TAN & BROWN

12"X12" VFT W/

BLACK MASTIC

TEM recommended

AQ-46-Mastic

262009502-0037A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

TAN & BROWN

12"X12" VFT W/

BLACK MASTIC




Tel/Fax: (773) 313-0099 / (773) 313-0139



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AQ-47-Floor Tile

262009502-0038

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Brown/Tan

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

TAN & BROWN

12"X12" VFT W/

BLACK MASTIC

AQ-47-Mastic

262009502-0038A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

TAN & BROWN

12"X12" VFT W/

BLACK MASTIC

AQ-48-Floor Tile

262009502-0039

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Pink

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

TAN 12"X12" VFT W/

BLACK MASTIC

AQ-48-Mastic

262009502-0039A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

TAN 12"X12" VFT W/

BLACK MASTIC

AQ-49-Floor Tile

262009502-0040


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

WHITE 12"X12" VFT

W/ BLACK SPECKS

WITH CLEAR

MASTIC

AQ-49-Mastic

262009502-0040A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Clear

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

WHITE 12"X12" VFT

W/ BLACK SPECKS

WITH CLEAR

MASTIC

AQ-50-Leveler

262009502-0041


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

FLOOR LEVELER

(WHITE)

AQ-50-Mastic

262009502-0041A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

FLOOR LEVELER

(WHITE)

Analyst(s)

Kristen Berglund (68) James Hahn, Laboratory Manager

or Other Approved Signatory

EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis . Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report relates only to the samples reported above, and may not be

reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations . The report reflects the samples as received.

Results are generated from the field sampling data (sampling volumes and areas, locations, etc.) provided by the client on the Chain of Custody. Samples are within quality control criteria and met

method specifications unless otherwise noted. The above analyses were performed in general compliance with Appendix E to Subpart E of 40 CFR (previously EPA 600/M4-82-020 “Interim Method”)

but augmented with procedures outlined in the 1993 (”final”) version of the method. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST

or any agency of the federal government. Non- friable organically bound materials present a problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis . Unless requested

by the client, building materials manufactured with multiple layers (i.e. linoleum, wallboard, etc.) are reported as a single sample. Estimation of uncertainty is available on request.

Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Hillside, IL NVLAP Lab Code 200399-0



EMSL Analytical, Inc.6340 CastlePlace Dr. Indianapolis, IN 46250

Tel/Fax: (317) 803-2997 / (317) 803-3047



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:



Received Date:8802 South 135th Street 12/04/2020 2:15 PM

Analysis Date:Suite 100 12/04/2020 - 12/07/2020

Collected Date:Omaha, NE 68138-6511 12/02/2020

Project: 20-275 / NESHAP Pre-Demolition, MMI & JP Lord


Light Microscopy



% Type

AT-51-Wrap

162024709-0001


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Pedestrian Tunnel -

Yellow Pipe Wrap and

Tan Insulation

AT-51-Insulation

162024709-0001A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Pedestrian Tunnel -

Yellow Pipe Wrap and

Tan Insulation

AT-52-Wrap

162024709-0002

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)5%Cellulose95%White/Yellow

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Pedestrian Tunnel,

Yellow 5lb Steam -

Mudded Pipe Fitting

(Gray)

AT-52-Mud Fitting

162024709-0002A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Pedestrian Tunnel,

Yellow 5lb Steam -

Mudded Pipe Fitting

(Gray)

AT-53

162024709-0003

<1% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped. Tunnel - Window

Caulk (Gray)

AT-54

162024709-0004


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Glaze (Gray)

AT-55-Wrap

162024709-0005

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)5%Cellulose95%White/Blue

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped. Tunnel - Blue

Pipe Wrap with Gray

Mudded Fitting

AT-55-Mud Fitting

162024709-0005A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped. Tunnel - Blue

Pipe Wrap with Gray

Mudded Fitting

AT-56-Wrap

162024709-0006

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)5%Cellulose95%Gray/Blue

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped. Tunnel - Blue

Pipe Wrap with Tan

Aerocell and White

Insulation

AT-56-Aerocell

162024709-0006A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)20%Cellulose80%Tan/Black

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped. Tunnel - Blue

Pipe Wrap with Tan

Aerocell and White

Insulation

AT-56-Insulation

162024709-0006B

30% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)20%Min. Wool50%White

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped. Tunnel - Blue

Pipe Wrap with Tan

Aerocell and White

Insulation

AT-57

162024709-0007


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Glazing (Thick Bead)

AK-58-Wrap

162024709-0008


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mechanical Room -

Yellow Pipe Wrap +

White Mudding

AK-58-Mudding

162024709-0008A

40%

2%

Amosite

Chrysotile

Non-fibrous (Other)58%White

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mechanical Room -

Yellow Pipe Wrap +

White Mudding

Initial report from: 12/07/2020 07:44:20

Page 1 of 7ASB_PLM_0008_0001 - 1.78 Printed: 12/7/2020 7:44 AM


Tel/Fax: (317) 803-2997 / (317) 803-3047



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AK-59-Wrap

162024709-0009


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mechanical Room -

Yellow Pipe Wrap,

Beige Mastic, White

Mudded Elbow

AK-59-Mastic

162024709-0009A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mechanical Room -

Yellow Pipe Wrap,

Beige Mastic, White

Mudded Elbow

AK-59-Mudded Elbow

162024709-0009B

20%

15%

Amosite

Chrysotile


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mechanical Room -

Yellow Pipe Wrap,

Beige Mastic, White

Mudded Elbow

AK-60-Wrap

162024709-0010


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mechanical Room -

Mudded Elbow

(White), Yellow Pipe

Wrap

AK-60-Insulation

162024709-0010A

25%

5%

Amosite

Chrysotile


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mechanical Room -

Mudded Elbow

(White), Yellow Pipe

Wrap

AK-61-Wrap

162024709-0011

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)5%Cellulose95%Tan

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mechanical Room -

Yellow Pipe

Wrap/Pink Insulation

AK-61-Insulation

162024709-0011A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mechanical Room -

Yellow Pipe

Wrap/Pink Insulation

AK-62-Wrap

162024709-0012


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mechanical Room -

Brown Pipe Wrap

w/Yellow Insulation

AK-62-Insulation

162024709-0012A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mechanical Room -

Brown Pipe Wrap

w/Yellow Insulation

AK-63-Wrap

162024709-0013

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)5%Cellulose95%Brown/White

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mechanical Room -

Brown Pipe Wrap

w/White Mudded

Elbow

AK-63-Mudded Elbow

162024709-0013A

15%

25%

Amosite

Chrysotile

Non-fibrous (Other)60%Gray/White

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mechanical Room -

Brown Pipe Wrap

w/White Mudded

Elbow

AK-64

162024709-0014


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tunnels - Pipe

Penetration (Black)

AK-65-Wrap

162024709-0015


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tunnels - Tan Pipe

Wrap, Brown

Insulation

AK-65-Insulation

162024709-0015A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tunnels - Tan Pipe

Wrap, Brown

Insulation

AK-66-Wrap

162024709-0016


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tunnels - Mudded

Elbow (Gray), Tan

Pipe Wrap

AK-66-Mudded Elbow

162024709-0016A

10%

10%

Amosite

Chrysotile

Non-fibrous (Other)75%Min. Wool5%Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tunnels - Mudded

Elbow (Gray), Tan

Pipe Wrap

AK-67-Wrap

162024709-0017


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tunnels - Brown Pipe

Wrap with White

Mudding




Tel/Fax: (317) 803-2997 / (317) 803-3047



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AK-67-Mudding

162024709-0017A

30%

5%

Amosite

Chrysotile


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tunnels - Brown Pipe

Wrap with White

Mudding

AK-68-Wrap

162024709-0018


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Steam Room - Pipe

Wrap (White), Pipe

Tape (White),

Insulation (Yellow)

AK-68-Tape

162024709-0018A


Glass

70%

5%

White/Silver

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Steam Room - Pipe

Wrap (White), Pipe

Tape (White),

Insulation (Yellow)

AK-68-Insulation

162024709-0018B


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Steam Room - Pipe

Wrap (White), Pipe

Tape (White),

Insulation (Yellow)

AK-69-Wrap

162024709-0019


Glass

50%

10%

White/Silver

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Steam Room - Pipe

Wrap (White), Yellow

Insulation, Mastic

(White)

AK-69-Insulation

162024709-0019A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Steam Room - Pipe


Insulation, Mastic

(White)

AK-69-Mastic

162024709-0019B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Steam Room - Pipe


Insulation, Mastic

(White)

AK-70-Wrap

162024709-0020

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)5%Cellulose95%Blue

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tunnels - Blue Pipe

Wrap w/Brown

Aerocell

AK-70-Aerocell

162024709-0020A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tunnels - Blue Pipe

Wrap w/Brown

Aerocell

AK-71-Wrap

162024709-0021

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)20%Glass80%White/Silver

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tunnels - White Pipe

Wrap, Yellow

Insulation

AK-71-Insulation

162024709-0021A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tunnels - White Pipe

Wrap, Yellow

Insulation

AK-72

162024709-0022

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray/Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mechanical Pad -

Caulking (Gray/Black)

AT-73

162024709-0023


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped Tunnel - Base

Tile Mastic (Brown)

AL-74-Mastic

162024709-0024


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer Mech

Room - White Mastic,

Brown Wrap, Mudded

Elbow

AL-74-Wrap

162024709-0024A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer Mech


Brown Wrap, Mudded

Elbow

AL-74-Mudded Elbow

162024709-0024B

20% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)55%Min. Wool25%Gray/White

Fibrous

Heterogeneous

CL Meyer Mech


Brown Wrap, Mudded

Elbow




Tel/Fax: (317) 803-2997 / (317) 803-3047



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AL-75-Wrap

162024709-0025


Glass

40%

40%

White/Silver/Blue

Fibrous

Heterogeneous

CL Meyer Mech

Room - Sky Blue Pipe

Wrap, Yellow

Insulation

AL-75-Insulation

162024709-0025A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer Mech


Wrap, Yellow

Insulation

AL-76-Wrap

162024709-0026

2% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)83%Glass15%White/Blue

Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer Mech


Wrap, Mudded Elbow

(White)

AL-76-Mudded Elbow

162024709-0026A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer Mech


Wrap, Mudded Elbow

(White)

AM-77

162024709-0027


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer 2nd Floor

Mech Room - AHU

Mastic (Gray)

AM-78

162024709-0028

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)98%Synthetic2%Red

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer 2nd Floor

Mech Room - Maroon

Fire Caulk

AL-79

162024709-0029

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Red

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer Mech

Room 1st Floor - Red

Fire Caulk

AL-80-Paper

162024709-0030

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)90%Glass10%Silver

Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer Mech

Room 1st Floor AHU

Duct - Silver Paper

and Tan Insulation

AL-80-Insulation

162024709-0030A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)2%Glass98%Tan

Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer Mech

Room 1st Floor AHU

Duct - Silver Paper

and Tan Insulation

AT-81-Skim Coat

162024709-0031


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped. Tunnel -

Skimcoat (White),

Plaster (Gray)

AT-81-Plaster

162024709-0031A

None DetectedQuartz

Non-fibrous (Other)

20%

80%

Cellulose<1%Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped. Tunnel -

Skimcoat (White),

Plaster (Gray)

AT-82-Skim Coat

162024709-0032


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped. Tunnel -

Skimcoat (White),

Plaster (Gray)

AT-82-Plaster

162024709-0032A

None DetectedQuartz

Non-fibrous (Other)

20%

80%

Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped. Tunnel -

Skimcoat (White),

Plaster (Gray)

AT-83-Skim Coat

162024709-0033


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped. Tunnel -

Skimcoat (White),

Plaster (Gray)

AT-83-Plaster

162024709-0033A

None DetectedQuartz

Non-fibrous (Other)

20%

80%

Cellulose<1%Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped. Tunnel -

Skimcoat (White),

Plaster (Gray)

AT-84-Mastic

162024709-0034

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)90%Cellulose10%Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped. Tunnel - Black

Duct Mastic, Silver

Paper, Yellow

Insulation




Tel/Fax: (317) 803-2997 / (317) 803-3047



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AT-84-Paper

162024709-0034A


Glass

40%

5%

Brown/Silver

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped. Tunnel - Black

Duct Mastic, Silver

Paper, Yellow

Insulation

AT-84-Insulation

162024709-0034B


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped. Tunnel - Black

Duct Mastic, Silver

Paper, Yellow

Insulation

AT-85

162024709-0035


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ped. Tunnel - Gray

Duct Mastic

AL-86-Cove Base

162024709-0036


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer Hallway -

Gray Cove Base

w/Yellow Mastic

AL-86-Mastic

162024709-0036A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer Hallway -

Gray Cove Base

w/Yellow Mastic

AL-87

162024709-0037

2% ChrysotileMica

Non-fibrous (Other)

20%

78%

Tan/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer Hallway -

Popcorn Ceiling

Texture

AL-88

162024709-0038

Positive Stop (Not Analyzed)CL Meyer Hallway -

Popcorn Ceiling

Texture

AL-89

162024709-0039

Positive Stop (Not Analyzed)CL Meyer Hallway -

Popcorn Ceiling

Texture

AL-90-Ceramic Tile

162024709-0040


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Hallway Under Carpet

- Carpet Mastic

Yellow

AL-90-Grout

162024709-0040A

None DetectedQuartz

Non-fibrous (Other)

20%

80%

Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


- Carpet Mastic

Yellow

AL-90-Mastic

162024709-0040B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


- Carpet Mastic

Yellow

AL-91-Ceramic Tile

162024709-0041


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


- Carpet Mastic

Yellow

AL-91-Grout

162024709-0041A

None DetectedQuartz

Non-fibrous (Other)

20%

80%

Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


- Carpet Mastic

Yellow

AL-91-Mastic

162024709-0041B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


- Carpet Mastic

Yellow

AL-92-Flooring

162024709-0042

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)60%Cellulose40%Red/Black

Fibrous

Heterogeneous

CL Meyer Exit Area -

Red Flooring Material

w/Black Mastic

AL-92-Mastic

162024709-0042A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Red Flooring Material

w/Black Mastic

AL-93-Cove Base

162024709-0043


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Brown Cove Base

w/White Mastic

AL-93-Mastic

162024709-0043A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Brown/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Brown Cove Base

w/White Mastic




Tel/Fax: (317) 803-2997 / (317) 803-3047



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AL-94

162024709-0044


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer Office

Room - Black Mastic

AL-95-Ceiling Tile

162024709-0045


Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer Stairs -

9"x9" Worm Hole

Ceiling Tile (White)

w/Brown Puck Mastic

AL-95-Mastic

162024709-0045A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer Stairs -

9"x9" Worm Hole

Ceiling Tile (White)

w/Brown Puck Mastic

AL-96

162024709-0046


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer Stairs Exit

Threshold -

Drywall/Joint

Compound

Composite

AL-97

162024709-0047

None DetectedPerlite

Non-fibrous (Other)

15%

5%

Cellulose

Min. Wool

40%

40%

Tan/White

Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer - 2x4 Worm

Hole Ceiling Tile

AL-98

162024709-0048


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Office - Tan Carpet

Mastic

AL-99-Leveler

162024709-0049


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Office Closet

Threshold - Floor

Leveler with Tan

Mastic

AL-99-Mastic

162024709-0049A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Office Closet

Threshold - Floor

Leveler with Tan

Mastic

AL-100-Floor Tile

162024709-0050


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Office, Under Blue

Carpet - Tan 12"x12"

VFT with Black Mastic

AL-100-Mastic

162024709-0050A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Office, Under Blue

Carpet - Tan 12"x12"

VFT with Black Mastic

AL-101

162024709-0051


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Office Sinks - Gray

Sink Undercoating

AL-102-Floor Tile

162024709-0052


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Light Gray 12"x12"

VFT w/Brown Mastic

and Yellow Carpet

Mastic

AL-102-Mastic

162024709-0052A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Brown/Yellow

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Light Gray 12"x12"

VFT w/Brown Mastic

and Yellow Carpet

Mastic

AL-103

162024709-0053


Non-fibrous (Other)

15%

5%

Cellulose80%Gray/White

Fibrous

Homogeneous

18"x18" Ceiling Tile

(White)(Small Worm

Holes)

AL-104

162024709-0054


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

CL Meyer Play Area -

Brown Wall Mastic

AL-105

162024709-0055


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

CLM Play Area -

Window Caulk (Gray)




Tel/Fax: (317) 803-2997 / (317) 803-3047



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:

Analyst(s)

Craig Nixon (13)

Paul Rihm (68)

Shannon Clegg (14)

Richard Harding, Laboratory Manager


EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report relates only to the samples reported above, and may not be

reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. The report reflects the samples as received.




or any agency of the federal government. Non-friable organically bound materials present a problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis. Unless requested


Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Indianapolis, IN NVLAP Lab Code 200188-0, AZ0939, CA 2575, CO AL-15132, TX 300262



EMSL Analytical, Inc.100 Green Park Industrial Court Saint Louis, MO 63123

Tel/Fax: (314) 577-0150 / (314) 776-3313



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:



Received Date:8802 South 135th Street 12/07/2020 10:00 AM



Project: 20-275 NESHAP MMI & JP Lord


Light Microscopy



% Type

AB-106-Cove Base

392011223-0001


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

No brown layer present.

AB-106-Mastic

392011223-0001A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Orange

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-107-Wrap

392011223-0002

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)34%Fibrous (Other)66%Green

Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-107-Insulation

392011223-0002A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)7%Min. Wool93%Yellow

Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-108-Wrap

392011223-0003

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)33%Fibrous (Other)67%Green

Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-108-Elbow

392011223-0003A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-108-Elbow

392011223-0003B


Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-109

392011223-0004

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)82%Glass18%Red

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-110-Wrap

392011223-0005

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)31%Fibrous (Other)69%Yellow

Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-110-Insulation

392011223-0005A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-111-Wrap

392011223-0006

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)34%Fibrous (Other)66%Yellow

Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-111-Elbow

392011223-0006A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-112-Cap

392011223-0007


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-112-Insulation

392011223-0007A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-113-Wrap

392011223-0008

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)32%Fibrous (Other)68%Blue

Fibrous

Homogeneous




Tel/Fax: (314) 577-0150 / (314) 776-3313



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AA-113-Cell

392011223-0008A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-114-Wrap

392011223-0009

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)31%Fibrous (Other)69%Blue

Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-114-Elbow

392011223-0009A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-115-Wrap

392011223-0010

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)34%Fibrous (Other)66%Brown

Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-115-Insulation

392011223-0010A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-116-Wrap

392011223-0011


Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-116-Fitting

392011223-0011A

7% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)56%Min. Wool37%White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-117

392011223-0012


Synthetic

33%

8%

Various

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

No mastic present.

AA-118

392011223-0013


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-119-VFT

392011223-0014


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-119-Mastic

392011223-0014A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-119-Leveler

392011223-0014B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-120-VFT

392011223-0015


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-120-Mastic

392011223-0015A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-120-Leveler

392011223-0015B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-121-VFT

392011223-0016

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Various

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous





Tel/Fax: (314) 577-0150 / (314) 776-3313



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AA-121-Mastic

392011223-0016A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-121-Leveler

392011223-0016B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-122-VFT

392011223-0017


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-122-Mastic

392011223-0017A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-123-VFT

392011223-0018


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

No beige or brown layers present.

AA-123-Mastic

392011223-0018A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-123-Leveler

392011223-0018B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-124

392011223-0019


Non-fibrous (Other)

26%

13%

Cellulose

Min. Wool

26%

35%

White

Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-125

392011223-0020

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)83%Glass17%White

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Calculated composite result. No tape present.

AA-126-Ceiling Tile

392011223-0021


Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-126-Mastic

392011223-0021A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-127-VFT

392011223-0022


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-127-Mastic

392011223-0022A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AA-128-Cove Base

392011223-0023


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

No yellow layer present.

AA-128-Mastic

392011223-0023A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AB-129

392011223-0024


Non-fibrous (Other)

16%

13%

Cellulose

Min. Wool

26%

45%

Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous




Tel/Fax: (314) 577-0150 / (314) 776-3313



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AB-130

392011223-0025


Glass

27%

12%

White

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Calculated composite result.

AB-131

392011223-0026

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)72%Cellulose28%Various

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous


AC-132

392011223-0027


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AC-133

392011223-0028


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AC-134

392011223-0029


Glass

29%

13%

White

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous


AC-135

392011223-0030


Glass

48%

5%

Various

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous


AC-136

392011223-0031

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)24%Min. Wool76%Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

AC-137-Sheet Flooring

392011223-0032


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AC-137-Mastic

392011223-0032A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AC-138-Sheet Flooring

392011223-0033

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Blue

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AC-138-Mastic

392011223-0033A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AB-139-Sheet Flooring

392011223-0034


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AB-139-Mastic

392011223-0034A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AB-140

392011223-0035


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AB-141-Sheet Flooring

392011223-0036


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AB-141-Mastic

392011223-0036A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AB-141-Mastic

392011223-0036B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous




Tel/Fax: (314) 577-0150 / (314) 776-3313



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AB-142

392011223-0037


Non-fibrous (Other)

27%

10%

Cellulose

Min. Wool

27%

36%

White

Fibrous

Homogeneous

AB-143-Flooring

392011223-0038

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Green

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

AB-143-Mastic

392011223-0038A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AB-143-Mastic

392011223-0038B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AB-144

392011223-0039

None DetectedMica

Non-fibrous (Other)

18%

82%

Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AC-145-VFT

392011223-0040


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AC-145-Mastic

392011223-0040A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-146-VFT

392011223-0041


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-146-Mastic

392011223-0041A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-147-VFT

392011223-0042


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AA-147-Mastic

392011223-0042A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AD-148

392011223-0043

<1% ChrysotilePerlite

Non-fibrous (Other)

28%

72%

White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-149

392011223-0044


Non-fibrous (Other)

29%

71%

White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-150

392011223-0045


Non-fibrous (Other)

26%

74%

White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-151

392011223-0046


Non-fibrous (Other)

27%

73%

White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-152

392011223-0047

<1% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)100%White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-153-Mastic

392011223-0048


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous




Tel/Fax: (314) 577-0150 / (314) 776-3313



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AD-153-VFT

392011223-0048A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-153-Mastic

392011223-0048B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-154-Mastic

392011223-0049


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-154-Leveler

392011223-0049A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-154-Mastic

392011223-0049B

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Orange

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-154-Leveler

392011223-0049C


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-154-Flooring

392011223-0049D


Fibrous (Other)

8%

18%

Various

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

AD-154-Mastic

392011223-0049E


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-155

392011223-0050


Non-fibrous (Other)

29%

4%

Cellulose

Min. Wool

29%

38%

White

Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-156-Ceiling Tile

392011223-0051


Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-156-Mastic

392011223-0051A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-157

392011223-0052

None DetectedQuartz

Non-fibrous (Other)

17%

83%

Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

No white layer present.

AD-158

392011223-0053

None DetectedQuartz

Non-fibrous (Other)

16%

84%

Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

No white layer present.

AD-159-VFT

392011223-0054


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-159-Mastic

392011223-0054A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-160-VFT

392011223-0055


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-160-Mastic

392011223-0055A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-160-Mastic

392011223-0055B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous




Tel/Fax: (314) 577-0150 / (314) 776-3313



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AD-161-Mastic

392011223-0056


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AD-161-VFT

392011223-0056A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AD-161-Mastic

392011223-0056B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AD-162

392011223-0057


Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

AD-163

392011223-0058


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-164-Skim Coat

392011223-0059


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-164-Plaster

392011223-0059A

None DetectedQuartz

Non-fibrous (Other)

19%

81%

Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-165-Cove Base

392011223-0060


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-165-Mastic

392011223-0060A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-165-Mastic

392011223-0060B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-166-Mastic

392011223-0061


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AD-166-Leveler

392011223-0061A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AD-166-VFT

392011223-0061B

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Blue

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AD-166-Mastic

392011223-0061C


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AD-167

392011223-0062


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AD-168

392011223-0063


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AM-169

392011223-0064


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous




Tel/Fax: (314) 577-0150 / (314) 776-3313



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AM-170-Skim Coat

392011223-0065


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AM-170-Plaster

392011223-0065A

None DetectedQuartz

Non-fibrous (Other)

18%

82%

Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AM-171-Skim Coat

392011223-0066


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AM-171-Plaster

392011223-0066A

None DetectedQuartz

Non-fibrous (Other)

19%

81%

Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AM-172-Skim Coat

392011223-0067


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AM-172-Plaster

392011223-0067A

None DetectedQuartz

Non-fibrous (Other)

18%

82%

Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AM-173

392011223-0068


Non-fibrous (Other)

26%

13%

Cellulose

Min. Wool

26%

35%

White

Fibrous

Homogeneous

AM-174-Mastic

392011223-0069


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AM-174-VFT

392011223-0069A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Pink

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AM-174-Mastic

392011223-0069B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AM-175-Mastic

392011223-0070


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AM-175-Flooring

392011223-0070A


Fibrous (Other)

7%

17%

Various

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous


AM-175-Mastic

392011223-0070B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AM-176-Leveler

392011223-0071


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AM-176-Mastic

392011223-0071A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AM-176-Mastic

392011223-0071B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous




Tel/Fax: (314) 577-0150 / (314) 776-3313



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:

Analyst(s)

Sue Ferrario (126)

Sarah Kuper (6)

Jeff Siria, Laboratory Manager









Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Saint Louis, MO NVLAP Lab Code 200742-0



EMSL Analytical, Inc.200 Route 130 North Cinnaminson, NJ 08077

Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:

Attention: Phone:Dan Taylor (402) 397-5001





Project: 20-275 - NESHAP Pre-demolition MMI and JP Lord - 444 and 330 South 44th Street, Omaha, NE


Light Microscopy



% Type

AM-177

042030019-0001

3% ChrysotileVermiculite

Non-fibrous (Other)

8%

89%

Tan

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Popcorn Ceiling

Texture - White

AM-178

042030019-0002

Positive Stop (Not Analyzed)Popcorn Ceiling

Texture - White

AM-179

042030019-0003


Texture - White

AM-180

042030019-0004


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Plaster - Gray

AM-181

042030019-0005


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Plaster - Gray

AM-182

042030019-0006


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Plaster - Gray

AM-183-VFT

042030019-0007

3% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)97%Pink

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

9" x 9" VFT - Pink

AM-183-Mastic

042030019-0007A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Mastic

AM-183-Leveler

042030019-0007B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Leveler

AM-184-Flooring

042030019-0008

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Brown/Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Linoleum Flooring

Gray

AM-184-Mastic

042030019-0008A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Brown Mastic

AM-184-Leveler

042030019-0008B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Floor Leveler

AM-185-Floor

042030019-0009


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Maroon Vinyl Floor

Cover

AM-185-Carpet Mastic

042030019-0009A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Yellow Carpet Mastic

AM-185-Floor Leveler

042030019-0009B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Floor Leveler

AM-185-Fibers

042030019-0009C


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Fibers Brown




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AM-185-Floor Leveler

042030019-0009D


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Floor Leveler

AM-186-VFT

042030019-0010


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

9" x 9" VFT Pink

AM-186-Mastic

042030019-0010A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Mastic

AM-186-Carpet Mastic

042030019-0010B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AM-186-Leveler

042030019-0010C


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Leveler

AM-187-Plaster

042030019-0011


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Plaster with Skim

Coat

AM-187-Skim Coat

042030019-0011A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Plaster with Skim

Coat

AM-188

042030019-0012


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Plaster with Skim

Coat

AM-189

042030019-0013


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Plaster with Skim

Coat

AM-190- Composite

042030019-0014


Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Drywall and Joint

Compound

AM-191-Ceiling Tile

042030019-0015


Min. Wool

50%

30%

Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

9" x 9" Ceiling Tile

White w/Worm Holes

AM-191-Mastic

042030019-0015A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Brown Puck Mastic

AM-192-Cove Base

042030019-0016


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Cove Base

AM-192-Mastic

042030019-0016A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tan Mastic

AM-193-VFT

042030019-0017

3% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)97%Green

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Green 9" x 9" VFT

AM-193-Mastic

042030019-0017A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Mastic

AM-193-Mastic 2

042030019-0017B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mastic

AM-194-VFT

042030019-0018


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

12" x 12" VFT Pink

and Brown

AM-194-Mastic

042030019-0018A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Mastic




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AM-194-Mastic 2

042030019-0018B

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow/Green

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mastic

AM-195-Leveler

042030019-0019


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Floor Leveler White

AM-195-Flooring

042030019-0019A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Flooring

AM-196

042030019-0020


Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Sink

Undercoating

AM-197- Composite

042030019-0021


Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Drywall and Joint

Compound and Tape

AM-198

042030019-0022


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Red Fire Caulk Red

AM-199-Cove Base

042030019-0023


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Green Cove Base

AM-199-Mastic

042030019-0023A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Mastic

AE-200-Cove Base

042030019-0024


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tan Cove Base

AE-200-Mastic

042030019-0024A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow/Clear

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tan w/Clear Mastic

AE-201-Sheet Flooring

042030019-0025


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Rolled Sheet Flooring

Gray and Black

Speckles

AE-201-Mastic

042030019-0025A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tan Mastic

AE-202- Composite

042030019-0026


Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Drywall and Joint

Compound and Tape

AE-203

042030019-0027


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Red Fire Caulk

AE-204

042030019-0028


Min. Wool

50%

30%

Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

2' x 2' Ceiling Tile

White Small

Wormhole

AE-205-Stair Riser

042030019-0029


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Stair Riser

AE-205-Mastic

042030019-0029A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tan Mastic

AE-206-Stair Tread

042030019-0030


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Stair Tread Aqua

AE-206-Mastic

042030019-0030A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Brown Mastic




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AE-207-Stair Tread

042030019-0031


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Stair Tread Green

w/Circles

AE-207-Mastic

042030019-0031A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Brown/White/Yellow

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Brown and White

Mastic

AE-208-Stair Tread

042030019-0032


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Green and Marble

Stair Tread

AE-208-Mastic

042030019-0032A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Mastic

AF-209-VFT

042030019-0033


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

12" x 12" VFT Gray

w/Multi-color

AF-209-Mastic

042030019-0033A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Yellow Mastic

AF-210

042030019-0034


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Fireproofing

AF-211

042030019-0035


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Fireproofing

AF-212

042030019-0036

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)15%Min. Wool85%Gray/White

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Fireproofing

AF-213

042030019-0037


Min. Wool

50%

30%

Gray/White

Fibrous

Homogeneous


White Wormhole and

Pinhole

AF-214

042030019-0038


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Red Fire Caulk

AF-215- Composite

042030019-0039


Glass

10%

3%

Brown/White

Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Drywall and Joint

Compound

AF-216-Floor Tile

042030019-0040


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

12" x 12" VFT White

w/Multi-color

AF-216-Mastic

042030019-0040A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Yellow Mastic

AF-217-Stair Tread

042030019-0041


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Green Stair Tread

AF-217-Mastic

042030019-0041A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Brown/White/Yellow

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

White and Brown

Mastic

AF-218

042030019-0042

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk Gray

AF-219

042030019-0043


Min. Wool

40%

30%

Gray/Beige

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ceiling Tile 2' x 4'

Cream

AF-220

042030019-0044

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)60%Cellulose40%Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Sink

Undercoating




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AG-221-Flooring

042030019-0045


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tan Vinyl Flooring

AG-221-Fiber Backing

042030019-0045A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Fiber Backing

AG-221-Mastic

042030019-0045B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Brown Carpet Mastic

AG-222-Floor Leveler

042030019-0046


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Floor Leveler

AG-222-Mastic

042030019-0046A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Mastic

AG-223

042030019-0047


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Glazing Gray

AG-224

042030019-0048


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk Gray

AG-225-Mastic

042030019-0049


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Yellow Duct Mastic

AG-225-Insulation

042030019-0049A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)30%Glass70%Silver/Yellow

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Silver Insulation

AG-226

042030019-0050


Min. Wool

50%

30%

Gray/White

Fibrous

Homogeneous

2' x 2' White Ceiling

Tile Small Wormhole

and Pinhole

AG-227-VFT

042030019-0051

5% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)95%Brown/Tan

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

9" x 9" VFT Brown

and Tan

AG-227-Mastic

042030019-0051A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Mastic

AG-228-Cove Base

042030019-0052


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Cove Base Gray

AG-228-Mastic

042030019-0052A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Mastic

AG-229

042030019-0053


Non-fibrous (Other)

5%

92%

White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Popcorn Ceiling

Texture White

AG-230

042030019-0054


Texture White

AG-231

042030019-0055


Texture White

AG-232-Cove Base

042030019-0056


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Dark Gray Cove Base

AG-232-Mastic

042030019-0056A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White/Red

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Red Mastic




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AH-233- Composite

042030019-0057


Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Drywall and Joint

Compound and Tape

AH-234

042030019-0058


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Sink

Undercoating

AH-235

042030019-0059


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Duct Mastic Brown

AN-236-VFT

042030019-0060


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

12" x 12" VFT Gray

w/Multi-color

AN-236-Mastic

042030019-0060A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Yellow Mastic

AN-236-Leveler

042030019-0060B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Leveler

AN-237- Composite

042030019-0061

<1% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)90%Cellulose10%Brown/White

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Drywall and Joint

Compound

AN-238-VFT

042030019-0062


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

12" x 12" VFT Tan

AN-238-Mastic

042030019-0062A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Mastic

AN-238-Carpet Mastic

042030019-0062B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


AN-239-Cove Base

042030019-0063


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Cove Base

AN-239-Mastic

042030019-0063A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Brown Mastic

AN-240

042030019-0064


Min. Wool

50%

30%

Tan/White

Fibrous

Homogeneous


White Wormhole

AN-241

042030019-0065


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Drywall Duct Seam

Caulk Tan

AN-242

042030019-0066


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

2-way Mirror Mastic

Black

AN-243

042030019-0067


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk White

AN-244

042030019-0068


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Duct Mastic Gray

AN-245-Vinyl Flooring

042030019-0069

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)60%Cellulose40%Green

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Green Rolled Vinyl

Flooring

AN-245-Carpet Mastic

042030019-0069A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous





Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AN-245-Backing

042030019-0069B


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Fiber Backing

AN-245-Mastic

042030019-0069C


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Brown Mastic

AN-246

042030019-0070


Non-fibrous (Other)

4%

94%

Gray/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Popcorn Ceiling

White

AN-247

042030019-0071


White

AN-248

042030019-0072


White

AN-249

042030019-0073


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk Gray

AN-250

042030019-0074


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Glaze Gray

AN-251

042030019-0075


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Plaster Skim Coat

White

AN-252

042030019-0076


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Plaster Skim Coat

White

AN-253

042030019-0077


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Plaster Skim Coat

White

AN-254

042030019-0078


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mastic Black

AN-255-VFT

042030019-0079


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Green 9" x 9" VFT

AN-255-Mastic

042030019-0079A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Mastic

AN-256

042030019-0080


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Mastic

AN-257-Ceiling Tile

042030019-0081


Fibrous

Homogeneous

9" x 9" Ceiling Tile

White

AN-257-Mastic

042030019-0081A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Brown Puck Mastic

AN-258

042030019-0082


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Glaze Gray

AN-259

042030019-0083

<1% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray/Silver

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Dark Gray Window

Caulk

Inseparable paint / coating layer included in analysis




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AN-260

042030019-0084

2% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)98%Tan/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Window Frame

Caulk

AN-261

042030019-0085


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Window Seam

Caulk

AN-262

042030019-0086


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Window Caulk

Analyst(s)

Daniel Blake (11)

Sarah Kleinbrahm (115)

Samantha Rundstrom, Laboratory Manager









Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Cinnaminson, NJ NVLAP Lab Code 101048-0, AIHA-LAP, LLC-IHLAP Lab 100194, NYS ELAP 10872, NJ DEP 03036, PA ID# 68-00367, LA #04127




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:

Attention: Phone:Dan Taylor (402) 397-5001







Light Microscopy



% Type

AT-263

042030038-0001

4% ChrysotileCa Carbonate

Non-fibrous (Other)

10%

86%

Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk Gray

AS-264

042030038-0002

<1% ChrysotileCa Carbonate

Non-fibrous (Other)

5%

92%

Cellulose3%Gray/Beige

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AHU Penetrations

Gray

AS-265

042030038-0003


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Vibration Damper

Black

AS-266

042030038-0004


Glass

2%

1%

Tan/Silver

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Silver Duct Tape

AS-267

042030038-0005


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tan Tape

AQ-268-Blue Fabric

042030038-0006

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)1%Cellulose99%Blue

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Stage Curtains Bay

Blue and Tan

AQ-268-Tan Fabric

042030038-0006A

None DetectedCellulose100%Tan

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Stage Curtains Bay

Blue and Tan

AQ-269

042030038-0007

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)1%Cellulose99%Purple

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Stage Fireproof

Curtains Purple

AJ-270

042030038-0008

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)2%Synthetic98%Tan/Black

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Membrane Flooring

Black

AJ-271

042030038-0009

None DetectedCa Carbonate

Non-fibrous (Other)

5%

95%

Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black peentration

Caulk

AJ-272

042030038-0010


Non-fibrous (Other)

5%

95%

Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tan Wall Seam Caulk

White

AJ-273

042030038-0011


Non-fibrous (Other)

5%

95%

Gray/Beige

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Metal Roof Cover

Seam Caulk Gray

AJ-274

042030038-0012


Non-fibrous (Other)

5%

95%

Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Penetration

Caulk

AJ-275

042030038-0013

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Cellulose<1%Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Coating

AJ-276

042030038-0014


Non-fibrous (Other)

5%

95%

Cellulose<1%Gray/Tan

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Seam Caulk

AJ-277

042030038-0015

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)10%Cellulose90%Gray/Tan

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Brown Vibration

Dampener




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AJ-278

042030038-0016

70% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)30%Gray/Green

Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Ventalation

Exhaust Coating

AJ-279

042030038-0017

None DetectedQuartz

Ca Carbonate

Non-fibrous (Other)

5%

10%

85%

Cellulose<1%Beige

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Duct Seam Caulk

AJ-280

042030038-0018

5%

12%

Amosite

Chrysotile

Non-fibrous (Other)83%Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Traniste Gray

AJ-281

042030038-0019


Non-fibrous (Other)

20%

80%

Gray/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Door Frame Caulk

White

AJ-282

042030038-0020

None DetectedQuartz

Non-fibrous (Other)

2%

98%

Gray/Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk Black

AJ-283

042030038-0021


Non-fibrous (Other)

15%

85%

Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof Seam Caulk

Gray

AJ-284

042030038-0022


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Exhaust Pipe

Mastic

AJ-285

042030038-0023

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Cellulose<1%Gray/Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Roof Tar

AJ-286

042030038-0024


Non-fibrous (Other)

5%

95%

Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Penetration Caulk

Black

AJ-287

042030038-0025


Non-fibrous (Other)

10%

75%

Glass15%Gray/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Vibration Dampner

AJ-288

042030038-0026


Non-fibrous (Other)

5%

95%

White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Seam Caulk

AJ-289

042030038-0027


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Exhuast Pipe Coating

White and Gray

AJ-290

042030038-0028

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)70%Glass30%Gray/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Vibration Dampner

Gray and Painted

White

AJ-291

042030038-0029


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Caulking Light Gray

AJ-292

042030038-0030


Non-fibrous (Other)

20%

78%

Cellulose2%Gray/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Penetration Caulk

White

AJ-293

042030038-0031


Non-fibrous (Other)

8%

92%

White/Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Seam Caulk White

AJ-294

042030038-0032

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)40%Glass60%White/Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Vibration Dampner

Gray

AJ-295

042030038-0033


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Exhaust Pipe Coating

Black

AJ-296

042030038-0034


Non-fibrous (Other)

5%

95%

White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Seam Caulk White




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AJ-297

042030038-0035


Non-fibrous (Other)

5%

95%

Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Penetration Caulk

Black

AO-298

042030038-0036


Non-fibrous (Other)

8%

92%

Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Seam Caulk

Expansion Joint Caulk

Light Gray

AO-299

042030038-0037


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Coating

AO-300-Caulk

042030038-0038


Non-fibrous (Other)

15%

85%

Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Exhaust Window

Caulk Light Gray

AO-300-Glazing

042030038-0038A


Non-fibrous (Other)

8%

88%

Tan

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Exhaust Window

Caulk Light Gray

AO-301

042030038-0039

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)99%Cellulose1%Silver

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Silver Duct Tape

AO-302

042030038-0040


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Coating

AO-303

042030038-0041

5% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)95%Gray/Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray and Black

Coating

AO-304

042030038-0042


Non-fibrous (Other)

5%

95%

White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Seam Caulk

AJ-305

042030038-0043


Non-fibrous (Other)

15%

85%

Gray/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk Gray

AN-306-Leveler

042030038-0044


Non-fibrous (Other)

10%

90%

White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Floor Leveler

AN-306-Mastic

042030038-0044A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Mastic

AN-307

042030038-0045


Non-fibrous (Other)

10%

88%

Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk Gray

AN-308

042030038-0046


Non-fibrous (Other)

15%

83%

Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Glaze Gray

AN-309-Floor Tile

042030038-0047


Non-fibrous (Other)

40%

58%

Red

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

12" x 12" VFT Brick

Color

AN-309-Mastic

042030038-0047A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Cellulose<1%Brown

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Mastic




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:

Analyst(s)

Kristie Elliott (19)

Sarah Breneman (32)










Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Pineville, NC NVLAP Lab Code 200841-0, VA 3333 00312




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:








Light Microscopy



% Type

AL-310-Floor Tile

042030042-0001


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

9" x 9" Tan VFT

AL-310-Mastic

042030042-0001A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black/Yellow

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Black Mastic

AL-311

042030042-0002


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Sink

Undercoating

AL-312

042030042-0003


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Ceiling Texture White

AL-313

042030042-0004

Positive Stop (Not Analyzed)Ceiling Texture White

AL-314

042030042-0005

Positive Stop (Not Analyzed)Ceiling Texture White

AL-315

042030042-0006


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Door Caulk

AL-316-VFT

042030042-0007


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

9" x 9" VFT Pink

AL-316-Mastic

042030042-0007A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Rust and Black

Mastic

AL-317-Texture

042030042-0008


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Brown and Wood

Texture VFT Strips

AL-317-Fiber Backing

042030042-0008A


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Brown Fiber Backing

AL-317-Mastic

042030042-0008B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Brown Mastic

AL-318

042030042-0009


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Wall Filller Foam

Texture Black

AL-319-VFT

042030042-0010


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

12" x 12" VFT Black

Mastic

Sample bag labeled AL-312

AL-319-Mastic

042030042-0010A

2% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)98%Tan/Black

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

12" x 12" VFT Black

Mastic

Sample bag labeled AL-312

Result includes a small amount of inseparable attached material




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AQ-320-VFT

042030042-0011


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

12" x 12" VFT Tan

AQ-320-Backing

042030042-0011A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Backing

AQ-320-Mastic

042030042-0011B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Mastic

AQ-321-VFT

042030042-0012


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

12" x 12" Black VFT

AQ-321-Mastic

042030042-0012A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Mastic

AR-322

042030042-0013


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Asphaltic Shingle

Black and White

AR-323

042030042-0014


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Coating

AR-324

042030042-0015

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Cellulose20%Gray/Black

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black and Gray Seam

Caulk

AR-325

042030042-0016


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Seam Caulk

AR-326-Cloth

042030042-0017

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)30%Synthetic70%Beige

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof Edge Cream

Cloth

AR-326-Mastic

042030042-0017A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Cream Mastic

AR-327-Padding

042030042-0018


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Yellow Roof Padding

AR-327-Black Paper

042030042-0018A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)75%Glass25%Black

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Paper

AR-328

042030042-0019


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Roof Seam

Caulk

AX-329

042030042-0020

5% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)95%Brown/Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk Gray

AR-330-Coating

042030042-0021


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Black

AR-330-Caulk

042030042-0021A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous


Black

AR-331

042030042-0022


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Coating

AR-332-Caulk

042030042-0023

4% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)96%Tan/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Vent Caulk Cream

and White




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AR-332-Caulk 2

042030042-0023A

2% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)98%Brown

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Vent Caulk Cream

and White

AR-333

042030042-0024

3% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)97%Fibrous (Other)<1%Gray/Tan

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Spray Caulk Gray and

Tan

AR-334-Shingle 1

042030042-0025

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Synthetic20%Gray/Black

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Shingle Layers

AR-334-Shingle 2

042030042-0025A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)95%Synthetic5%White/Black

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Shingle Layers

AR-334-Tar

042030042-0025B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Shingle Layers

AR-334-Tar Paper

042030042-0025C


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Shingle Layers

AR-334-Tar Felt

042030042-0025D

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)70%Glass30%Black

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Shingle Layers

AR-335

042030042-0026


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Exhaust Pipe Wrap

Coating White

AR-336

042030042-0027


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Roof Patch Black

AR-337-Caulk

042030042-0028


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Seam Caulk

AR-337-Plaster

042030042-0028A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Tan Coating

AR-338

042030042-0029


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Seam Caulk

AR-339

042030042-0030

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)94%Cellulose6%Gray/Black

Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Black Penetration

Caulk


AR-340

042030042-0031


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Dark Gray Seam

Caulk

AR-341

042030042-0032


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Coating

AR-342

042030042-0033


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Pannel

AR-343-Caulk

042030042-0034

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White/Black

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Black Seam Caulk


AR-343-Caulk 2

042030042-0034A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Seam Caulk





Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AR-343-Caulk 3

042030042-0034B

2% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)94%Fibrous (Other)4%Tan

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Seam Caulk

AY-344-Caulk

042030042-0035


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk Gray

Painted White

AY-344-Glazing

042030042-0035A

3% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)90%Fibrous (Other)7%Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk Gray

Painted White

AY-345

042030042-0036


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

White Door Caulk

AY-346

042030042-0037


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk Gray

AY-347

042030042-0038


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Glaze Gray

Painted White

AY-348-Caulk

042030042-0039


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk White

AY-348-Caulk 2

042030042-0039A

2% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)92%Fibrous (Other)6%Beige

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk White

AW-349

042030042-0040


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk Light

Gray

AW-350

042030042-0041


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Red Caulk

AW-351

042030042-0042


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Black Mastic

AV-352

042030042-0043

2% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)93%Cellulose5%Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Gray Window Caulk

AU-353

042030042-0044

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Tan/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Door Caulk White

AU-354

042030042-0045


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk Gray

AX-355

042030042-0046


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Door and Window

Caulk Gray

AX-356

042030042-0047

4% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)96%Gray/Silver

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Window Caulk Gray

Result includes a small amount of inseparable attached silver paint

AX-357

042030042-0048


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Vent Caulk White

AR-358

042030042-0049


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Window Caulk Tan




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AQ-359

042030042-0050


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Pipe Penetration

White

Analyst(s)

Laura Kantor (27)

Paige Havener (38)

Sarah Kleinbrahm (4)














Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:






Project: 20-275 / NESHAP Pre-demolition, MMI & JP Lord / 444 & 330 South 44th Street, Omaha, NE


Light Microscopy



% Type

AA-360-Vinyl Flooring

042030394-0001


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1045 N - Vinyl

Flooring - Tan

AA-360-Mastic

042030394-0001A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray/Yellow

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Room 1045 N -

Yellow Mastic


AA-361

042030394-0002

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Brown/Tan/White

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1045F / 1045E

/ 1045B / 1405A -

Vinyl Flooring - Tan

with Brown and White


042030394-0003


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1054A - Gray

Vinyl Floor

AA-362-Mastic

042030394-0003A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray/Black/Yellow

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Room 1054A - Black

Mastic



042030394-0004

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)65%Cellulose35%Gray/Red/Black

Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Room 1052 - Maroon

Flooring

Sample is a composite of inseparable vinyl flooring and black mastic.

AA-363-Mastic

042030394-0004A

Not AnalyzedRoom 1052 - Black

Mastic Painted Gray

AB-364-VFT

042030394-0005


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1070 - Green

12"x12" VFT with

White Streaks

AB-364-Mastic

042030394-0005A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1070 - Yellow

Mastic

AC-365

042030394-0006


Fibrous

Homogeneous

HBM Addition 2 -

Fireproofing - Gray -

Brown/Puffy

AC-366

042030394-0007


Fibrous

Homogeneous

HBM Addition 2 -

Fireproofing - Gray -

Brown/Puffy

AC-367

042030394-0008


Fibrous

Homogeneous

HBM Addition 2 -

Fireproofing - Gray

AC-368

042030394-0009


Min. Wool

60%

15%

Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

HBM Addition 2 -

Fireproofing - Gray

AC-369

042030394-0010


Min. Wool

40%

15%

White

Fibrous

Homogeneous

HBM Addition 2 -

Fireproofing - Gray

AC-370

042030394-0011


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1086 - Gray

Window Caulk




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AC-371

042030394-0012


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1094B - Black

Sink Undercoating

AC-372

042030394-0013


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1089 - Fire

Caulk - Dark Red

AC-373

042030394-0014


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1089 - TSI

Mastic - White

AC-374-Vinyl Flooring

042030394-0015

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White/Green

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1080 - Green

Vinyl Flooring

AC-374-Mastic

042030394-0015A


Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Room 1080 - White

Mastic


AC-375

042030394-0016


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 10100 - HBM

2nd Addition - Mech

Room - Pipe Caulking

AC-376

042030394-0017


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Mech Room - Door

Caulk - Gray

AC-377

042030394-0018


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 10100 -

Addition 2 - Mech

Room - TSI Pipe

Collar Mastic - White

AC-378

042030394-0019


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 10100 -

Addition 2 - Mech

Room - TSI Pipe

Mastic - Cream

AC-379

042030394-0020


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 10100 -

Addition 2 - Mech

Room - AHU Seam

Caulk - Light and

Gray

AC-380

042030394-0021


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 10100 -

Addition 2 - Mech

Room - AHU

Penetration Caulk -

Dark Gray

AL-381

042030394-0022

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)95%Synthetic5%Gray

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Play Area - South

Side Interior - Door

Caulk

AL-382

042030394-0023


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1009 - Black

AHU Gasket

AL-383

042030394-0024

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)30%Cellulose70%Purple

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1009 - Pipe

Insulation Wrap -

Painted Purple

AL-384

042030394-0025


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Play Area - East Door

- Door Caulk - White

AL-385-VFT

042030394-0026


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1008 - White

12"x12" VFT

AL-385-Mastic

042030394-0026A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1008 - Yellow

Mastic




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AL-385-Mastic 2

042030394-0026B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1008 - Black

Mastic

AL-386

042030394-0027

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)10%Cellulose90%Brown/Tan

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1013 - Cork

Board - Tan/Brown

AL-387

042030394-0028


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1017 - Brown

Cork Board

AL-388

042030394-0029


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1017 - Cork

Board Adhesive - Tan

AL-389

042030394-0030


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1025 - Drywall

Seam Mastic - Tan

AL-390-VFT

042030394-0031


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1029 - Room

1027 - Emerald Green

9"x9" VFT

AL-390-Mastic

042030394-0031A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 1029 - Room

1027 - Black Mastic

AM-391-VFT

042030394-0032


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 2012 - Tan

9"x9" VFT with Brown

Streaks

AM-391-Mastic

042030394-0032A

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White/Black

Non-Fibrous

Heterogeneous

Room 2012 - Black

Mastic


AM-392-Sheet Floor

042030394-0033

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Cellulose20%Peach

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Rom 2014 - Peach

Rolled Sheet Floor

AM-392-Mastic

042030394-0033A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Rom 2014 - Black

Mastic


AM-393

042030394-0034

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)70%Synthetic30%White

Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 2034 - Cream

Room Partition

AE-394-VFT

042030394-0035


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 2091 - Lab

Area - 12x12 VFT -

Granite Pattern

AE-394-Mastic

042030394-0035A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 2091 - Lab

Area - Yellow Mastic

AE-395

042030394-0036


Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 2091 - 2'x4'

White Ceiling Tile

AE-396

042030394-0037


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Labs HBM - 2nd Floor

- Addition 1 - Black

Sink Undercoating

AI-397

042030394-0038


Min. Wool

30%

50%

Brown/Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

HBM 3rd Floor

Addition - Fireproofing

- Gray/Brown Fluffy

AI-398

042030394-0039


Min. Wool

30%

50%

Brown/Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

HBM 3rd Floor


- Gray/Brown Fluffy




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AI-399

042030394-0040


Min. Wool

10%

60%

Brown/Gray

Fibrous

Homogeneous

HBM 3rd Floor


- Gray/Brown Fluffy

AI-400

042030394-0041


Fibrous

Homogeneous

HBM 3rd Floor


- Gray

AI-401

042030394-0042


Fibrous

Homogeneous

HBM 3rd Floor


- Gray

AI-402

042030394-0043


Fibrous

Homogeneous

HBM 3rd Floor


- Gray

Analyst(s)

Andrew Burke (21)

John Witcraft (21)

Quynh Vu (8)

Rachel Irwin (3)














Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:






Project: 20-275 / NESHAP Pre-demolition, MMI & JP Lord / 444 & 330 South 44th Street, Omaha, NE


Light Microscopy



% Type

AG-403-VFT

042030379-0001


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Closets and Offices -

HBM 3rd Floor - 9"x9"

VFT - Light Tan with

Rust

AG-403-Mastic

042030379-0001A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Closets and Offices -

HBM 3rd Floor - Black

Mastic

AG-404

042030379-0002


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 3052A - Wall

Tile Mastic - Brown

AG-405-Floor Tile

042030379-0003

3% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)97%Brown

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

2052 - 2nd Floor

Mecharoom - 9"x9"

VFT - Brown Stone

Pattern

AG-405-Mastic

042030379-0003A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

2052 - 2nd Floor

Mecharoom - 9"x9"

VFT - Brown Stone

Pattern

AG-405-Mastic 2

042030379-0003B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

2052 - 2nd Floor

Mecharoom - 9"x9"

VFT - Brown Stone

Pattern

AG-406

042030379-0004


Fibrous

Homogeneous

2052 - 2nd Floor

Mecharoom - Brown

Rolled Flooring

AG-407-VFT

042030379-0005


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 2051 and

Room 2052 - 9"x9"

VFT - Light Tan with

Brown Streaks

AG-407-Mastic

042030379-0005A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 2051 and

Room 2052 - Black

Mastic

AG-407-Mastic 2

042030379-0005B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 2051 and

Room 2052 - Black

Mastic

AG-408-VFT

042030379-0006


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 2072 - 12"x12"

VFT - Tan

AG-408-Mastic

042030379-0006A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Room 2072 - Black

Mastic

AG-409-VFT

042030379-0007


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Theshold of Office

2020 - 12"x12" VFT -

Tan

AG-409-Mastic

042030379-0007A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Theshold of Office

2020 - Brown Mastic




Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:


Light Microscopy



% Type

AG-409-Mastic 2

042030379-0007B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

Theshold of Office

2020 - Brown Mastic

AG-410

042030379-0008

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)5%Min. Wool95%Gray/Yellow

Fibrous

Homogeneous

3014 - Insulation -

Gray/Yellow

AG-411

042030379-0009


Fibrous

Homogeneous

3014 - Cork Board -

Brown

AG-412-VFT

042030379-0010


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

North to South

Hallbway by Room

3016B - 12"x12" VFT

- Tan with Brown

Streaks/Spots

AG-412-Mastic

042030379-0010A


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

North to South

Hallbway by Room

3016B - Black Mastic

AG-412-Mastic 2

042030379-0010B


Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

North to South

Hallbway by Room

3016B - Black Mastic

Analyst(s)

Kyle DeKarski (20) Samantha Rundstrom, Laboratory Manager













Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974



Customer ID: AMI50

Customer PO: 20-275

Project ID:






Project: 20-275 - Pre-demolition NESHAP Survey, MMI and JPL - 444 and 330 South 44th St., Omaha, NE


Light Microscopy



% Type

AJ-412

042030549-0001

None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray/Tan

Non-Fibrous

Homogeneous

AHU Seam Mastic -

Tan

Analyst(s)

Christina Maiorana (1) Samantha Rundstrom, Laboratory Manager












Table 2 – Lead-Based Paint Sampling Table

NA - Not Available BDL – Below Detection Limit NS - Not Sampled LP – Lead Paint Materials with lead content > 1.0 mg/cm2 or .5% are in "bold"

VB – Vinyl Baseboard CT – Ceramic Tile LS – Lead Sheilding GB – Glazed Block ML – Misc. Lead (panels, laminates, solders, oakum, bricks)

VS – Vinyl Sheeting POR – Porcelain VT – Vinyl Tile

Munroe-Meyer Institute & Former JP Lord School Table 2 – Lead-Based Paint Sampling Table

January 8, 2021 AMI Project #20-275 Page - 1

HM

No.

Related

HM No

Substrate

Component

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Locations

Sample

No.

Reading

(% by wt)

Condition

Comment

L-01 Wood Window Frame Yellow Workout Room LQ-01 0.021 Good

L-02 Plaster Wall White Classrooms LQ-02 0.15 Good

L-03 Metal Supports and Pipes Gray Basement Mechanical Room and pipes LP-03 0.061 Good

L-04 Wood Door Gray Basement Mechanical Rooom LP-04 0.17 Good

L-05 Metal Stair rail Black Stairs to Basement Mechanical Room

Rail behind stage, Ladder

LP-05 0.24 Good

L-06 Metal Window Frame Beige Stairs to Basement Mecanical Room LP-06 0.068 Cracking

L-07 Concrete Stairs and ramp Gray 1 Stairs to Basement Mechanical Room and

behind Stage

LP-07 0.70 Good

L-08 Steel Structural Steel Brown Above Ceiling, JP Lord LS-08 0.21 Good

L-09 Steel Structural Steel Gray 2 Ceiling above stairs down to Mechanical LP-09 1.7 Good

L-10 CT Ceramic Tile Green JP Lord Gym/Throughout LQ-10 ND Good

L-11 Metal Door Frames Tan JP Lord Throughout LQ-11 0.26 Cracking

L-12 Concrete Wall Cream Ramp wall behind stage LQ-12 0.10 Cracking

L-13 CMU Wall White Behind Stage LQ-13 0.041 Good

L-14 Tile Square Tile Yellow Classrooms LQ-14 0.081 Good

L-15 Metal Window Frames Blue Classrooms LQ-15 0.037 Good

L-16 Plaster Wall Tan JP Lord MAT Clinic LQ-16 ND Good







HM

No.

Related

HM No

Substrate

Component

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Locations

Sample

No.

Reading

(% by wt)

Condition

Comment

L-17 Plaster Wall Pink Sensory Room LQ-17 ND Good

L-18 CT Wall Tile Pink Classroom 2 Bathroom LQ-18 ND Good

L-19 CT Floor Tile Pink Classroom 2 Bathroom LQ-19 ND Good

L-20 CT Wall Tile Yellow Classroom 2 Bathroom LQ-20 ND Good

L-21 CT Patterened Floor Wall

Tile

Yellow Classroom 2 Bathroom LQ-21 ND Good

L-22 CT Rectangle Wall Tile Yellow Throughout JP Lord LQ-22 ND Good

L-23 Pipe wrap Steam pipe wrap Yellow 3 Mechanical Room steam pipes LK-23 2.3 Good

L-24 Pipe wrap Steam pipe return wrap Brown Mechanical Room steam pipes LK-24 0.036 Good

L-25 Metal Railing Black Mechanical Room and 1st Floor LK-25 0.019 Cracking

L-26 Metal Pipe paint Yellow 4 Tunnels, steam pipe LK-26 7.8 Flaking

L-27 Pipe wrap Pipe wrap Blue Tunnels LK-27 0.052 Cracking

L-28 Concrete Wall White Ped. Tunnel LT-28 ND Cracking

L-29 CT Base tile Green Ped. Tunnel LT-29 ND Cracking

L-30 CT Floor tile Green Ped. Tunnel LT-30 ND Good

L-31 CT Base tile Pink Ped. Tunnel LT-31 ND Good

L-32 CT Floor tile Tan Ped. Tunnel LT-32 ND Good







HM

No.

Related

HM No

Substrate

Component

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Locations

Sample

No.

Reading

(% by wt)

Condition

Comment

L-33 Metal Support beam Light green CL Meyer Mech room LL-33 0.19 Flaking

L-34 Metal Railing Gray 5 CL Meyer 2nd floor Mech room and stairs LM-34 0.96 Good

L-35 Metal Conduit Gray/green CL Meyer 2nd floor Mech room LM-35 0.29 Flaking

L-36 CT Wall tile Tan Ped. Tunnel LT-36 ND Good

L-37 Plaster Wall Blue/tan/white Ped. Tunnel LT-37 0.049 Good

L-38 Metal Door frame Tan/gray Ped. Tunnel LT-38 0.20 Good

L-39 Metal Door/Door frame White/cream CL Meyer 1st Floor Hall LL-39 0.031 Good

L-40 Plaster Wall Light blue CL Meyer 1st Floor Hall LL-40 ND Good

L-41 CT Wall tile Light green CL Meyer Bathrooms LL-41 ND Good

L-42 CT Wall tile Peach CL Meyer Bathrooms LL-42 0.11 Good

L-43 Pipe wrap Pipe wrap Green 1042/Throughout LA-43 0.29 Good

L-44 Pipe wrap Pipe wrap Light blue 1042/Throughout LA-44 0.053 Good

L-45 Pipe wrap Pipe wrap Brown 1042/Throughout LA-45 0.028 Good

L-46 Pipe wrap Pipe wrap Yellow 6 1042/Throughout LA-46 1.6 Good

L-47 Metal Door Red 1042/Throughout LA-47 ND Good

L-48 Metal Electric conduit pipe Light green 7 1042 LA-48 0.58 Good

L-49 Metal Rail and walls White/blue Stairs LA-49 0.10 Good







HM

No.

Related

HM No

Substrate

Component

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Locations

Sample

No.

Reading

(% by wt)

Condition

Comment

L-50 CT Floor tile Teal N Exit, Addition 2 LA-50 ND Good

L-51 Metal Door frame Gray Addition 1 and 2 LC-51 ND Good

L-52 CT Wall tile Purple Bathroom 1075 LB-52 ND Good

L-53 Plaster Wall Orange Room 1077 LB-53 ND Good

L-54 Plaster Wall Yellow Room 1077 LB-54 ND Good

L-55 Metal Door frame White Halllways LD-55 ND Good

L-56 Plaster Wall Egg shell Above ceiling LD-56 0.081 Good

L-57 CT Wall tile Green By drinking fountain LD-57 ND Good

L-58 Plaster Wall White S. Ped Tunnel LM-58 ND Good

L-59 CT Floor tile Light blue Rooms 2008, 2010 LM-59 ND Good

L-60 Metal Door frame Cream Doors on 2nd Floor hallway LM-60 ND Good

L-61 CT Wall tile Gray Women’s restroom, Rm 2009 LM-61 ND Good

L-62 Metal Door frame Gray Room 2099H LM-62 ND Good

L-63 CT Wall tile Gray Eye wash by Room 2084 LE-63 ND Good

L-64 Metal Stair rail Green Room 2098D LE-64 ND Good

L-65 Metal Elevator door Pink Elevator near 2096 LF-65 ND Good

L-66 Metal Railing Gray Stairs, Room 2098 D LF-66 0.11 Good







HM

No.

Related

HM No

Substrate

Component

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Locations

Sample

No.

Reading

(% by wt)

Condition

Comment

L-67 Metal Door frame Light gray Doors in addition 2 LF-67 ND Good

L-68 CT Floor tile Tan Restroom LF-68 ND Good

L-69 CT Floor tile Pink Restroom LF-69 ND Good

L-70 Drywall Wall Purple Room 3046 LG-70 ND Good

L-71 Metal Door frames Tan 3rd floor Room 3046 LG-71 0.13 Good

L-72 CT Floor tile Purple Break room LH-72 ND Good

L-73 Metal Door frame White Doors in hallway LN-73 0.092 Good

L-74 Drywall Wall White Offices on 3rd floor CLM LN-74 0.18 Good

L-75 Metal Exhaust window White HBM original mechanical room LJ-75 0.092 Flaking

L-76 Metal Exhaust hood White/gray HBM addition 1 LJ-76 ND Flaking

L-77 Metal Exhaust fan White HBM addition 1 top fan LJ-77 ND Flaking

L-78 Metal Ladder White HBM addition 1 LJ-78 ND Flaking

L-79 Metal Door White CLM roof mechanical room LO-79 0.26 Flaking

L-80 Drywall Wall Green Room 1028 LL-80 0.030 Good

L-81 Drywall Wall Blue Room 1024 LL-81 0.083 Good

L-82 Plaster Wall Light blue Room 1014, pool room LL-82 ND Goood

L-83 Plaster Wall Dark blue Room 1014 Pool room LL-83 ND Good







HM

No.

Related

HM No

Substrate

Component

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Locations

Sample

No.

Reading

(% by wt)

Condition

Comment

L-84 Concrete Pool Light green Pool Room LL-84 ND Good

L-85 Drywall Wall Black Dark Room LQ-85 ND Good

L-86 Metal Roof fixtures White On raised roof, drain fixures, and exhaust

cover

LR-86 ND Good

L-87 Metal Vent Brown Roof vents LR-87 0.17 Good

L-88 Metal Window frame White Doors/windows LY-88 ND Flaking

L-89 Metal Door Brown Kitchen door LY-89 0.24 Flaking

L-90 Metal Door White Doors LU-90 ND Flaking

L-91 Metal Railing Green Play area LU-91 ND Flaking

L-92 Metal Door Dull red East side LV-92 ND Flaking

L-93 CT Tile Gray Room 1053 LA-93 ND Good

L-94 CT Tile Yellow Room 1053 LA-94 ND Good

L-95 Concrete Floor Gray Room 1052 LA-95 ND Flaking

L-96 Plaster Wall Turquois Room 1082 LB-96 ND Good

L-97 Plaster Wall Purple Room 1079 LB-97 ND Good

L-98 Metal Pipe Blue Elevator Room LC-98 ND Good

L-99 Plaster Wall Peach Room 3048 LG-99 0.038 Good







HM

No.

Related

HM No

Substrate

Component

Description

Color

Photo

No.

Locations

Sample

No.

Reading

(% by wt)

Condition

Comment

L-100 Plaster Wall Pink Room 3052 A LG-101 ND Good

L-101 CT Floor tile Peach Room 3052 A LG-101 ND Good

L-102 Plaster Wall Light blue Room 3058A LG-102 ND Good

L-103 CT Floor tile Light blue Room 3058A LG-103 ND Good

Lead Based Paint Survey Photo Log AMI Project No. 20-275 Munroe Meyer Institute & Former JP Lord School January 8, 2021

444 & 330 South 44th Street, Omaha, NE 68105 Lead Based Paint

PHOTO 1

Gray on concrete stairs to basement Mechanical

Room and ramp behind stage.

PHOTO 2

Gray on structural steel ceiling above stairs down

to Mechanical.

PHOTO 3

Yellow painted pipe wrap on Mechanical Room

steam pipes.

PHOTO 4

Yellow paint on metal steam pipes throughout and

in tunnels.

PHOTO 5

Gray on metal railing in CL Meyer 2nd floor

Mecahnical Room and stairs.

PHOTO 6

Yellow painted pipe wrap in room 1042 and

throughout.

Lead Based Paint Survey Photo Log AMI Project No. 20-275 Munroe Meyer Institute & Former JP Lord School January 8, 2021

444 & 330 South 44th Street, Omaha, NE 68105 Lead Based Paint

PHOTO 7

Light green on metal electric conduit pipe in room

1042.

ConcentrationAnalyzed Weight RDL LeadClient SampleDescription Collected

Test Report: Lead in Paint Chips by Flame AAS (SW 846 3050B/7000B)*

EMSL Analytical, Inc.6340 CastlePlace Dr., Indianapolis, IN 46250Phone/Fax: (317) 803-2997 / (317) 803-3047http://www.EMSL.com [email protected]

Attn: Colin LauenrothAMI Group, Inc.8802 South 135th StreetSuite 100Omaha, NE 68138-6511

Received: 12/8/2020 09:00 AM

20-275 / NESHAP PRE-DEMOLITION, MMI & JP LORD / 444 & 330 SOUTH 44TH STREE, OMAHA, NE

Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:

12/1/2020Collected:

162024774CustomerID: AMI50CustomerPO: 20-275ProjectID:

EMSL Order:

Site: INTERIOR WINDOW FRAME PAINT (WOOD)Desc: WORKOUT ROOM

0.021 % wt12/8/2020 0.2555 g162024774-0001

0.008012/1/2020001-LQ-01 % wt

Site: INTERIOR WALL PAINT / WHITEDesc: CLASSROOMS

0.15 % wt12/8/2020 0.2545 g162024774-0002

0.008012/1/2020002-LQ-02 % wt

Site: INTERIOR METAL SUPPORTS & PIPES / GRAYDesc: BASEMENT MECHANICAL ROOM & PIPE

0.061 % wt12/8/2020 0.2525 g162024774-0003

0.008012/1/2020003-LQ-03 % wt

Site: INTERIOR WOODEN DOOR PAINT / GRAYDesc: BASEMENT MECHANICAL ROOM

0.17 % wt12/8/2020 0.2521 g162024774-0004

0.008012/1/2020004-LQ-04 % wt

Site: STAIR RAIL PAINT / METAL / BLACKDesc: STARIS TO BASEMENT MECHANICAL ROOM

0.24 % wt12/8/2020 0.2526 g162024774-0005

0.008012/1/2020005-LQ-05 % wt

Site: WINDOW FRAME PAINT / METAL / BEIGEDesc: STARIS TO BASEMENT MECHANICAL ROOM

0.068 % wt12/8/2020 0.2528 g162024774-0006

0.008012/1/2020006-LQ-06 % wt

Site: STAIR PAINT / CONCRETE / RAMP PAINT / GRAYDesc: STARIS TO BASEMENT MECHANICAL ROOM - ALSO BEHIND STAGE ON RAMP

0.70 % wt12/8/2020 0.2534 g162024774-0007

0.2012/1/2020007-LQ-07 % wt

Site: STRUCTURAL STEEL PAINT / BROWNDesc: ABOVE CEILING JP LORD

0.21 % wt12/8/2020 0.252 g162024774-0008

0.008012/1/2020008-LQ-08 % wt

Page 1 of 3Test Report PB w/RDL-2.0.0.0 Printed: 12/8/2020 5:16:55 PM

Allison Ford, Chemistry Lab Manageror other approved signatory

EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report relates only to the samples reported above, and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. The report reflects the samples as received. Results are generated from the field sampling data (sampling volumes and areas, locations, etc.) provided by the client on the Chain of Custody. Samples are within quality control criteria and met method specifications unless otherwise noted.Analysis following Lead in Paint by EMSL SOP/Determination of Environmental Lead by FLAA. Reporting limit is 0.008% wt based on the minimum sample weight per our SOP. "<" (less than) result signifies the analyte was not detected at or above the reporting limit. Measurement of uncertainty is available upon request. Definitions of modifications are available upon request.Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Indianapolis, IN AIHA-LAP, LLC--ELLAP 157245, OH E10040

Initial report from 12/08/2020 17:16:55

http://www.EMSL.com






Received: 12/8/2020 09:00 AM


Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:

12/1/2020Collected:


EMSL Order:

Site: STRUCTRUAL STEEL PAINT / GRAYDesc: CEILING ABOVE STAIRS DOWN TO MECH.

1.7 % wt12/8/2020 0.2552 g162024774-0009

0.2012/1/2020009-LQ-09 % wt

Site: WALL TILE / GREENDesc: JP LORD / GYM / THROUGHOUT

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2523 g162024774-0010

0.008012/1/2020010-LQ-10 % wt

Site: INTERIOR DOOR FRAMES / METAL / TANDesc: JP LORD / THROUGHOUT

0.28 % wt12/8/2020 0.2529 g162024774-0011

0.008012/1/2020011-LQ-11 % wt

Site: CONCRETE WALL PAINT / CREAMDesc: RAMP WALL BEHIND STAGE

0.10 % wt12/8/2020 0.2526 g162024774-0012

0.008012/1/2020012-LQ-12 % wt

Site: CMU WALL PAINT / WHITEDesc: BEHIND STAGE

0.041 % wt12/8/2020 0.2541 g162024774-0013

0.008012/1/2020013-LQ-13 % wt

Site: SQUARE TILE / YELLOWDesc: CLASSROOMS

0.081 % wt12/8/2020 0.2542 g162024774-0014

0.008012/1/2020014-LQ-14 % wt

Site: INTERIOR WINDOW FRAME PAINT / BLUEDesc: CLASSROOMS

0.037 % wt12/8/2020 0.2529 g162024774-0015

0.008012/1/2020015-LQ-15 % wt

Site: WALL PAINT / CABINET PAINT / TANDesc: JP LORD MAT CLINIC

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2567 g162024774-0016

0.008012/1/2020016-LQ-16 % wt

Site: WALL PAINT / PINKDesc: SENSORY ROOM

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2515 g162024774-0017

0.008012/1/2020017-LQ-17 % wt





http://www.EMSL.com






Received: 12/8/2020 09:00 AM


Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:

12/1/2020Collected:


EMSL Order:

Site: SQUARE WALL TILE / PINKDesc: CLASSROOM 2 / BATHROOM

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2567 g162024774-0018

0.008012/1/2020018-LQ-18 % wt

Site: PATTERNED FLOOR TILE/ PINKDesc: CLASSROOM 2 / BATHROOM

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2567 g162024774-0019

0.008012/1/2020019-LQ-19 % wt

Site: SQUARE WALL TILE / YELLOWDesc: CLASSROOM 2 / BATHROOM

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2508 g162024774-0020

0.008012/1/2020020-LQ-20 % wt

Site: PATTERN FLOOR TILE / YELLOWDesc: CLASSROOM 2 / BATHROOM

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2521 g162024774-0021

0.008012/1/2020021-LQ-21 % wt

Site: WALL TILE RECTANGLE / YELLOWDesc: THROUGHOUT JP LORD

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2561 g162024774-0022

0.008012/1/2020022-LQ-22 % wt





http://www.EMSL.com






Received: 12/8/2020 09:00 AM

20-275 NESHAP PRE-DEMOLITION, MMI & JP LORD / 444 & 330 SOUTH 44TH STREET, OMAHA, NE

Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:

12/2/2020Collected:


EMSL Order:

Site: PIPE WRAP PAINT / YELLOWDesc: MACHANICAL ROOM

2.3 % wt12/8/2020 0.2532 g162024782-0001

0.2012/2/2020001-LK-23 % wt

Site: PIPE WRAP PAINT / BROWNDesc: MACHANICAL

0.036 % wt12/8/2020 0.2535 g162024782-0002

0.008012/2/2020002-LK-24 % wt

Site: RAIL PAINT / METAL / BLACKDesc: MACHANICAL ROOMO

0.019 % wt12/8/2020 0.2547 g162024782-0003

0.008012/2/2020003-LK-25 % wt

Site: PIPE PAINT / METAL / YELLOWDesc: TUNNELS

7.8 % wt12/8/2020 0.2537 g162024782-0004

0.2012/2/2020004-LK-26 % wt

Site: PIPE WRAP PAINT / BLUEDesc: TUNNELS

0.052 % wt12/8/2020 0.2557 g162024782-0005

0.008012/2/2020005-LK-27 % wt

Site: INTERIOR WALL PAINT / WHITEDesc: PED. TUNNEL

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.253 g162024782-0006

0.008012/2/2020006-LK-28 % wt

Site: BASE TILE / GREENDesc: PED. TUNNEL

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2581 g162024782-0007

0.008012/2/2020007-LK-29 % wt

Site: FLOOR TILE / GREENDesc: PED. TUNNEL

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2509 g162024782-0008

0.008012/2/2020008-LK-30 % wt

Site: BASE TILE / PINKDesc: PED. TUNNEL

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2552 g162024782-0009

0.008012/2/2020009-LK-31 % wt





http://www.EMSL.com






Received: 12/8/2020 09:00 AM


Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:

12/2/2020Collected:


EMSL Order:

Site: FLOOR TILE / TANDesc: PED. TUNNEL

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2532 g162024782-0010

0.008012/2/2020010-LK-32 % wt

Site: METAL SUPPORT PAINT / LIGHT GREENDesc: CL MEYER MECH ROOM

0.19 % wt12/8/2020 0.254 g162024782-0011

0.008012/2/2020011-LK-33 % wt

Site: METAL RAIL / GRAYDesc: CL MEYER 2ND FLOOR MECH. ROOM

0.96 % wt12/8/2020 0.2536 g162024782-0012

0.2012/2/2020012-LK-34 % wt

Site: METAL RAIL / GRAYDesc: CL MEYER 2ND FLOOR MECH. ROOM

0.29 % wt12/8/2020 0.255 g162024782-0013

0.008012/2/2020013-LK-35 % wt

Site: WALL TILE / TANDesc: PED. TUNNEL

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2511 g162024782-0014

0.008012/2/2020014-LK-36 % wt

Site: WALL PAINT / PLASTERDesc: PED. TUNNEL

0.049 % wt12/8/2020 0.255 g162024782-0015

0.008012/2/2020015-LK-37 % wt

Site: DOOR FRAME PIANT / TAN-GRAYDesc: PED. TUNNEL

0.20 % wt12/8/2020 0.2534 g162024782-0016

0.008012/2/2020016-LK-38 % wt

Site: DOOR/DOOR FRAME PAINT / WHITE-CREAMDesc: CL MEYER 1ST FLOOR HALLWAY

0.031 % wt12/8/2020 0.253 g162024782-0017

0.008012/2/2020017-LK-39 % wt

Site: WALL PAINT / LIGHT BLUEDesc: CL MEYER 1ST FLOOR HALLWAY

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2557 g162024782-0018

0.008012/2/2020018-LK-40 % wt





http://www.EMSL.com






Received: 12/8/2020 09:00 AM


Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:

12/2/2020Collected:


EMSL Order:

Site: WALL TILE / LIGHT GREENDesc: CL MEYER BATHROOM / MENS

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2522 g162024782-0019

0.008012/2/2020019-LK-41 % wt

Site: WALL TILE / PEACHDesc: CL MEYER BATHROOM / WOMENS

0.11 % wt12/8/2020 0.2508 g162024782-0020

0.008012/2/2020020-LK-42 % wt





http://www.EMSL.com






Received: 12/8/2020 09:00 AM

20-275 / NESHAP PRE-DEMOLITION, MMI & JP LORD

Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:

12/3/2020Collected:


EMSL Order:

Site: GREEN PAINTED PIPE WRAP / GREENDesc: 1042 THROUGHOUT

0.29 % wt12/8/2020 0.2574 g162024787-0001

0.008012/3/2020001-LA-43 % wt

Site: BLUE PAINTED PIPE WRAP / LIGHT BLUEDesc: 1042 THROUGHOUT

0.053 % wt12/8/2020 0.2574 g162024787-0002

0.008012/3/2020002-LA-44 % wt

Site: PIPE WRAP PAINT / BROWNDesc: 1042 THROUGHOUT

0.028 % wt12/8/2020 0.2583 g162024787-0003

0.008012/3/2020003-LA-45 % wt

Site: PIPE WRAP PAINT / YELLOWDesc: 1042 THROUGHOUT

1.6 % wt12/8/2020 0.2522 g162024787-0004

0.2012/3/2020004-LA-46 % wt

Site: DOOR PAINT / REDDesc: 1042 THROUGHOUT

<0.013 % wt12/8/2020 0.1525 g162024787-0005

0.01312/3/2020005-LA-47 % wt

Site: ELECTRIC CONDUIT PIPE / LIGHT GREENDesc: 1042 THROUGHOUT

0.58 % wt12/8/2020 0.1827 g162024787-0006

0.1112/3/2020006-LA-48 % wt

Site: RAIL & WALL PIANT / WHITE-BLUEDesc: STAIRS

0.10 % wt12/8/2020 0.2545 g162024787-0007

0.008012/3/2020007-LA-49 % wt

Site: FLOOR TILE / TEALDesc: N EXIT - ADDITION 2

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2572 g162024787-0008

0.008012/3/2020008-LA-50 % wt

Site: DOOR FRAME PAINT / METAL / GRAYDesc: ADDITION 1 AND 2

<0.0089 % wt12/8/2020 0.2245 g162024787-0009

0.008912/3/2020009-LA-51 % wt





http://www.EMSL.com






Received: 12/8/2020 09:00 AM

20-275 / NESHAP PRE-DEMOLITION, MMI & JP LORD

Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:

12/3/2020Collected:


EMSL Order:

Site: WALL TILE / PURPLEDesc: RM 1075 / RESTROOM

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2531 g162024787-0010

0.008012/3/2020010-LA-52 % wt

Site: WALL PAINT / ORANGEDesc: RM 1077

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2515 g162024787-0011

0.008012/3/2020011-LA-53 % wt

Site: WALL PAINT / YELLOWDesc: RM 1077

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2545 g162024787-0012

0.008012/3/2020012-LA-54 % wt

Site: DOOR FRAME PAINT / WHITEDesc: HALLWAYS

<0.013 % wt12/8/2020 0.1518 g162024787-0013

0.01312/3/2020013-LA-55 % wt

Site: WALL PAINT / EGGSHELLDesc: ABOVE CEILING

0.081 % wt12/8/2020 0.2527 g162024787-0014

0.008012/3/2020014-LA-56 % wt

Site: WALL TILE / GREENDesc: BY DRINKING FOUNTAIN

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2515 g162024787-0015

0.008012/3/2020015-LA-57 % wt

Site: WALL PAINT / WHITEDesc: S. PED TUNNEL

<0.0080 % wt12/8/2020 0.2542 g162024787-0016

0.008012/3/2020016-LA-58 % wt





http://www.EMSL.com




EMSL Analytical, Inc.200 Route 130 North, Cinnaminson, NJ 08077Phone/Fax: (856) 303-2500 / (856) 786-5974http://www.EMSL.com [email protected]


Received: 12/11/20 11:00 AM

20-275 / NESHAP Pre-Demolition, MMI & JP Lord / 444 & 330 South 44th Street, Omaha, NE

Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:

12/8/2020Collected:


EMSL Order:

Site: Doors on 2nd Floor Hallway<0.0080 % wt12/14/2020 0.2953 g

202011324-00020.008012/8/2020LM-60 % wt

Site: Rm 2099H<0.012 % wt12/14/2020 0.1674 g

202011324-00040.01212/8/2020LM-62 % wt

Site: Rm. 2098D<0.0080 % wt12/14/2020 0.2525 g

202011324-00060.008012/8/2020LE-64 % wt

Site: Elevator Near 2096<0.0096 % wt12/14/2020 0.2081 g

202011324-00070.009612/8/2020LF-65 % wt

Site: Stairs Rm. 2098D0.011 % wt12/14/2020 0.2515 g

202011324-00080.008012/8/2020LF-66 % wt

Site: Doors in Addition 2<0.011 % wt12/14/2020 0.1798 g

202011324-00090.01112/8/2020LF-67 % wt

Site: Rm 3046<0.0080 % wt12/14/2020 0.2694 g

202011324-00120.008012/8/2020LG-70 % wt

Site: 3rd Floor Rm 30460.13 % wt12/14/2020 0.2882 g

202011324-00130.008012/8/2020LG-71 % wt

Site: Doors in Hallway0.092 % wt12/14/2020 0.2671 g

202011324-00150.008012/8/2020LN-73 % wt

Site: Offices on 3rd Floor CLM0.18 % wt12/14/2020 0.2574 g

202011324-00160.008012/8/2020LN-74 % wt

Page 1 of 2Test Report PB w/RDL-2.0.0.0 Printed: 12/16/2020 10:06:03 AM

Phillip Worby, Lead Laboratory Manageror other approved signatory

EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report relates only to the samples reported above, and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. The report reflects the samples as received. Results are generated from the field sampling data (sampling volumes and areas, locations, etc.) provided by the client on the Chain of Custody. Samples are within quality control criteria and met method specifications unless otherwise noted.Analysis following Lead in Paint by EMSL SOP/Determination of Environmental Lead by FLAA. Reporting limit is 0.008% wt based on the minimum sample weight per our SOP. "<" (less than) result signifies the analyte was not detected at or above the reporting limit. Measurement of uncertainty is available upon request. Definitions of modifications are available upon request.Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Cinnaminson, NJ NELAP Certifications: NJ 03036, NY 10872, PA 68-00367, AIHA-LAP, LLC ELLAP 100194, A2LA 2845.01


http://www.EMSL.com



Test Report: Lead by Flame AAS (SW 846 3050B/7000B)*



Received: 12/11/20 11:00 AM


Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:

12/8/2020Collected:


EMSL Order:

Site: Rms 2008 2010<0.0040 % wt12/14/2020 0.5254 g

202011324-00010.004012/8/2020LM-59 % wt

Site: Women's RR Rm. 2009<0.0040 % wt12/14/2020 0.5260 g

202011324-00030.004012/8/2020LM-61 % wt

Site: Eye Wash by Rm 2084<0.0040 % wt12/14/2020 0.5258 g

202011324-00050.004012/8/2020LE-63 % wt

Site: M Rest Room<0.0040 % wt12/14/2020 0.5021 g

202011324-00100.004012/8/2020LF-68 % wt

Site: W Rest Room<0.0040 % wt12/14/2020 0.5218 g

202011324-00110.004012/8/2020LF-69 % wt

Site: Break Room<0.0040 % wt12/14/2020 0.5113 g

202011324-00140.004012/8/2020LH-72 % wt



EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report relates only to the samples reported above, and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. The report reflects the samples as received. Results are generated from the field sampling data (sampling volumes and areas, locations, etc.) provided by the client on the Chain of Custody. Samples are within quality control criteria and met method specifications unless otherwise noted. "<" (less than) result signifies that the analyte was not detected at or above the reporting limit. Measurement of uncertainty is available upon request. Definitions of modifications are available upon request.Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Cinnaminson, NJ Method SW 846 7000B replaces EPA 7420 for lead analysis and is an equivalent method. NELAP Certifications: NJ 03036, NY 10872, PA 68-00367, CA 1877, AIHA-LAP, LLC ELLAP 100194, A2LA 2845.01


http://www.EMSL.com






Received: 12/11/20 11:00 AM


Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:

12/9/2020Collected:


EMSL Order:

Site: HBM Orig. Mech Room0.092 % wt12/14/2020 0.2547 g

202011328-00010.008012/9/2020LJ-75 % wt

Site: HBM Add. 1<0.0080 % wt12/14/2020 0.2559 g

202011328-00020.008012/9/2020LJ-76 % wt

Site: HBM Add. 1 Top Fan<0.0080 % wt12/14/2020 0.2728 g

202011328-00030.008012/9/2020LJ-77 % wt

Site: HBM Add. 1<0.0080 % wt12/14/2020 0.2509 g

202011328-00040.008012/9/2020LJ-78 % wt

Site: CLM Roof Mech Room0.26 % wt12/14/2020 0.2513 g

202011328-00050.008012/9/2020LO-79 % wt





http://www.EMSL.com






Received: 12/11/20 11:00 AM


Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:

12/10/2020Collected:


EMSL Order:

Site: Rm 10280.030 % wt12/15/2020 0.2891 g

202011326-00010.008012/10/2020LL-80 % wt

Site: Rm 10240.083 % wt12/15/2020 0.2855 g

202011326-00020.008012/10/2020LL-81 % wt

Site: Rm 1014 Pool Room<0.0080 % wt12/15/2020 0.2669 g

202011326-00030.008012/10/2020LL-82 % wt

Site: Rm 1014 Pool Room<0.014 % wt12/15/2020 0.1479 g

202011326-00040.01412/10/2020LL-83 % wt

Site: Pool Room<0.0080 % wt12/15/2020 0.2692 g

202011326-00050.008012/10/2020LL-84 % wt

Site: Dark Room<0.0080 % wt12/15/2020 0.2742 g

202011326-00060.008012/10/2020LQ-85 % wt

Site: On Raised Roof on Drain Fixtures and Exhaust Cover<0.0080 % wt12/15/2020 0.2933 g

202011326-00070.008012/10/2020LR-86 % wt

Site: Brown Roof Vents0.17 % wt12/15/2020 0.2547 g

202011326-00080.008012/10/2020LR-87 % wt

Site: Doors/Windows<0.0080 % wt12/15/2020 0.2769 g

202011326-00090.008012/10/2020LY-88 % wt

Site: Kitchen Door0.24 % wt12/15/2020 0.2698 g

202011326-00100.04012/10/2020LY-89 % wt

Site: Doors<0.0080 % wt12/15/2020 0.2685 g

202011326-00110.008012/10/2020LU-90 % wt





http://www.EMSL.com






Received: 12/11/20 11:00 AM


Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:



EMSL Order:

Site: Play Area<0.0080 % wt12/15/2020 0.2665 g

202011326-00120.008012/10/2020LU-91 % wt

Site: E Side<0.0080 % wt12/15/2020 0.2621 g

202011326-00130.008012/10/2020LV-92 % wt





http://www.EMSL.com






Received: 12/16/20 10:30 AM

20-275 / NESHAP Pre-Demolition, MMI & JP Lord / 444 & 330 south 44th Street, Omaha, NE

Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:



EMSL Order:

Site: grey - rm 1052<0.0080 % wt12/18/2020 0.2695 g

202011478-00030.008012/14/2020LA-95 % wt

Site: turquois - rm 1082<0.0080 % wt12/18/2020 0.2748 g

202011478-00040.008012/14/2020LA-96 % wt

Site: purple - rm 1079<0.0080 % wt12/18/2020 0.2733 g

202011478-00050.008012/14/2020LA-97 % wt

Site: blue - elevator room<0.017 % wt12/18/2020 0.1163 g

202011478-00060.01712/14/2020LA-98 % wt





http://www.EMSL.com


ConcentrationAnalyzed Weight (g) RDL LeadClient SampleDescription Collected




Received: 12/16/20 10:30 AM

20-275 / NESHAP Pre-Demolition, MMI & JP Lord / 444 & 330 south 44th Street, Omaha, NE

Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:



EMSL Order:

Site: grey - rm 1053<40 mg/Kg12/18/2020 0.5258 g

202011478-00014012/14/2020LA-93 mg/Kg

Site: yellow - rm 1053<40 mg/Kg12/18/2020 0.5222 g

202011478-00024012/14/2020LA-94 mg/Kg





http://www.EMSL.com






Received: 12/16/20 10:30 AM

20-275 / NESHAP Pre-demolition, MMI & JP Lord / 444 & 330 South 44th Street, Omaha, NE

Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:



EMSL Order:

Site: wall paint - peach - 30480.038 % wt12/18/2020 0.2551 g

202011477-00010.008012/15/2020LG-99 % wt

Site: floor tile - peach - 3052 A<0.0080 % wt12/18/2020 0.2694 g

202011477-00030.008012/15/2020LG-101 % wt





http://www.EMSL.com


ConcentrationAnalyzed Weight (g) RDL LeadClient SampleDescription Collected




Received: 12/16/20 10:30 AM

20-275 / NESHAP Pre-demolition, MMI & JP Lord / 444 & 330 South 44th Street, Omaha, NE

Fax: (402) 397-3313Phone: (402) 397-5001

Project:



EMSL Order:

Site: wall tile - pink - 3052 A<40 mg/Kg12/18/2020 0.5101 g

202011477-00024012/15/2020LG-100 mg/Kg

Site: wall tile - light blue - 3058A<40 mg/Kg12/18/2020 0.5117 g

202011477-00044012/15/2020LG-102 mg/Kg

Site: floor tile - light blue - 3058A<40 mg/Kg12/18/2020 0.5220 g

202011477-00054012/15/2020LG-103 mg/Kg





http://www.EMSL.com


TABLE 3 - Miscellaneous Hazardous Materials

PCB - Polychlorinated Biphenyls BT- Battery MC – Miscellaneous Chemical WTA – Water Treatment Agent RF – Refrigerants MER - Mercury PP – Petroleum Products NA – Not Available

CL – Corrosive Liquid CP – Cationic Polymer I – Interior E – Exterior

EA - Each NS - Not Sampled SOL- Solvents FL-Flamable Liquids

Munroe-Meyer Institute & Former JP Lord School Table 3 – Miscellaneous Hazardous Materials Sampling Table


I/E HM # Description Location Sample # Condition Est. Quantity Unit Measure Comment

I PCB-01 Light Fixtures Throughout NS Good Throughout

Facility

I MER-01 Exit Lights Throughout NS Good Throughout

Facility

I PP-01 Hydraulic Oil Elevator

Rooms/AHU Rooms

Throughout Facility

NS Good Area Specific

I PP-02 Motor Oil CLM, Basement

Mechanincal Room

NS Good 5, 32 oz.

Containers

I MC-01 Aquachlor CLM 1st Floor,

South Mechanical

Room

NS Good 7, 55 gal.

Drums

I CL-01 Hydrochloric Acid CLM 1st Floor,

South Mechanical

Room

NS Good 4, 55 gal.

Drums

I PP-03 Roto-Inject Fluid CLM 1st Floor,

South Mechanical

Room

NS Good 3, 5 L

Containers

I MC-02 PVC Glue CLM 1st Floor,

South Mechanical

Room

NS Good 3 Cans

I MC-03 Anti-Freeze Hattie B. Munroe

Mechanical Rooms

NS Good 55 Gal Drums

TABLE 3 - Miscellaneous Hazardous Materials

PCB - Polychlorinated Biphenyls BT- Battery MC – Miscellaneous Chemical WTA – Water Treatment Agent RF – Refrigerants MER - Mercury PP – Petroleum Products NA – Not Available

CL – Corrosive Liquid CP – Cationic Polymer I – Interior E – Exterior

EA - Each NS - Not Sampled SOL- Solvents FL-Flamable Liquids

Munroe-Meyer Institute & Former JP Lord School Table 3 – Miscellaneous Hazardous Materials Sampling Table


I/E HM # Description Location Sample # Condition Est. Quantity Unit Measure Comment

I PCB-02 Transformers Electrical/

Mechanical Rooms

Throughout Facility

NS Good Throughout

Facility

I MC-04 Fire Extinguishers Thoughout Facility NS Good Throughout

Facility

I MER-02 Thermostats Throughout Facility NS Good Throughout

Facility

I RF-01 Refrigerant Cooling Units,

Throughout Facility

NS Good Throughout

Facility

State of NebraskaDepartment of Health and Human Services

Division of Public Health

Expiration: License #: Status:

1402

Colin J Lauenroth

09/15/2022

Asbestos Inspector

Active

University of Nebraska Medical Center - BidNet

Documents

Transcript of University of Nebraska Medical Center - BidNet